Catalog Parker

For Cylinder Division Plant Locations – See Page II.

39

B

ParkerHeavy DutyHydraulic CylindersSeries 2HExclusive with the Parker Stepped Cushion forincreased performance and productivity Faster cycle time Reduced hydraulic shock Reduced machine noise Lower machine maintenance

Heavy Duty Service – Industrial Tie-RodConstruction

Nominal Pressure – 3000 PSI Standard Bore Sizes – 1-1/2" through 6" Piston Rod Diameters – 5/8" through 4" 18 Standard Mounting Styles

For additional information – call your local Parker Cylinder Distributor.

40

The heavy-duty hydrauliccylinder with featuresonly Parker can promise– and deliver!Series 2H cylinders keep on performing like youexpect from Parker — producing more power perpound, more power per dollar — over millions oftrouble-free cycles. Everything you need for reliable3,000 psi performance. Patented “Jewel” rod glandfor longer life and lower operating costs. Chrome-plated, case hardened piston rods. Rod end studs ofhigh yield-strength steel, with rolled threads for addedstrength. Tie rods with rolled threads and steel nuts.Floating cushions with float-check action and positivemetal-to-metal seal. And every Parker cylinder isindividually tested before it leaves our plant.


41

B

Series 2HHeavy Duty Hydraulic Cylinders

Specifications/Mountings

Standard Specifications• Heavy Duty Service – ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R2 - 1996

Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards• Standard Construction – Square Head – Tie Rod Design• Nominal Pressure – 3000 P.S.I.*• Standard Fluid – Hydraulic Oil• Standard Temperature – -10° F to +165° F**• Bore Sizes – 11/2" through 6" (Larger sizes available)

Tie Rods Extended Both Ends Head Rectangular Flange

Head Square Flange Head Rectangular Cap Rectangular Flange Cap Square Flange

(NFPA ME5)

Style JJ11/2 -6"

Page 46

(NFPA MF2)

Style H11/2 -6"

Page 48

(NFPA MF6)

Style HB11/2 -6"

Page 48

(NFPA MF5)

Style JB11/2 -6"

Page 46

(NFPA MX3) (NFPA MX2)

Style TC11/2 -6"

Page 44

(NFPA MX1)

Style TD11/2 -6"

Page 44

(NFPA MF1)

Style J11/2 -6"

Page 46

Cap Rectangular Side Lug Centerline Lugs Side Tapped

(NFPA MS2)

Style C11/2 -6"

Page 50

(NFPA MS3)

Style E11/2 -6"

Page 50

(NFPA MS4)

Style F11/2 -6"

Page 50

(NFPA ME6)

Style HH11/2 -6"

Page 48

Side End Angles Side End Lugs Cap Fixed Clevis

(NFPA MS7)

Style G11/2 -6"

Page 52

(NFPA MP1)

Style BB11/2 -6"

Page 52

(NFPA MT1)

Style D11/2 -6"

Page 54

(NFPA MS1)

Style CB11/2 -6"

Page 52

Double Rod Cylinders

Most of the aboveillustrated mountingstyles are available indouble rod cylinders. See Catalog Page 58.

Head Trunnion

Style KT Shown11/2 -6"

Cap Trunnion Intermediate Fixed Trunnion Spherical Bearing

(NFPA MT4)

Style DD11/2 -6"

Page 54

Style SB11/2 -6"

Page 56

(NFPA MT2)

Style DB11/2 -6"

Page 54

Available Mounting StylesNote: Series 2H Hydraulic Cylinders fully meet ANSI/(NFPA) T3.6.7R2 - 1996 Specifications and Mounting Dimension Standards for Square Head Industrial Fluid Power Cylinders.

Tie Rods Extended Head End

Style TB11/2 -6"

Page 44

Tie Rods Extended Cap End

• Piston Rod Diameter – 5/8" through 4"• Mounting Styles – 18 standard styles at various application ratings• Strokes – Available in any practical stroke length• Cushions – Optional at either end or both ends of stroke.

“Float Check” at cap end.• Rod Ends – Three Standard Choices – Specials to Order*If hydraulic operating pressure exceeds 3000 P.S.I., send application data forengineering evaluation and recommendation. See section C, page 84 for actual designfactors.

** See section C, page 83 for higher temperature service.In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalogare subject to change.


42

The inside story on whyseries 2H is your best choice inheavy duty hydraulic cylinders

Parker's New, ExclusiveStepped floating cushionscombine the best features ofknown cushion technology.Deceleration devices or built-in “cushions” are optional and can besupplied at head end, cap end, or both ends without change inenvelope or mounting dimensions. Parker cylinder cushions are astepped design and combine the best features of known cushiontechnology.Standard straight or tapered cushions have been used in industrialcylinders over a very broad range of applications. Parker researchhas found that both designs have their limitations.As a result, Parker has taken a new approach in cushioning ofindustrial hydraulic cylinders and for specific load and velocityconditions have been able to obtain deceleration curves that comevery close to the ideal. The success lies in a stepped sleeve orspear concept where the steps are calculated to approximatetheoretical orifice areas curves.In the cushion performance chart, pressure traces show theresults of typical orifice flow conditions. Tests of a three-stepsleeve or spear show three pressure pulses coinciding with thesteps. The deceleration cushion plunger curves shape comes veryclose to being theoretical, with the exception of the last 1/2 inch of

Piston Rod Stud –Furnished on 2" diameter rodsand smaller when standardstyle #4 rod end threads arerequired or on 13/8" diameterrods and smaller when style#8 threads are required. Alsoavailable in 2 times thecatalog “A” dimension length.Studs have rolled threads andare made from high strengthsteel. Anaerobic adhesive isused to permanently lock thestud to the piston rod.

“Jewel” Rod GlandAssembly –Externally removablewithout cylinderdisassembly. Longbearing surface isinboard of the seals,assuring positivelubrication fromwithin the cylinder.An “O” ring is usedas a seal betweengland and head,and also serves asa prevailing torque-type lock.

High Strength TieRods – Made from100,000 psi minimumyield steel with rolledthreads for addedstrength.

Adjustable Floating Stepped Cushions – For maximumperformance – economical and flexible for even the most demandingapplications – provides superior performance in reducing shock.Cushions are optional and can be supplied at head end, cap end, orboth ends without change in envelope or mounting dimensions.

The Cylinder Body –Heavy-wall steeltubing, honed to amicro finish bore.

Steel Head – Bored andgrooved to provide concentricityfor mating parts.

Ports – S.A.E. “O” ring portsare standard.

End Seals – Pressure-actuatedcylinder body-to-head and cap“O” rings.

travel. This is a constant shape in order to have some flexibility inapplication. The stepped cushion design shows reduced pressurepeaks for most load and speed conditions, with comparablereduction of objectionable stopping forces being transmitted to theload and the support structure.All Parker Hannifincushions areadjustable.The Series 2Hcylinder designincorporates thelongest cushionsleeve and cushionspear that can beprovided in thestandard envelopewithout decreasing therod bearing and pistonbearing strengths.

(1)When a cushion isspecified at the headend:

a. A self-centering stepped sleeve is furnished on the pistonrod assembly.

b. A needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the

Primary Seal – New TS-2000 Rod Seal is aproven leakproof design – completely self-compensating and self-relieving to withstandvariations and conform to mechanical deflec-tion that may occur.

Secondary Seal –Double-Service Wiperseal®

(Hannifin Patent #2907596) –wipes clean any oil filmadhering to the rod on theextend stroke and cleansthe rod on the return stroke.

Stepped CushionsSleeve Design Spear Design


43

B

OPTIONAL PISTONS

PHENOLICBEARINGS

SYNTHETIC RUBBEREXPANDER RINGS

BRONZEFILLED

TEFLON RINGS

Cap13/16

13/16

11/8

11/8

11/8

11/8

15/16

15/16

11/411/4

11/811/8

Cap11/211/2

115/16

115/16

22

Head*15/16

15/16

113/16

111/16

21/16

115/16

Head*11/811/8

11/8

11/8

11/8

11/8

13/811/16

13/811/16

11/16

11/16

Piston Rod – Medium carbon steel, induction case-hardened, hard chrome-plated and polished to 10 RMS finish. Piston rods are made from 90,000 to 100,000 psi minimum yield material in 5/8" through 4" diameters. Larger diameters vary between 57,000 and 90,000 psi minimum material, depending on rod diameter. The piston thread equals the catalog style #4 rod end thread for each rod diameter to assure proper piston-to-rod thread strength. Two wrench flats are provided for rod end attachment.

Ports – S.A.E. “O” ring ports are standard.Steel Cap – Bored and grooved to provide concentricity for mating parts.

Optional PortsPorts – N.P.T.F. ports are optional at no extra charge. Oversize N.P.T.F. and S.A.E. ports are available at extra charge.Seals – Buna-N (Nitrile) seals are standard.Fluorocarbon Seals – Optional at extra charge.

Step Cut Iron Piston Rings are standard.

One-Piece Nodular Iron Piston – The wide piston surface contacting cylinder bore reduces bearing loads. Anaerobic adhesive is used to permanently lock and seal the piston to the rod.

Align-A-Groove – (Patent #3043639) – A 3/16" wide surface machined at each end of the cylinder body. Makes precise mounting quick and easy.

Alloy Steel Tie Rod Nuts

Cushion Length – InchCyl.

BoreIn.

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

RodDia.In.5/811

13/81

13/4

13/8

213/4

21/2

231/2

RodNo.121212121212

Cushion Length – InchCyl.

BoreIn.

6

7

8

RodDia.In.21/2435

31/2

51/2

RodNo.

121212

Cushion Length

*Head end cushions for rod diameters not listed have cushion lengths with the limits shown.

head even when wide open. It may be identified by the fact that it is socket-keyed. It is located on side number 2, in all mounting styles except D, DB, DD, JJ, HH and E. In these styles it is located on side number 3. c. On 6" bore and larger cylinders (except for 21/2" bore with code 2 rod), a springless check valve is provided that is also flush with the side of the head and is mounted adjacent to the needle valve except on mounting style C, where it is mounted opposite the needle valve. It may be identified by the fact that it is slotted. d. On 11/2" - 5" bore cylinders a slotted sleeve design is used in place of the check valve.

e. 11/2" - 21/2" bore cylinders use a cartridge style needle valve (see Figure A).

(2) When a cushion is specified at the cap end: a. A cushion stepped spear is provided on the piston rod.

The exclusive “Jewel” gland gives you longer cylinder life, better performance and lower costs.An extra-long inboard bearing surface insures lubrication from within the cylinder. Outboard of the bearing surface are two leakproof seals – The TS-2000 and Wiperseal. The serrated TS-2000 (primary seal) is completely self-compensating and self-relieving. It adjusts to mechanical deflections or any pressure variation from near-zero to rated operating pressure. The result is positive, no-leak sealing – regardless of conditions.The Wiperseal does double duty. On the advance stroke, it acts as a secondary pressure seal. On the return, it wipes away any dirt on the rod. This means less wear on bearing surfaces and internal parts. Longer life for working parts. And, less loss of fluid. Plus, you can replace a “Jewel” gland without removing the tie rods or the retainer. Just a few twists with a spanner wrench does the job.Optional Pistons

Lipseal® Piston – Optional at no extra charge. Zero leakage under static condi-tions for hydraulic pressures up to 3000 psi. Seals are self-compensating to con-form to variations in pressure, mechanical deflection, and wear. Back-up washers prevent extrusion.

Hi Load Piston – Optional at extra charge. Includes wear rings and bronze-filled PTFE seals. Two wear rings serve as bearings which deform radially under side-loading, enabling the load to be spread over a larger area and reduce unit loading. Bronze-filled PTFE seals are designed for extrusion-free, leak-proof service and longer cylinder life than the lipseal type piston.

Nut Retained Piston – Optional at extra charge.

Figure A

b. A “float check” self-centering bushing is provided which incorporates a large flow check valve for fast “out-stroke” action. c. A socket-keyed needle valve is provided that is flush with the side of the cap when wide open. It is located on side number 2 in all mounting styles except D, DB, DD, JJ, HH and E. In these styles it is located on side number 3.


Rod End Dimensions — see table 2Thread Style 9(NFPA Style SF)Small Female

Thread Style 8(NFPA Style IM)Intermediate Male

Thread Style 4(NFPA Style SM)Small Male

A high strength rod end stud is supplied on thread style 4 through 2"diameter rods and on thread style 8 through 13/8" diameter rods. Largersizes or special rod ends are cut threads. Style 4 rod ends arerecommended where the workpiece is secured against the rod shoulder.

When the workpiece is not shouldered, style 4 rod ends are recommendedthrough 2" piston rod diameters and style 8 rod ends are recommended onlarger diameters. Use style 9 for applications where female rod end threadsare required. If rod end is not specified, style 4 will be supplied.

“Special” ThreadStyle 3Special thread,extension, rod eye,blank, etc., are alsoavailable.To order, specify“Style 3” and givedesired dimen-sions for CC or KK,A and LA. Ifotherwise special,furnish dimen-sioned sketch.


44

Tie Rods Extended Head EndStyle TB(NFPA Style MX3)

Tie Rods Extended Cap EndStyle TC(NFPA Style MX2)

Tie Rods Extended Both EndsStyle TD(NFPA Style MX1)

Tie Rod Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Basic Mounting (T) — NFPA MXO — Not shown is no tie rod extended and can be supplied upon request.


SAE straight thread ports are standard and are indicated by port number.NPTF ports are available at no extra charge.

Table 3 —Envelope andMountingDimensionsTable 2—Rod Dimensions

Table 1—Envelope and Mounting Dimensions


45

B

55/8 6

6

61/4 61/8

65/8

63/8

71/8

71/2

73/8

75/8

8

73/4

81/4

81/2

81/2

81/2

95/8

95/8

95/8

95/8

Bore AA BB DD E F G J K R

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

1

13/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

ThreadRod Style Style +.000

Rod Dia. 8 4 & 9 -.002Bore No. MM CC KK A B C D LA NA V W Y ZB ZJ

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

1

1

13/8

1

13/4

13/8

13/8

2

13/4

13/4

21/2

2

2

31/2

21/2

3

21/2

4

3

31/2

EE

NPTF SAE

Add Stroke

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

2.3

2.9

3.6

4.6

5.4

7.0

8.1

13/8

113/16

113/16

25/16

25/16

33/16

35/8

3/8-24

1/2-20

1/2-20

5/8-18

5/8-18

7/8-14

1-14

21/2

3

31/2

41/2

5

61/2

71/2

10

10

10

12

12

12

16

3/8

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7/8

1

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

2

2

21/4

11/2

11/2

11/2

13/4

13/4

13/4

21/4

3/8

7/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

13/16

7/8

1.63

2.05

2.55

3.25

3.82

4.95

5.73

LB P

5

51/4

53/8

61/4

65/8

71/8

83/8

1/2

1/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

3/4

1

Add Stroke

1/2-207/8-147/8-14

11/4-127/8-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

13/4-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/4-12

13/4-12

13/4-12

31/4-12

21/4-12

23/4-12

21/4-12

33/4-12

23/4-12

31/4-12

3/81/21/25/81/23/45/85/87/83/43/4

17/87/8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

7/16-203/4-163/4-16

1-143/4-16

11/4-12

1-14

1-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

17/8-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/2-12

17/8-12

21/4-12

17/8-12

3-12

21/4-12

21/2-12

3/4

11/8

11/8

15/8

11/8

2

15/8

15/8

21/4

2

2

3

21/4

21/4

31/2

3

31/2

3

4

31/2

31/2

1.124

1.499

1.499

1.999

1.499

2.374

1.999

1.999

2.624

2.374

2.374

3.124

2.624

2.624

4.249

3.124

3.749

3.124

4.749

3.749

4.249

1/27/87/8

11/87/8

11/2

11/8

11/8

111/16

11/2

11/2

21/16

111/16

111/16

3

21/16

25/8

21/16

33/8

25/8

3

13/8

21/8

17/8

25/8

17/8

31/4

25/8

21/2

31/2

31/8

3

43/8

33/8

33/8

47/8

43/8

47/8

41/4

51/4

43/4

43/4

9/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

111/16

15/16

15/16

115/16

111/16

111/16

23/8

115/16

115/16

33/8

23/8

27/8

23/8

37/8

27/8

33/8

1/41/21/43/81/41/23/81/43/83/81/43/81/41/43/83/83/81/41/41/41/4

2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

6

63/8

67/16

611/16

69/16

71/16

613/16

711/16

81/16

715/16

83/16

89/16

85/16

91/16

95/16

95/16

95/16

101/2

101/2

101/2

101/2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

4

1(Std.)

2

3

4

Rod Extensions and Pilot Dimensions

Tie Rod Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes









46

Head RectangularFlange MountingStyle J(NFPA Style MF1)

Head Square Flange MountingStyle JB(NFPA Style MF5)

Head Rectangular MountingStyle JJ(NFPA Style ME5)

Rectangular Flangeand Head Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

For pressures exceeding those shown use mounting styles JB or JJ.

*Maximum pressure rating —push application.

For Style "J" Mount

1 2 3 4

1 1/2 1500 1000 – –

2 2000 1200 – –

2 1/2 2000 1100 1500 –

3 1/4 1800 1300 1400 –

4 1800 1300 1700 –

5 1300 800 1200 1000

6 1200 800 1000 900

Max. PSI - Push*

Rod CodeBore Size

For Style "JB" Mount

1 2 3 4

1 1/2 3000 3000 – –

2 3000 3000 – –

2 1/2 3000 3000 3000 –

3 1/4 3000 3000 3000 –

4 3000 3000 3000 –

5 3000 3000 3000 3000

6 3000 2700 3000 2700

Rod CodeBore Size

Max. PSI - Push*

*Maximum pressure rating —push application.






47

BRod Style Style +.000Rod Dia. 8 4 & 9 -.002

Bore No. MM CC KK A B C D KB LA LAF NA V W RD RT WF Y ZB 6

63/8

67/16

611/16

69/16

71/16

613/16

711/16

81/16

715/16

83/16

89/16

85/16

91/16

95/16

95/16

95/16

101/2

101/2

101/2

101/2

EE

Rectangluar Flangeand Head Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Bore E F FB G J K R TF UF

Thread

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

1

1

13/8

1

13/4

13/8

13/8

2

13/4

13/4

21/2

2

2

31/2

21/2

3

21/2

4

3

31/2

Add Stroke

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

21/2

3

31/2

41/2

5

61/2

71/2

1/2

1/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

3/4

1

10

10

10

12

12

12

16

3/8

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7/8

1

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

2

2

21/4

11/2

11/2

11/2

13/4

13/4

13/4

21/4

3/8

7/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

13/16

7/8

1.63

2.05

2.55

3.25

3.82

4.95

5.73

37/16

41/8

45/8

57/8

63/8

83/16

97/16

41/4

51/8

55/8

71/8

75/8

93/4

111/4

5

51/4

53/8

61/4

65/8

71/8

83/8

7/16

9/16

9/16

11/16

11/16

15/16

11/16

1/2-207/8-147/8-14

11/4-127/8-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

13/4-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/4-12

13/4-12

13/4-12

31/4-12

21/4-12

23/4-12

21/4-12

33/4-12

23/4-12

31/4-12

1.124

1.499

1.499

1.999

1.499

2.374

1.999

1.999

2.624

2.374

2.374

3.124

2.624

2.624

4.249

3.124

3.749

3.124

4.749

3.749

4.249

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

4

1(Std.)

2

3

4


NPTF SAE LB LG P

45/8

45/8

43/4

51/2

53/4

61/4

73/8

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8

2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

3/4

11/8

11/8

15/8

11/8

2

15/8

15/8

21/4

2

2

3

21/4

21/4

31/2

3

31/2

3

4

31/2

31/2

3/81/21/25/81/23/45/85/87/83/43/4

17/87/8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1/27/87/8

11/87/8

11/2

11/8

11/8

111/16

11/2

11/2

21/16

111/16

111/16

3

21/16

25/8

21/16

33/8

25/8

3

13/8

21/8

17/8

25/8

17/8

31/4

25/8

21/2

31/2

31/8

3

43/8

33/8

33/8

47/8

43/8

47/8

41/4

51/4

43/4

43/4

9/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

111/16

15/16

15/16

115/16

111/16

111/16

23/8

115/16

115/16

33/8

23/8

27/8

23/8

37/8

27/8

33/8

1/41/21/43/81/41/23/81/43/83/81/43/81/41/43/83/83/81/41/41/41/4

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

1

13/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

AddStroke

1 13/8

13/8

15/8

13/8

17/8

15/8

15/8

2

17/8

17/8

21/4

2

2

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

3/83/83/83/83/83/83/83/85/83/83/85/85/85/85/85/85/85/83/45/85/8

21/8

21/2

21/2

3

21/2

31/2

3

3

4

31/2

31/2

41/2

4

4

53/4

41/2

51/4

41/2

61/2

51/4

53/4

13/4

21/2

21/2

31/4

21/2

37/8

31/4

31/4

41/4

37/8

37/8

51/4

41/4

41/4

53/4

51/4

53/4

51/4

61/4

53/4

53/4

0

0

01/4

01/41/41/41/81/41/41/41/81/81/41/41/41/41/41/41/4

7/16-203/4-163/4-16

1-143/4-16

11/4-12

1-14

1-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

17/8-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/2-12

17/8-12

21/4-12

17/8-12

3-12

21/4-12

21/2-12

Table 3 —Envelope andMountingDimensions









48

Cap Square Flange MountingStyle HB(NFPA Style MF6)

Cap Rectangular MountingStyle HH(NFPA Style ME6)

Rectangular Flangeand Cap Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

For pressures exceeding those shown use mounting styles HB or HH.Cap RectangularFlange MountingStyle H(NFPA Style MF2)

*Maximum pressure rating —pull application.

For Style "H" Mount

1 2 3 4

1 1/2 2500 3000 – –

2 3000 3000 – –

2 1/2 3000 3000 3000 –

3 1/4 3000 3000 3000 –

4 3000 3000 3000 –

5 2000 3000 2000 2500

6 1800 2500 2000 2000

Bore Size

Max. PSI - Pull*

Rod Code






49

B

6

63/8

65/8

67/8

63/4

71/4

7

77/8

81/4

81/8

81/2

87/8

85/8

91/8

93/8

93/8

93/8

105/8

105/8

105/8

105/8

Rectangular Flangeand Cap Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

EE

Bore E F FB G J K R TF UF

Add Stroke

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

21/2

3

31/2

41/2

5

61/2

71/2

1/2

1/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

3/4

1

10

10

10

12

12

12

16

3/8

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7/8

1

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

2

2

21/4

11/2

11/2

11/2

13/4

13/4

13/4

21/4

3/8

7/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

13/16

7/8

1.63

2.05

2.55

3.25

3.82

4.95

5.73

37/16

41/8

45/8

57/8

63/8

83/16

97/16

41/4

51/8

55/8

71/8

75/8

93/4

111/4

5

51/4

53/8

61/4

65/8

71/8

83/8

7/16

9/16

9/16

11/16

11/16

15/16

11/16

NPTF SAE LB P

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8



Rod Dia. 8 4 & 9 -.002Bore No. MM CC KK A B C D LA NA V W WF Y XF ZF

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

1

1

13/8

1

13/4

13/8

13/8

2

13/4

13/4

21/2

2

2

31/2

21/2

3

21/2

4

3

31/2

1/2-207/8-147/8-14

11/4-127/8-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

13/4-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/4-12

13/4-12

13/4-12

31/4-12

21/4-12

23/4-12

21/4-12

33/4-12

23/4-12

31/4-12

1.124

1.499

1.499

1.999

1.499

2.374

1.999

1.999

2.624

2.374

2.374

3.124

2.624

2.624

4.249

3.124

3.749

3.124

4.749

3.749

4.249

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

4

1(Std.)

2

3

4


3/4

11/8

11/8

15/8

11/8

2

15/8

15/8

21/4

2

2

3

21/4

21/4

31/2

3

31/2

3

4

31/2

31/2

3/81/21/25/81/23/45/85/87/83/43/4

17/87/8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1/27/87/8

11/87/8

11/2

11/8

11/8

111/16

11/2

11/2

21/16

111/16

111/16

3

21/16

25/8

21/16

33/8

25/8

3

7/16-203/4-163/4-16

1-143/4-16

11/4-12

1-14

1-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

17/8-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/2-12

17/8-12

21/4-12

17/8-12

3-12

21/4-12

21/2-12

13/8

21/8

17/8

25/8

17/8

31/4

25/8

21/2

31/2

31/8

3

43/8

33/8

33/8

47/8

43/8

47/8

41/4

51/4

43/4

43/4

9/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

111/16

15/16

15/16

115/16

111/16

111/16

23/8

115/16

115/16

33/8

23/8

27/8

23/8

37/8

27/8

33/8

1/41/21/43/81/41/23/81/43/83/81/43/81/41/43/83/83/81/41/41/41/4

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

1

13/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

1 13/8

13/8

15/8

13/8

17/8

15/8

15/8

2

17/8

17/8

21/4

2

2

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

Add Stroke

55/8

6

6

61/4

61/8

65/8

63/8

71/8

71/2

73/8

75/8

8

73/4

81/4

81/2

81/2

81/2

95/8

95/8

95/8

95/8









50

Side Lug MountingsStyle C(NFPA Style MS2)

Centerline Lugs MountingStyle E(NFPA Style MS3)

Side Tapped MountingStyle F(NFPA Style MS4)

Side Lugs, Centerline Lugsand Side Tapped Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes






51

B

6

63/8

67/16

611/16

69/16

71/16

613/16

711/16

81/16

715/16

83/16

89/16

85/16

91/16

95/16

95/16

95/16

101/2

101/2

101/2

101/2

Side Lugs, Centerline Lugsand Side Tapped Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes


Rod Dia. 8 4 & 9 -.002Bore No. MM CC KK A B C D LA NA V W ND XS XT Y ZB

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

1

1

13/8

1

13/4

13/8

13/8

2

13/4

13/4

21/2

2

2

31/2

21/2

3

21/2

4

3

31/2

1/2-207/8-147/8-14

11/4-127/8-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

13/4-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/4-12

13/4-12

13/4-12

31/4-12

21/4-12

23/4-12

21/4-12

33/4-12

23/4-12

31/4-12

1.124

1.499

1.499

1.999

1.499

2.374

1.999

1.999

2.624

2.374

2.374

3.124

2.624

2.624

4.249

3.124

3.749

3.124

4.749

3.749

4.249

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

4

1(Std.)

2

3

4


3/4

11/8

11/8

15/8

11/8

2

15/8

15/8

21/4

2

2

3

21/4

21/4

31/2

3

31/2

3

4

31/2

31/2

3/81/21/25/81/23/45/85/87/83/43/4

17/87/8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1/27/87/8

11/87/8

11/2

11/8

11/8

111/16

11/2

11/2

21/16

111/16

111/16

3

21/16

25/8

21/16

33/8

25/8

3

7/16-203/4-163/4-16

1-143/4-16

11/4-12

1-14

1-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

17/8-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/2-12

17/8-12

21/4-12

17/8-12

3-12

21/4-12

21/2-12

13/8

21/8

17/8

25/8

17/8

31/4

25/8

21/2

31/2

31/8

3

43/8

33/8

33/8

47/8

43/8

47/8

41/4

51/4

43/4

43/4

9/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

111/16

15/16

15/16

115/16

111/16

111/16

23/8

115/16

115/16

33/8

23/8

27/8

23/8

37/8

27/8

33/8

1/41/21/43/81/41/23/81/43/83/81/43/81/41/43/83/83/81/41/41/41/4

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

1

13/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

3/83/8

7/16

7/16

1/21/21/2

11/16

11/16

11/16

11/16

11/16

11/16

1

1

1

1

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

Bore E F G J K NT SB* ST SU SW TN TS US

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

21/2

3

31/2

41/2

5

61/2

71/2

EE

NPTF SAE

1/2

1/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

3/4

1

10

10

10

12

12

12

16

3/8

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7/8

1

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

2

2

21/4

11/2

11/2

11/2

13/4

13/4

13/4

21/4

3/8

7/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

13/16

7/8

LB P SN SS

37/8

35/8

33/8

41/8

4

41/2

51/8

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

51/8

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8

5

51/4

53/8

61/4

65/8

71/8

83/8

Add Stroke

3/8-16

1/2-13

5/8-11

3/4-10

1-8

1-8

11/4-7

7/16

9/16

13/16

13/16

11/16

11/16

15/16

1/2

3/4

1

1

11/4

11/4

11/2

15/16

11/4

19/16

19/16

2

2

21/2

3/8

1/2

11/16

11/16

7/8

7/8

11/8

3/4

15/16

15/16

11/2

21/16

215/16

35/16

31/4

4

47/8

57/8

63/4

81/4

93/4

4

5

61/4

71/4

81/2

10

12

* Upper surface spotfaced for socket head screws.


2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

AddStroke

2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

13/8

13/4

17/8

21/8

21/16

29/16

25/16

25/16

211/16

29/16

23/4

31/8

27/8

27/8

31/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

33/8









52

Side End Lugs MountingStyle G(NFPA Style MS7)

Cap Fixed Clevis MountingStyle BB(NFPA Style MP1)

Side End Angles MountingStyle CB(NFPA Style MS1)

Side End Angles, Side End Lugsand Cap Fixed Clevis Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

The maximum recommended operating pressurefor Style CB is 500 psi. The recommendedminimum stroke length is two times the bore size.

Tie rods thread into cap on all bore sizes.

ZE + STROKE

XE + STROKE

SE + STROKE

P + STROKE

LB + STROKE

EE

Y

W K

J ELEL EOEO F G

MM

E

E

R

EB 4 HOLES

ET

-.005-.010

For this cylindermounting style, boththe mounting lugsand cylinder end capsmust rest on a firm surface.






53

B

67/8

71/4

77/16

711/16

79/16

81/16

713/16

87/8

91/4

91/8

93/8

93/4

91/2

101/2

103/4

103/4

103/4

123/16

123/16

123/16

123/16

EE Add Stroke

Side End Angles, Side End Lugsand Cap Fixed Clevis Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes


Rod Dia. 8 4 & 9 -.002Bore No. MM CC KK A B C D LA NA V W Y XA XC XE ZA ZC ZE

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

1

1

13/8

1

13/4

13/8

13/8

2

13/4

13/4

21/2

2

2

31/2

21/2

3

21/2

4

3

31/2

1/2-207/8-147/8-14

11/4-127/8-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

13/4-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/4-12

13/4-12

13/4-12

31/4-12

21/4-12

23/4-12

21/4-12

33/4-12

23/4-12

31/4-12

1.124

1.499

1.499

1.999

1.499

2.374

1.999

1.999

2.624

2.374

2.374

3.124

2.624

2.624

4.249

3.124

3.749

3.124

4.749

3.749

4.249

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

4

1(Std.)

2

3

4


3/4

11/8

11/8

15/8

11/8

2

15/8

15/8

21/4

2

2

3

21/4

21/4

31/2

3

31/2

3

4

31/2

31/2

3/81/21/25/81/23/45/85/87/83/43/4

17/87/8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1/27/87/8

11/87/8

11/2

11/8

11/8

111/16

11/2

11/2

21/16

111/16

111/16

3

21/16

25/8

21/16

33/8

25/8

3

Add Stroke

7/16-203/4-163/4-16

1-143/4-16

11/4-12

1-14

1-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

17/8-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/2-12

17/8-12

21/4-12

17/8-12

3-12

21/4-12

21/2-12

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

* Dimension CD is pin diameter.

Bore AB AH AL AO AT CB CD* CW E EB NPTF SAE EL EO ES ET F G J K L LR M MR R S LB P SA SE

.501

.751

.751

1.001

1.376

1.751

2.001

21/2

3

31/2

41/2

5

61/2

71/2

5

51/4

53/8

61/4

65/8

71/8

83/8

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8

3/8

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7/8

1

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

2

2

21/4

11/2

11/2

11/2

13/4

13/4

13/4

21/4

3/8

7/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

13/16

7/8

9/16

1

15/16

11/4

13/4

21/16

25/16

3/4

11/4

11/4

11/2

21/8

21/4

21/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

1

13/8

13/4

2

5/8

15/16

15/16

13/16

15/8

21/8

23/8

1.63

2.05

2.55

3.25

3.82

4.95

5.73

13/4

2

23/8

31/8

31/4

43/4

53/8

3/8

1/2

1/2

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7

73/4

73/4

97/8

107/8

113/8

131/4

63/4

71/8

71/4

81/2

87/8

101/8

113/4

1/2

1/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

3/4

1

10

10

10

12

12

12

16

3/4

7/8

7/8

11/4

11/4

11/2

13/4

7/8

15/16

15/16

11/4

11/4

11/2

13/4

7/8

15/16

15/16

11/8

11/8

11/2

111/16

7/16

9/16

11/16

13/16

11/16

11/16

15/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

11/16

11/16

15/16

11/16

13/8

111/16

115/16

29/16

213/16

311/16

41/4

1

11/4

13/16

113/16

21/8

21/8

27/16

3/8

1/2

9/16

11/16

7/8

7/8

11/16

1/8

1/8

1/8

1/4

1/4

5/16

3/8

3/4

11/4

11/4

11/2

2

21/2

21/2

1/2

5/8

5/8

3/4

1

11/4

11/4

13/8

21/8

17/8

25/8

17/8

31/4

25/8

21/2

31/2

31/8

3

43/8

33/8

33/8

47/8

43/8

47/8

41/4

51/4

43/4

43/4

9/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

111/16

15/16

15/16

115/16

111/16

111/16

23/8

115/16

115/16

33/8

23/8

27/8

23/8

37/8

27/8

33/8

1/41/21/43/81/41/23/81/43/83/81/43/81/41/43/83/83/81/41/41/41/4

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

1

13/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

65/8

7

71/4

71/2

75/16

713/16

79/16

815/16

95/16

93/16

93/4

101/8

97/8

103/8

105/8

105/8

105/8

121/16

121/16

121/16

121/16

63/8

63/4

71/4

71/2

73/8

77/8

75/8

85/8

9

87/8

93/4

101/8

97/8

101/2

103/4

103/4

103/4

121/8

121/8

121/8

121/8

61/2

67/8

615/16

73/16

71/16

79/16

75/16

81/4

85/8

81/2

83/4

91/8

87/8

93/4

10

10

10

115/16

115/16

115/16

115/16

7

73/8

73/4

8

77/8

83/8

81/8

95/8

10

97/8

105/8

11

103/4

111/4

111/2

111/2

111/2

131/8

131/8

131/8

131/8

67/8

71/4

8

81/4

81/8

85/8

83/8

95/8

10

97/8

111/8

111/2

111/4

121/4

121/2

121/2

121/2

141/8

141/8

141/8

141/8


+.000-.002

Caution: When using mounting styles CB and G, check clearance between mounting members and rod attachment or accessory. If necessary, specify longer rodextension to avoid interference with mounting members.









54

Head Trunnion MountingStyle D(NFPA Style MT1)

Cap Trunnion MountingStyle DB(NFPA Style MT2)

Intermediate Fixed Trunnion MountingStyle DD(NFPA Style MT4)

Trunnion Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

For "D" Style MountMaximum PressureRating - PSI

Bore PSI

1 1/2 3000

2 3000

2 1/2 3000

3 1/4 2800

4 1800

5 1200

6 1000

For "DB" Style MountMaximum PressureRating - PSI

Bore PSI

1 1/2 3000

2 3000

2 1/2 3000

3 1/4 2800

4 1800

5 1200

6 1000

For "DD" Style MountMaximum PressureRating - PSI

Bore PSI

1 1/2 3000

2 3000

2 1/2 3000

3 1/4 2800

4 1800

5 1200

6 1000






55

B

6

63/8

67/16

611/16

69/16

71/16

613/16

711/16

81/16

715/16

83/16

89/16

85/16

91/16

95/16

95/16

95/16

101/2

101/2

101/2

101/2

Style DDMinimum

Stroke0

1/4

1/8

3/8

1/8

0

1/4

Rod Style Style +.000Rod Dia. 8 4 & 9 -.002

Bore No. MM CC KK A B C D LA NA V W XG XI Y XJ ZB

Trunnion Mountings11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

Thread

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

1

1

13/8

1

13/4

13/8

13/8

2

13/4

13/4

21/2

2

2

31/2

21/2

3

21/2

4

3

31/2

1/2-207/8-147/8-14

11/4-127/8-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

13/4-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/4-12

13/4-12

13/4-12

31/4-12

21/4-12

23/4-12

21/4-12

33/4-12

23/4-12

31/4-12

1.124

1.499

1.499

1.999

1.499

2.374

1.999

1.999

2.624

2.374

2.374

3.124

2.624

2.624

4.249

3.124

3.749

3.124

4.749

3.749

4.249

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

1(Std.)

2

3

4

1(Std.)

2

3

4


3/4

11/8

11/8

15/8

11/8

2

15/8

15/8

21/4

2

2

3

21/4

21/4

31/2

3

31/2

3

4

31/2

31/2

3/81/21/25/81/23/45/85/87/83/43/4

17/87/8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1/27/87/8

11/87/8

11/2

11/8

11/8

111/16

11/2

11/2

21/16

111/16

111/16

3

21/16

25/8

21/16

33/8

25/8

3

7/16-203/4-163/4-16

1-143/4-16

11/4-12

1-14

1-14

11/2-12

11/4-12

11/4-12

17/8-12

11/2-12

11/2-12

21/2-12

17/8-12

21/4-12

17/8-12

3-12

21/4-12

21/2-12

13/8

21/8

17/8

25/8

17/8

31/4

25/8

21/2

31/2

31/8

3

43/8

33/8

33/8

47/8

43/8

47/8

41/4

51/4

43/4

43/4

9/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

15/16

111/16

15/16

15/16

115/16

111/16

111/16

23/8

115/16

115/16

33/8

23/8

27/8

23/8

37/8

27/8

33/8

1/41/21/43/81/41/23/81/43/83/81/43/81/41/43/83/83/81/41/41/41/4

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

1

13/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

2

23/8

23/8

25/8

23/8

27/8

25/8

23/4

31/8

3

3

33/8

31/8

31/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

31/2

31/2

31/2

31/2

Bore BD E F G J K TD TL TM UM UT UW LB P

Min.

Add Stroke

17/8

21/4

21/4

21/2

21/4

23/4

21/2

25/8

3

27/8

27/8

31/4

3

3

31/4

31/4

31/4

33/8

33/8

33/8

33/8

37/16

313/16

315/16

43/16

315/16

47/16

43/16

411/16

51/16

415/16

415/16

55/16

51/16

51/16

55/16

55/16

55/16

61/16

61/16

61/16

61/16

47/8

51/4

51/4

51/2

53/8

57/8

55/8

61/4

65/8

61/2

63/4

71/8

67/8

73/8

75/8

75/8

75/8

83/8

83/8

83/8

83/8


21/2

3

31/2

41/2

5

61/2

71/2

EE

NPTF SAE

1/2

1/2

1/2

3/4

3/4

3/4

1

10

10

10

12

12

12

16

3/8

5/8

5/8

3/4

7/8

7/8

1

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

2

2

21/4

11/2

11/2

11/2

13/4

13/4

13/4

21/4

3/8

7/16

7/16

9/16

9/16

13/16

7/8

1.000

1.375

1.375

1.750

1.750

1.750

2.000

Add Stroke

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8

5

51/4

53/8

61/4

65/8

71/8

83/8

1

13/8

13/8

13/4

13/4

13/4

2

3

31/2

4

5

51/2

7

81/2

5

61/4

63/4

81/2

9

101/2

121/2

41/2

53/4

61/4

8

81/2

10

111/2

33/8

41/8

45/8

513/16

63/8

73/4

103/8

11/4

11/2

11/2

2

2

2

3

+.000-.001

Dimension XI to be specified by customer.


56

W

A

LE

CD CD

XC + STROKE

ZC + STROKE

XL + STROKE

CE

MALUBRICATIONFITTING

KE

ER

LUBRICATIONFITTING

NRKK

MS

4 2

EX3

1

42

EX3

1

XL + STROKE

X

X

A

A

X

X

A

A

XL + STROKE

Rod Style Style Rod Dia. 9 7 Bore No. MM KK KK A W XC XL ZC KE CD* CE ER EX LE MA MS NR

71/8

71/2

81/4

81/2

83/8

87/8

85/8

97/8

101/4

101/8

115/8

12113/4

13131/4

131/4

131/4

145/8

145/8

145/8

145/8


Mounting InformationHeadEndMounting

Recommendedmaximumswivelangleoneachsideofthecylindercenterline.

Spherical Bearing MountingStyle SB 11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes

Thread

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

5/8

11

13/8

113/4

13/8

13/8

213/4

13/4

21/2

22

31/2

21/2

321/2

43

31/2

1(Std.)2

1(Std.)2

1(Std.)23

1(Std.)23

1(Std.)23

1(Std.)234

1(Std.)234

3/43/4

11/8

11/8

11/8

11/8

11/8

15/8

15/8

15/8

222

21/4

21/4

21/4

21/4

3333

71/4

75/8

81/2

83/4

85/8

91/8

87/8

101/2

107/8

103/4

117/8

121/4

1213

131/4

131/4

131/4

147/8

147/8

147/8

147/8

11/2

17/8

221/4

221/2

21/4

23/4

31/8

331/8

31/2

31/4

35/8

37/8

37/8

37/8

4444

Add Stroke

7/16-20—

3/4-16—

3/4-16——

1-14——

11/4-12——

11/2-12———

17/8-12———

—

7/16-20—

3/4-16—

3/4-163/4-16

—1-141-14—

11/4-1211/4-12

—11/2-1211/2-1211/2-12

—17/8-1217/8-1217/8-12

5/8

13/4

13/4

11/4

17/8

11/4

11/8

113/8

11/8

11/8

13/8

13/8

13/8

11/4

11/4

11/4

11/4

63/8

63/4

71/4

71/2

73/8

77/8

75/8

85/8

987/8

93/4

101/8

97/8

101/2

103/4

103/4

103/4

121/8

121/8

121/8

121/8

-.0005.5000-.0005.7500

-.0005.7500

-.00051.0000

-.00051.3750

-.00051.7500

-.00052.0000

7/8

11/4

11/4

17/8

21/8

21/2

23/4

13/16

11/8

11/8

11/4

111/16

21/16

21/2

7/16

21/32

21/32

7/8

13/16

117/32

13/4

3/4

11/16

11/16

17/16

17/8

21/8

21/2

3/4

1

1

11/4

17/8

21/2

21/2

15/16

13/8

13/8

111/16

27/16

27/8

35/16

5/8

1

1

11/4

15/8

21/16

23/8

†Maximumoperatingpressureat4:1designfactorisbasedontensilestrengthofmaterial.Pressureratingsarebasedonstandardcommercialbearingratings.Note:foradditionaldimensionsseeSeries2HStyleBBmount.RodNo.1isstandard.*Dimension“CD”isholediameter.

Note: Dimension X is the maximum off center mounting of the cylinder. TodeterminedimensionXforvariousstrokelengthsmultiplythedistancebetweenpivotpinholesbytangentofanglea.ForextendedpositionuseX=XLtimes2Xstroke.

Bore

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

Angle a

2°

21/2°

21/2°

3°

21/2°

3°

3°

Tan. of a

.035

.044

.044

.052

.044

.052

.052

Angle a

2°

41/2°

41/2°

3°

3°

3°

3°

Tan. of a

.035

.079

.079

.052

.052

.052

.052

Head End Mounted Cap End Mounted

Table 1 — Dimensions

CapEndMountingTable 1

Max. Op. Bore PSI† 11/2 1500

2 2200

21/2 1450

31/4 1500

4 1850

5 2000

6 1800


57

B


Cylinder AccessoriesSpherical Bearing MountingStyle SB

Clevis Bracket

Order to fit Mounting Plate orRod Eye.

Pivot Pin

Pivot Pins are furnished with(2) Retainer Rings.

Parker offers a complete range of Cylinder Accessoriesto assure you of the greatest versatility in present orfuture cylinder applications. Accessories offered for the

respective cylinder include the Rod Eye, Pivot Pin andClevis Bracket. To select the proper part number for anydesired accessory refer to the charts below.

Spherical Rod Eye

Order to fit Piston Rod Thread Size.

Bore Sizes Series 2H 11/2 2 & 21/2 31/4 4 5 6Rod Eye Part No. 132290 132291 132292 132293 132294 132295

.5000-0005

11/16

7/87/16

13/16

3/47/16-20

7/8

.7500-0005

111/421/32

11/8

11/16

3/4-1615/16

1.0000-0005

11/2

17/87/8

11/4

17/16

1-1411/2

1.3750-0005

221/8

13/16

111/16

17/8

11/4-122

1.7500-0005

21/8

21/2

117/32

21/16

21/8

11/2-1221/4

2.0000-0005

27/8

23/4

13/4

21/2

21/2

17/8-1223/4

CD

A

CE

EX

ER

LE

JK

JL

LOADCAPACITY

LBS.2644 9441 16860 28562 43005 70193

CD

CL

SHEARCAPACITY

LBS.

.4997-0004

19/16

.7497-0005

21/32

.9997-0005

21/2

1.3746-0006

35/16

1.7496-0006

47/32

1.9996-0007

415/16

19300 34300 65000 105200 1374008600

Bore Sizes Series 2H 11/2 2 & 21/2 31/4 4 5 6Pivot Pin Part No. 83962 83963 83964 83965 83966 83967

Bore Sizes Series 2H 11/2 2 & 21/2 31/4 4 5 6Part No. 83947 83948 83949 83950 83951 83952

CD

CF

CW

DD

E

F

FL

LR

M

MR

R

LOADCAPACITY

LBS.

1/27/16

1/213/32

31/2

11/215/16

1/25/8

2.05

3/421/32

5/817/32

33/45/8

213/87/8

12.76

17/83/4

17/32

51/23/4

21/2

111/16

113/16

4.10

13/8

13/16

121/32

61/27/8

31/2

27/16

13/8

15/8

4.95

13/4

117/32

11/429/32

81/2

11/4

41/2

27/8

13/4

21/16

6.58

213/4

11/229/32

105/8

11/2

535/16

223/8

7.92

9450 14300 20322 37800 503755770

Clevis Bracket


58

Double Rod Models11/2" to 6" Bore Sizes


MountingStyles for

Single RodModels

TTBTDJ

JBJJCEF

CBGD

DD

Dimensions Shown onThis Page SupplementDimensions on Pages

Listed Below11/2" - 6" Bores

Page No.

44

44

4446

46

46

5050

50

52

5254

54*If only one end of these Double Rod Cylinders is tobe cushioned, be sure to specify clearly which endthis will be.‡Specify XI dimension from rod end #1.

To determine dimensions for a double rodcylinder, first refer to the desired single rodmounting style cylinder shown onpreceding pages of this catalog. (See tableat left.) After selecting necessarydimensions from that drawing, return tothis page supplement the single roddimensions with those shown on drawingat right and dimension table below. Notethat double rod cylinders have a head(Dim. G) at both ends and that dimensionLD replaces LB and ZL replaces ZB, etc.The double rod dimensions differ from, or

are in addition to those for single rodcylinders shown on preceding pages andprovide the information needed tocompletely dimension a double rodcylinder.On a double rod cylinder where the tworod ends are different, be sure to clearlystate which rod end is to be assembled atwhich end. Port position 1 is standard. Ifother than standard, specify pos. 2, 3 or 4when viewed from rod end #1 only. Seeport position information in Section C.

MountingStyles for

CorrespondingDouble Rod

Models*

KTKTBKTDKJ

KJBKJJKCKEKF

KCBKGKD

KDD‡

How to Use Double Rod Cylinder Dimensioned Drawings

11/2" to 6" Bores

5/8

1

1

13/8

13/4

2

21/2

11/2

2

21/2

31/4

4

5

6

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

RodRod Dia.

Bore No. MM LD ZL SAK XAK ZAK SNK SSK SEK XEK ZEK ZM

All dimensions are in inches and apply to Code 1 rod sizes only. For alternate rod sizes,determine all envelope dimensions (within LD dim.) as described above and then useappropriate rod end dimensions for proper rod size from single rod cylinder.

Add stroke Add 2XStroke

67/8

75/8

73/4

9

93/4

101/2

117/8

—

All Mtgs.

6 1/4

67/8

7

81/8

83/4

93/8

105/8

ZB

71/2

85/16

87/16

97/8

101/2

115/8

133/16

ZE

71/8

713/16

715/16

91/4

97/8

107/8

125/16

XE

G

73/8

8

81/8

91/2

10

111/4

123/4

SE

41/8

37/8

35/8

43/8

41/4

43/4

51/8

SS

C,E

27/8

27/8

3

31/2

33/4

41/4

47/8

SN

F

75/8

85/8

83/4

105/8

113/4

123/8

141/8

ZA

71/4

81/8

83/16

915/16

107/8

111/2

131/16

XA

CB

75/8

85/8

85/8

107/8

12

121/2

141/4

SA

55/8

61/8

61/4

71/4

73/4

81/4

93/8

LBReplaces:On single rod

mounting styles: All Mtg. Styles

Rod End #1 Rod End #2


59

B

NOTES


60

25˚MR

LR

RE

DD DIA4 HOLES

F

M

FL

CW CWCB

+ .004+ .002

RE

CD

MR

LR

RE

DD DIA4 HOLES

F

M 25˚

FL

CB

+ .004+ .002

RE

CL

CD+.001-.002

CD

Clevis Bracket for Knuckle

Order to fit Knuckle.

Mounting Plate or Eye Bracket

1. When used to mate with the Rod Clevis, select from Chart A.2. When used to mount the Style BB cylinders, select from the

Mounting Plate Selection Table. See Chart B at lower left.

CB

CDER +.004+.002

CD CA

CD

CDKK THREAD

A FULLTHREAD

CBCW CWER

KK THREAD

+.004+.002CD

A

CE

Female Rod Clevis

Order to fit thread size.


CylinderAccessories

7407769195691956919669196*85361*85361*853616919869198*85362*85363*85363*85364*85365*85365735387353973539

—683686836868369683696837068370683706837168371683726837368373683746837568375735457354773547

74075690896909069091690916909269093690936909469094690956909669097690986909969100735367343773438

74076692056920569206692066920769207692076920869208692096921069210692116921269213735427354273543

74078683686836868369683696837068370683706837168371683726921569215683746837569216735457354582181

134757 0031134757 0044134757 0050134757 0075134757 0075134757 0088134757 0100134757 0100134757 0125134757 0125133739 0150133739 0175133739 0188

ConsultFactory

51221509405094150942

1332845094350944

13328550945

133286509465094750948509495095050951509525095350954

Mating Parts Mating Parts

Thread Rod Eye Clevis AlignmentSize Clevis Bracket Pin Knuckle Bracket Pin Coupler

5/16-247/16-201/2-203/4-163/4-167/8-141-141-14

11/4-1211/4-1211/2-1213/4-1217/8-1221/4-1221/2-1223/4-1231/4-1231/2-124-12

Cylinder AccessoriesParker offers a complete range of cylinder accessories to assure you ofgreatest versatility in present or future cylinder applications.

Rod End AccessoriesAccessories offered for the rod end of the cylinder include Rod Clevis,Eye Bracket, Knuckle, Clevis Bracket and Pivot Pin. To select the properpart number for any desired accessory, refer to Chart A below and lookopposite the thread size of the rod end as indicated in the first column.The Pivot Pins, Eye Brackets and Clevis Brackets are listed opposite thethread size which their mating Knuckles or Clevises fit.

Chart A

Accessory Load CapacityThe various accessories on this and the followingpages have been load rated for your convenience.The load capacity in lbs., shown on the followingpage is the recommended maximum load for thataccessory based on a 4:1 design factor in tension.(Pivot Pin is rated in shear.) Before specifying,compare the actual load or the tension (pull) forceat maximum operating pressure of the cylinderwith the load capacity of the accessory you plan touse. If load or pull force of cylinder exceeds loadcapacity of accessory, consult factory.

Mounting PlatesMounting Plates for Style BB (clevis mounted) cylinders are offered. Toselect proper part number for your application, refer to Chart B, aboveright.

Series 2HBore Size

11/2"2", 21/2"

31/4"4"5"6"

Mtg. PlatePart No.

6919569196*8536169198*85362*85363

Chart B

For alignment coupler dimensions, see section C.*Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard NFPA/T3.6.8 R1-1984, NFPArecommended standard fluid power systems — cylinder — dimensions for accessories for catalogedsquare head industrial types. Parker adopted this standard in April, 1985. Eye Brackets or MountingPlates shipped before this date may have different dimensions and will not necessarily interchangewith the NFPA standard. For dimensional information on older style Eye Brackets or Mounting Platesconsult Drawing #144805 or previous issues of this catalog.

8

3

2 6

5

4

2

3

4

8 5

6 Pivot Pin

1. Pivot Pins are furnished with Clevis Mounted Cylinders as standard.2. Pivot Pins are furnished with (2) Retainer Rings.3. Pivot Pins must be ordered as separate item if to be used with

Knuckles, Rod Clevises, or Clevis Brackets.

Knuckle (Female Rod Eye)

Order to fit thread size.


61

B

Clevis Bracket for Knuckle Part Number


Female Rod Clevis Part Number

Eye Bracket and Mounting Plate Part Number

ACBCDCECWERKK

Load Capacity Lbs. O

CBCDCWDDEF

FLLRM

MRR


51221†

13/16

11/32

5/16

21/413/64

19/64

5/16-242600

509403/43/41/2

11/21/21/2

7/16-20

4250

509413/43/41/211/21/21/2

1/2-204900

13328411/811/43/423/85/83/4

3/4-1611200

5094315/8

11/2

1215/16

3/4

17/8-1418800

5094415/811/21

215/16

3/41

1-1419500

5094211/811/43/421/85/83/4

3/4-1611200

13328515/811/21

31/83/41

1-1419500

13328622

13/841/81

13/811/4-12

33500

5094621/421/213/441/211/413/4

11/2-1245600

5094931/23

21/261/211/221/2

21/4-1298200

5095031/233

63/411/223/4

21/2-1298200

5095131/233

63/411/223/4

23/4-1298200

5095231/2‡†

431/273/42

31/231/4-12156700

509534‡†

41/24

813/16

21/44

31/2-12193200

5094517/82

13/833/41

13/811/4-12

33500

509473

21/2

251/2

11/4

213/4-12

65600

509483

21/2

251/2

11/4

217/8-12

65600

509544‡†

41/24

813/16

21/44

4-12221200

7407615/32

7/16

3/817/64

21/43/815/83/81/2

1.753600

692053/41/21/2

13/32

31/21/211/23/41/25/8

2.557300

6920611/43/45/8

17/32

55/8

17/813/16

3/429/32

3.8214000

6920711/213/4

21/32

61/23/4

21/411/2

111/4

4.9519200

692082

13/81

21/32

71/27/832

13/8

121/32

5.7336900

6920921/213/411/429/32

91/27/8

35/823/413/427/32

7.5034000

692113

21/2

11/2

13/16

123/4

141/2

31/2

21/2

31/8

9.4034900

6921021/22

11/211/16

12 3/41

41/43 3/16

21/42 25/32

9.4033000

6921233

11/215/16

123/416

41/43

3 19/32

9.4033800

6921331/23

11/215/16

123/416

41/43

3 19/32

9.4036900

735424

31/2

2113/16

151/2

111/16

611/16

531/2

41/8

12.0083500

7354341/242

2 1/16

171/2115/16

711/16

53/44

47/813.75102600

73544542

21/16

171/2115/16

711/16

5 3/44

4 7/813.75108400

740775/16

5/16

17/64

21/43/815/83/81/2

1.751700

691953/41/2

13/32

21/23/811/83/41/29/16

1.634100

85363*21/22

11/16

71/211/24

21/22

27/16

5.7370000

CBCDDDEF

FLLRM

MRR


6919611/43/4

17/32

31/25/817/811/43/47/8

2.5510500

85361*11/21

21/32

41/27/8

23/811/21

11/43.2520400

691982

13/821/32

57/83

21/813/815/83.8221200

85362*21/213/429/32

61/211/833/821/413/421/84.9549480

*Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard NFPA/T3.6.8 R1-1984, NFPA recommended standard fluid power systems — cylinder — dimensions for accessories forcataloged square head industrial types. Parker adopted this standard in April, 1985. Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates shipped before this date may have different dimensions and will not necessarilyinterchange with the NFPA standard. For dimensional information on older style Eye Brackets or Mounting Plates consult Drawing #144805 or previous issues of this catalog.

O See Accessory Load Capacity note on previous page.

•These sizes supplied with cotter pins.

†Includes Pivot Pin.

Consult appropriate cylinder rod end dimensions for compatibility.

Pivot Pin Part Number

CDCL

Shear Capacity Lbs.O

85364*3

21/213/16

81/213/443/43

21/23

6.5894200

Knuckle Part Number74075

3/411/27/16

7/16

19/32

5/16-243300

690893/4

11/23/41/2

23/32

7/16-20

5000

7343951/291/854

511/16

41/2-12308500

7343851/291/841/24

511/16

4-12273800

734375

75/84

31/24 31/32

31/2-12217300

7353641/275/84

31/24 31/32

3 1/4-12161300

6910035/861/231/23

41/423/4-12123300

6909931/261/833

41/421/2-12110000

6909831/2

513/16

321/239/16

21/4-1298700

6909735

21/22

227/32

17/8-1275000

6909621/4

43/8

21/2

2227/32

13/4-1253500

6909521/44

21/213/421/2

11/2-1245000

690942

37/16

213/8

131/32

11/4-1233500

6909315/8

213/16

11/21

17/16

1-1421700

6909211/823/811/21

17/16

7/8-1413000

6909111/821/16

11/43/4

11/16

3/4-1612100

690903/4

11/23/41/2

23/32

1/2-205700

ACACBCDERKK


85365*33

15/16

91/22

51/431/423/431/47.50

121900

735384

31/2113/16

125/8111/16

511/16

431/241/89.6257400

7353941/24

21/16

147/8115/16

67/16

41/24

5 1/411.4575000

740787/16

15/16

6600

683681/217/8

8600

683693/4

25/8

19300

683701

31/8

34300

6837113/841/8

65000

6837213/453/16

105200

683732

53/16

137400

692152

511/16

137400

6837421/263/16

214700

683753

61/4

309200

692163

63/4

309200

7354531/281/4

420900

73547•

49

565800

821814

85/8

565800

CylinderAccessories


62

How to Order


How to Order Series “2H” CylindersWhen ordering Series 2H cylinders, please review the following:Note: Duplicate cylinders can be ordered by giving the SERIALNUMBER from the nameplate of the original cylinder. Factory recordssupply a quick positive identification.

Piston Rods: Specify rod code number based on diameter. Givethread style number for a standard thread or specify dimensions. See“Style 3 Rod End” below.

Cushions: If cushions are required specify according to the modelnumber on the next page. If the cylinder is to have a double rod andonly one cushion is required, be sure to specify clearly which end ofthe cylnder is to be cushioned.

Special Modifications: Additional information is required on ordersfor cylinders with special modifications. This is best handled withdescriptive notes. For further information, consult factory.

Service PolicyOn cylinders returned to the factory for repairs, it is standard policy forthe Cylinder Division to make such part replacements as will put thecylinder in as good as new condition. Should the condition of the returnedcylinder be such that expenses for repair would exceed the costs of anew one, you will be notified.Address all correspondence and make shipments to, ServiceDepartment at your nearest regional plant listed in the pages of thiscatalog.

Certified DimensionsParker Cylinder Division guarantees that all cylinders ordered from thiscatalog will be built to dimensions shown. All dimensions are certified tobe correct, and thus it is not necessary to request certified drawings.

Class 1 SealsClass 1 seals are the seals provided as standard in a cylinderassembly unless otherwise specified. For further information on fluidcompatibility or operating limitations of all components, see section C.For the 2H series cylinders the following make-up Class 1 Seals:Primary Piston Rod Seal – Enhanced Polyurethane

Piston Rod Wiper – NitrilePiston Seals – Cast Iron RingsOption – Nitrile lipseals with polymyte back-up washersOption – Hi-Load. Filled P.T.F.E. seals with a nitrile expanderO-Rings – Nitrile (nitrile back-up washer when used)

Style 3 Rod EndA style 3 rod end indicates a special rod end configuration. All specialpiston rod dimensions must have all three: KK; A; W/WF or LA/LAFspecified with the rod fully retracted. A sketch or drawing should besubmitted for rod ends requiring special machining such as snap ringgrooves, keyways, tapers, multiple diameters, etc. It is good designpractice to have this machining done on a diameter at least 0.065inches smaller than the piston rod diameter. This allows the piston rodto have a chamfer preventing rod seal damage during assembly or

maintenance. Standard style 55 rod ends with a longer than standardWG dimension should call out a style 3 rod end and the note: sameas 55 except WG=____. A drawing should be submitted for special55 rod ends that have specific tolerances or special radii. Special rodends that have smaller than standard male threads, larger thanstandard female threads, or style 55 rod ends with smaller thanstandard AF or AE dimensions are to be reviewed by Engineering forproper strength at operating pressure.

Additional Lipseal® Piston (if desired): Parker Lipseal® pistons areoffered as an option at no extra cost in the Series 2H cylinders. Withthis feature, zero leakage under static holding conditions is attained.Call out “with Lipseal piston” if this type of piston is desired. If notspecified, the ring type piston will be furnished. Hi Load piston sealsare available for an additional charge. Refer to the beginning ofSection C for the benefits of this piston seal assembly.

Fluid Medium: Series 2H hydraulic cylinders are equipped with sealsfor use with hydraulic oil. If other than hydraulic oil will be used,specify class of fluid (See Catalog section C.)

Water Service ModificationsStandard – When requested, Parker can supply Series 2H cylinderswith standard modifications that make the cylinders more nearlysuitable for use with water as the fluid medium. The modificationsinclude chrome-plated cylinder bore; electroless nickel-plated, non-wearing internal surfaces; Lipseal style piston, Buna N Seals andchrome-plated, stainless steel piston rod. On orders for water servicecyinders, be sure to specify the maximum operating pressure.

(These factors must be taken into account because of the lowertensile strength of stainless steels available for use in piston rods.)

Warranty– Parker will warrant Series 2H cylinders modified for waterservice to be free of defects in materials or workmanship. On theother hand, Parker cannot accept responsibility for premature failureof cylinder function, where failure is caused by corrosion, electrolysisor mineral deposits within the cylinder.

Combination MountingsSingle Rod End The first mounting is the one called out on the headend of the cylinder. The second or subsequent mountings are calledout as they appear in the assembly moving away from the rod end.Exception: When tie rod mountings are part of a combination, themodel number should contain an “S” (Special) in the model code anda note in the body of the order clarifying the mounting arrangement.The ”P” is used to define a thrust key and is not considered to be amounting. However, it is located at the primary end.

Example: 4.00 CCBB2HLTS14AC x 10.000Combination “C” mounting head only. “BB” mounting cap endThis cylinder is also cushioned at both ends.

Double Rod End In general, the model number is read left to rightcorresponding to the cylinder as viewed from left to right with the

primary end at rod end #1. See Double Rod Models information pagein this section. For this option the piston rod number, piston rod end,and piston rod threads are to be specified for both ends. The simplestare for symmetric cylinders such as: TD, C, E, F, G, and CB mounts.All other mounting styless, the description of the first rod end will be atthe mounting end. In the case of multiple mounts, the description ofthe first rod end will be at the primary mounting end. For “DD”mounts, the description of the first rod end will be the same locationas the “XI” dimension.Example: 4.00 KDD2HLT24A/18A x 10.000 XI=8

This is a center trunnion mounting cylinder with the XI dimensionmeasured from the code 2 rod side of the cylinder which has the style4 thread. The opposite end code 1 rod with the style 8 thread.


63

B

Series 2HHeavy Duty Hydraulic CylindersSeries “2H” Model Numbers – How to Develop Them – How to “Decode” Them

Model Numbers

Parker Series 2H cylinders can be completely and accuratelydescribed by a model number consisting of coded symbols. Todevelop a model number, select only those symbols that represent

the cylinder required, and place them in the sequence indicatedbelow.Note: Page numbers with a letter prefix, ie: C77, are located insection C of this catalog.

Feature Description Page No. SymbolBore* Specify in inches

Used only if cushion requiredUsed only if double-rod cylinder is requiredHead Tie Rods ExtendedCap Tie Rods ExtendedBoth End Tie Rods ExtendedHead Rectangular FlangeHead Square FlangeHead RectangularCap Rectangular FlangeCap Square FlangeCap RectangularSide LugsCenterline LugsSide TappedSide End AnglesSide End LugsCap Fixed ClevisHead TrunnionCap TrunnionIntermediate Fixed Trunnion‡Spherical BearingUsed only for Thrust Key (Styles C,F,G, & CB)Used only for Manifold Port O-Ring Seal(Style C)Any Practical Mounting StyleListed Above

Used in all 2H Model NumbersRing packed piston standardUsed only for Lipseal® PistonUsed only for Hi-Load PistonSAE Straight Thread O-Ring Port (Standard)Used only for NPTF (Dry Seal Pipe Thread)Used only for BSP (Parallel Thread ISO 228)Used only for SAE Flange Ports (3000 psi)Used only for BSPT (Taper Thread)Used only for Metric ThreadUsed only for Metric Thread per ISO 6149High Water Content FluidNut Retained PistonFluorocarbon SealsWater ServiceEPR SealsUsed only if special Modifications arerequired: Oversize Ports

Port Position ChangeSpecial SealsStop Tube•

Stroke AdjusterTie Rod Supports

For Single Rod Cylinders, select one only.Refer to Rod number listing, Table 2,Pages 44 through 55See chart in Section C for minimum piston roddiameter

Select:Style 4 Small MaleStyle 7 Female Thread for Spherical Rod EyeStyle 8 Intermediate MaleStyle 9 Short FemaleStyle 55 Rod End for Flange CouplingStyle 3 Special (Specify)Used only for stud two times longer thanstandard.UNF StandardBSF (British Fine)MetricUsed only if cushion requiredSpecify in inches

CK

TBTCTDJ

JBJJH

HBHHC†EF†CBG†BBD

DBDDSBP

MAs

listedabove–2HCLKTURPBGYJFVWX

S

1234567890

4789

553

2AWMC–

C94,42 & 435844444446464648484850505052525254545456

C93

C91–––––4343

C89C89C89C89C89C89C89C8343

C83C83C83

C91C89C83C95C93C93

––––––––––

C92B56C92C92C19C92

C92C92C92C92

C94, 42 & 43C93

*Required for Basic Cylinder Model Number•In case of Stop Tube, call out Gross Stroke Length

Use Symbol S to designate special

Modification except piston rod end

6" C K F P TB –2H L T V S 1 4 2 A C 12"

Mounting

Series*

Cushion-HeadDouble-RodMounting* Style

Modifications

CombinationMountingStyle

Piston

Ports*

CommonModifications

SpecialModifications

Piston Rod*Number

Piston*Rod End

Piston RodAlternate Thds.

Cushion-CapStroke* •

Styles 4, 8 and 9 are catalog standards.

Specify Style 3 for any special piston rod end

Double RodCylinders

For double rodcylinders, specify rodnumber and rod endsymbols for both pistonrods. A typical doublerod model numberwould be:

6" KJ-2HU14A/14AX12"Piston Rod*Threads

†Cylinders with these mounting styles should have a minimumstroke length equal to or greater than their bore size.

Dark Arrows Indicate Basic Minimum Model Number‡Specify XI dimension


64

Parker TS-2000 seal designed toeliminate cylinder rod seal leakage.

WorldclassQuality Productsand Service

“Jewel” gland with wiperseal andTS-2000 cylinder rod seal.

Parker Series 2H Heavy Duty andSeries 3L Medium Duty HydraulicCylinders with the TS-2000 sealoffers positive protection againstcylinder rod leakage under the mostdemanding applications.

The TS-2000 seal is the product ofcountless hours of research,development and extensive fieldtesting and is only available on ParkerCylinders.

Based on the popular ParkerSerrated Lipseal rod design, theTS-2000 incorporates the pressure-compensated, uni-directionalcharacteristics of a U-cup with themultiple edge sealing effectiveness ofcompression-type stacked-packings.

The goal for the Parker team was todesign a rod seal suitable for all typesof applications, regardless of pressureprofile. It had to be composed of a

material that would not react chemicallywith hydraulic fluids. And it had toproduce better and more reliable “dryrod” performance than the standardserrated lip-seal design in a broadrange of applications.

The result is the TS-2000 seal,designed especially to eliminate rodseal leakage in the most demandingapplications. It features a specialpolyurethane material that will not reactchemically with petroleum-basedhydraulic fluid, is extremely resistant toabrasion and extrusion, and providesexceptional service life. It hasmore sealing edges thanother seals on themarket, which

in turn produces “dry rod”performance. The seal geometry wasrefined for maximum stability in thegroove and has excellentperformance characteristicsthroughout a broad range ofpressures and piston rod velocities.

The Parker design team wassuccessful!

TS-2000 rod seal has not failed inany of the test applications in the labor on the job, no matter how tough ordemanding.

For more information on theTS-2000 call or write your local Parkerdistributor or Parker HannifinCorporation, Cylinder Division, 500S. Wolf Road, Des Plaines, IL 60016,847-298-2400.

2A Tie Rod CylindersNFPA Pneumatic Cylinders for working pressures up to 18 bar

Catalogue HY07-0910/UKOctober 2006

2 Parker Hannifi n Ltd.Cylinder DivisionEurope

Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesMounting Styles

2A Cylinder Mounting StylesThe standard range of Parker 2A cylinders comprises 15 mounting styles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for the selection of the cylinders is given below, with dimensional information about each mounting style shown on pages 8 to 20 for 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes, and pages 22 to 30 for 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”) bore sizes.

Application-specifi c mounting information is shown on pages 36 and 37.

Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.

J JB H

HB C F

G BB BC

D DB DD

TB TC TD

K (KTB shown)Most mounting styles are available as double rod cylinders

NFPA MF1 NFPA MF5 NFPA MF2

NFPA MF6 NFPA MS2 NFPA MS4

NFPA MS7 NFPA MP1

NFPA MX3 NFPA MX2 NFPA MX1

NFPA MP2

NFPA MT1 NFPA MT2 NFPA MT4


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesIntroduction

Note: In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifi cations in this catalogue are subject to change without notice.

Contents PageIntroduction 3Standard Specifi cations 3Design Features and Benefi ts 4Seal Groups 5Cylinder Selection Check List 6Mounting Styles 7Dimensions – 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes 8 Piston Rod End Data – 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes 20Double Rod Cylinders 21Dimensions – 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”) bore sizes 22Piston Rod End Data – 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”) bore sizes 30Accessories 31Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders (2AN Series) 34Mounting Information 36Pressure Limitations 37Push and Pull Forces 38Piston Rod Sizes & Stop Tubes 39Stroke Factors & Long Stroke Cylinders 40Cushioning 41Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds 42Optional Features 43Replacement Parts and Service 44Repairs 45Storage Information & Cylinder Mass Data 46Warranty 46How to Order Cylinders 47

Index PageAccessories 31-33Cushioning 41Cylinder Selection Check List 6Design Features 4-5Dimensions 8, 22Double Rod Cylinders 21Forces – Push and Pull 38inPHorm 3Masses 46, 31-33Model Numbers 47Mounting Styles and Information 2, 7, 36-37Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders (2AN Series) 34-35Optional Features 43Ordering Instructions 47Piston Rod End Data 20, 30Piston Rod Size Selection 39Piston and Seal Types 5Ports – Standard and Oversize 42Pressure Ratings and Limitations 37Replacement Parts and Service 44-45Seal Groups 5Speed Limitations 42Standard Specifi cations 3Stop Tubes 39Storage and Installation 46 Stroke Limiters 43Stroke Factors 40Stroke Tolerances 37Thrust Keys 36Warranty 46

Standard Specifi cationsHeavy-duty service – NFPA specifi cations

Standard construction – square head – 4 tie rod design

Standard pressure – to 18 bar (250 psi) dependent on bore size

Standard medium – fi ltered and lubricated air

Standard temperature – -20°C to +80°C

Hard chrome-plated bore

•••

•••

IntroductionParker Hannifi n Corporation is a world leader in the manufacture of components and systems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. With more than 50,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants and administrative offi ces around the world, Parker provides customers with technical excellence and fi rst class customer service. Parker Hannifi n’s Cylinder Division is the world’s largest supplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications.

The heavy duty series 2A pneumatic cylinders described in this catalogue are of all-steel construction and are based on the Parker series 3L hydraulic range – see catalogue HY07-1130.They are exceptionally robust and are ideally suited for applications in steel mills, foundries, aluminium smelting plants or other arduous environments where normal light duty aluminium

cylinders are not suffi ciently durable. In addition to the standard cylinders featured in this catalogue, 2A cylinders can be designed to suit customer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased to advise on unique designs to suit specifi c applications.

inPHormEuropean Cylinder inPHorm is Parker Hannifi n’s product selection program that helps to select the correct part for an application. The program prompts for the details of the application, makes the necessary design calculations, and selects a suitable product. inPHorm can also generate CAD drawings of the selected part, which can be viewed in other software applications, and customised and imported into other CAD packages. Please contact your local sales offi ce (see rear cover) for further information.

Visit us at www.parker.com/uk

Bore sizes – 25.4mm (1”) to 355.6mm (14”)

Piston rod diameters – 12.7mm (1/2”) to 139.7mm (51/2”)

Mounting styles – 15 standard styles

Strokes – available in any practical stroke length

Cushions – optional at either end or both ends of stroke

Rod ends – three standard choices – specials to order

••••••

1

3 2 5

4

6 8

7 79


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A Series

1 Piston RodGland seal life is maximised by manufacturing piston rods from precision ground, high tensile carbon alloy steel, hard chrome plated and polished to 0.2µm max. Piston rods are induction case hardened to Rockwell C54 minimum before chrome plating, resulting in a dent-resistant surface.

2 Rod GlandThe rod gland, complete with rod seals, can easily be removed without dismantling the cylinder, so servicing is quicker – and therefore more economical.

3 Rod SealsThe serrated lipseal has a series of sealing edges which take over successively as pressure increases, providing effi cient sealing under all operating conditions. On the return stroke the serrations act as a check valve.

The double lip wiperseal acts as a secondary seal, cleaning the rod on the return stroke. Its outer lip prevents the ingress of dirt into the cylinder, extending the life of gland and seals.

Design Features and Benefi ts

Non-Lubricated Rod SealsFor non-lubricated air cylinders, rod seals with special rounded sealing lips are supplied as standard. Specify series 2AN (see pages 34-35).

4 Cylinder BodyThe surface of the cylinder bore is fi nished to minimise internal friction and prolong seal life. The bore of the cylinder is hard chrome-plated to prevent corrosion and extend the life of the cylinder.

5 Cylinder Body SealsTo ensure that the cylinder body remains leak free, even under pressure shock conditions, Parker fi ts pressure-energised body seals.

6 PistonLipseal pistons are fi tted as standard to 2A cylinders. All pistons are of one-piece type, and feature wide bearing surfaces to resist side loading. Long thread engagement secures the piston to the piston rod and, for additional safety, the piston is secured by thread-locking adhesive and a locking pin.

7 CushioningEnd of stroke deceleration is available by using straight cushions at the head and cap – see page 41 for details. The head and cap end cushions are self-centring. The polished cap end spear is an integral part of the piston rod.

8 Floating Cushion Bushes & SleevesCushioning is provided by the use of a fl oating cushion sleeve at the head end of the cylinder, and a fl oating cushion bush at the cap end. The use of a check valve in the head and lifting of the bronze cushion bush in the cap, provides minimum fl ow restriction at the start of the return stroke. This allows full pressure to be applied over the whole area of the piston, to provide full power and fast cycle times.

Lipseals



Piston Seals

Lipseal Pistons – A Lipseal piston is fi tted to 2A cylinders as standard. It offers a wide piston surface which reduces bearing load, and is suitable for speeds of up to 0.5m/s. Fully dynamic and self-compensating seals allow for variations in pressure, mechanical defl ections and wear.

Non-Lubricated Pistons – For non-lubricated air cylinders, lipseals with special rounded sealing lips are supplied as standard. Specify Series 2AN (see pages 34-35).

Seal GroupsParker offers two classes of seals for 2A and 2AN (non-lubricated air) cylinders:

Group 1 Seals are standard and are suitable for air or nitrogen. The temperature range for Group 1 seals is -20°C to +80°C.

Group 5 Seals are made from fl uorocarbon elastomers and extend the working temperature for 2A cylinders from -15°C up to 150°C, or 204°C with reduced life. For non-lubricated air cylinders in high temperature applications, please refer to page 35.

Design Features and Benefi ts

9 Cushion AdjustmentNeedle valves are provided at both ends of the cylinder for precise cushion adjustment, and retained within the head and cap so that they cannot be inadvertently removed. The cartridge type needle valve illustrated below is fi tted to cylinders of up to 63.5mm (21/2”) bore – see page 42.

10 Check ValveA check valve is provided at the head end of the cylinder, providing minimum fl ow restriction at the start of the return stroke. This allows full pressure to be applied to the annular area of the piston, permitting faster cycle times.

Special DesignsParker’s design and engineering staff are available to produce special designs to meet customer’s specifi c requirements. Alternative sealing arrangements, special mounting styles, different bores and rod sizes are just a few of the custom features which can be supplied.


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesCylinder Selection

Check ListThe following check list indicates the principal factors which should be considered when selecting a pneumatic cylinder for a particular application. Further information is available on the pages shown. If more detailed information is required about any aspect of a cylinder’s specifi cation, please contact our design engineers who will be happy to assist.

inPHormThe European Cylinder inPHorm program can assist with the selection and specifi cation of an hydraulic cylinder for a particular application. Please ask for HY07-1260/Eur.

1 Establish System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 2A – Weight to be moved and force required – Nominal operating pressure and range – Distance to be travelled – Average and maximum piston speed

2 Mounting Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 7 Select the appropriate style for the specifi c application

3 Cylinder Bore and Operating Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 37, 38 Determine the bore and system pressure required to provide the necessary force

4 Piston Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 20, 30, 38, 39, 40 Single or double rod? Determine the minimum rod diameter required to withstand buckling forces Is a stop tube required? Select a suitable rod end and rod end thread Check pressure rating of selected cylinder and piston rod

5 Piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5 Does seal type suit application? (eg: Lipseal for 2A cylinders, Non-Lubricated for 2AN cylinders)

6 Cushioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 41 Select cushioning requirements if applicable

7 Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 42 Select suitable ports Are the standard positions acceptable?

8 Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5 Select seals to suit the chosen temperature range

9 Rod and Cap End Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 31-33 Are rod end and/or cap end accessories required?

10 Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 43 Removable trunnions, rod end bellows etc.


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesMounting Styles

Cylinder Mounting StylesThe standard range of Parker 2A cylinders comprises 15 mounting styles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for the selection of cylinders is given below, with dimensional information about each mounting style shown on the pages indicated. Application-specifi c mounting information is shown on pages 36-37. Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy a particular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist. Please contact the factory for details.

Extended Tie RodsCylinders with TB, TC and TD mountings are suitable for straight line force transfer applications, and are particularly useful where space is limited. For compression (push) applications, cap end tie rod mountings are most appropriate; where the major load places the piston rod in tension (pull applications), head end mounting styles should be specifi ed. Cylinders with tie rods extended at both ends may be attached to the machine member from either end, allowing the free end of the cylinder to support a bracket or switch.

Flange Mounted CylindersFlange mounted cylinders are also suitable for use on straight line force transfer applications. Four fl ange mounting styles are available: head rectangular fl ange (J), head square fl ange (JB), cap rectangular fl ange (H), and cap square fl ange (HB). Selection of the correct fl ange mounting style depends on whether the major force applied to the load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull) stresses on the piston rod – select H or HB for push, and J or JB for pull applications.

Foot Mounted CylindersFoot mounted cylinders do not absorb force on their centreline. As a result, the application of force by the cylinder produces a turning moment which attempts to rotate the cylinder about its mounting bolts. It is important, therefore, that the cylinder should be fi rmly secured to the mounting surface and that the load should be effectively guided, to avoid side loads being applied to rod gland and piston bearings. A thrust key modifi cation may be specifi ed to provide positive cylinder location – see page 36.

Pivot MountingsCylinders with pivot mountings, which absorb forces on their centrelines, should be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path. Pivot mountings may be used for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications. Two pivot mounting styles are available: cap fi xed clevis (BB), and cap detachable clevis (BC). Cylinders using a fi xed clevis (BB) may be used if the curved path of the piston rod travel is in a single plane. For applications where the piston rod will travel in a path either side of the true plane of motion, a spherical bearing mounting is recommended. Please consult the factory.

Trunnion Mounted Cylinders These cylinders are designed to absorb force on their centrelines. They are suitable for tension (pull) or compression (push) applications, and may be used where the machine member to be moved travels in a curved path in a single plane. Trunnion mounted cylinders are available in head trunnion (D), cap trunnion (DB), and intermediate fi xed trunnion (DD). Trunnion pins are designed for shear loads only and should be subjected to minimum bending stresses.

Styles TB, TC, TDSee pages 8-9, 22-23 TB

Styles J, JB, H, HBSee pages 10-13, 24 J

Styles C, F, GSee pages 14-15, 26-27 C

Styles BB, BCSee pages 16-17, 25 BB

Styles D, DB, DDSee pages 18-19, 28-29 DB



All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.

25.4mm to 152.4mm Bore Sizes

Dimensions TB, TC & TD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

Style TBTie Rods Extended Head End (NFPA Style MX3)

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

AA BB DD 1 E EE 5 (BSPP)

F G H 4

38.9 19.1 10-24 38.1 4 G1/4 9.5 38.1 6.4

51.3 25.4 1/4-28 50.8 4 G3/8 9.5 38.1 – 3.2

66.2 28.5 5/16-24 63.5 4 G3/8 9.5 38.1–

2.4–

78.5 28.5 5/16-24 76.2 4 G3/8 9.5 38.1

–2.4––

99.1 34.9 3/8-24 95.2 G1/2 15.9 44.5 –

119.4 34.9 3/8-24 114.3 G1/2 15.9 44.5 –

147.2 46.0 1/2-20 139.7 G1/2 15.9 44.5 –

175.4 46.0 1/2-20 165.1 G3/4 19.1 50.8 –

Style TCTie Rods Extended Cap End (NFPA Style MX2)

ZB + stroke

LB + stroke

ZB + strokeP + stroke

LB + stroke

P + stroke




Notes1 All tie rod threads (dimension DD) are UNF, with the exception of 25.4mm (1”) bore which is UNC.2 Mounting nuts should be tightened to the torque values shown for tie rod nuts – see page 37.3 For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two

additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied.4 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes shown in

the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) bore cylinders only.5 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size

ports, please see page 42.

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5


Style TDTie Rods Extended Both Ends (NFPA Style MX1)

Dimensions TB, TC & TD ContinuedBore

ØRod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

J K R Y+ stroke

LB P ZB max

25.4 5.0 27.4 4949 98.4 54 119.3

119.3

25.4 6.4 36.3 4958 101.6 58 123.8

133.4

25.4 7.5 46.7496558

101.6 58125.8141.7135.3

25.4 7.5 55.6

49715865

104.8 61

129.0151.2138.4144.9

31.7 10.0 70.1

58746571

123.8 70

152.9168.8159.3165.6

31.7 10.0 84.3

5881657174

123.8 70

152.9175.1159.3165.6168.8

31.7 13.0 104.1

58816571748181

130.2 77

162.2184.0168.6174.9178.1184.5184.5

38.1 13.0 123.9

68847478848484

146.1 83

181.3197.2187.6191.8197.2197.2197.2

ZB + stroke

P + stroke

LB + stroke




See Notes 1, 2

Style JBHead Square Flange(NFPA Style MF5)


Style JHead Rectangular Flange (NFPA Style MF1)

Dimensions J & JB See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20

See Notes1, 2

BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

E EE 2 (BSPP)

F FB G H 1 J K

38.1 1 G1/4 9.5 6.4 38.1 6.4 25.4 5.0

50.8 1 G3/8 9.5 7.9 38.1 – 3.2 25.4 6.4

63.5 1 G3/8 9.5 9.5 38.1–

2.4–

25.4 7.5

76.2 1 G3/8 9.5 9.5 38.1

–2.4––

25.4 7.5

95.2 G1/2 15.9 11.1 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

114.3 G1/2 15.9 11.1 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

139.7 G1/2 15.9 14.2 44.5 – 31.8 13.0

165.1 G3/4 19.1 14.2 50.8 – 38.1 13.0

ZB + stroke

P + stroke

LB + stroke

LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

P + stroke




Notes1 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of

the bore and rod sizes below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) bore cylinders only.

2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.


Dimensions J & JB ContinuedBore

ØRod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

R TF UF WF Y+ stroke

LB P ZB max

27.4 50.8 63.5 25.425.4

4949 98.4 54 119.3

119.3

36.3 69.8 85.7 25.434.9

4958 101.6 58 123.8

133.4

46.7 85.7 104.725.441.334.9

496558

101.6 58125.8141.7135.3

55.6 98.4 117.4

25.447.634.941.3

49715865

104.8 61

129.0151.2138.4144.9

70.1 119.0 139.7

34.950.841.347.6

58746571

123.8 70

152.9168.8159.3165.6

84.3 138.1 158.7

34.957.241.347.650.8

5881657174

123.8 70

152.9175.1159.3165.6168.8

104.1 168.2 193.7

34.957.241.347.650.757.257.2

58816571748181

130.2 77

162.2184.0168.6174.9178.1184.5184.5

123.9 193.7 219.1

41.357.247.650.857.257.257.2

68847478848484

146.1 83

181.3197.2187.6191.8197.2197.2197.2


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A Series25.4mm to 152.4mm Bore Sizes

Style HCap Rectangular Flange(NFPA Style MF2)


Style HBCap Square Flange(NFPA Style MF6)

See Notes 1, 2

See Notes 1, 2

Dimensions H & HB See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20Bore

ØRod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

E EE 2(BSPP)

F FB G H 1 J K

38.1 1 G1/4 9.5 6.4 38.1 6.4 25.4 5.0

50.8 1 G3/8 9.5 7.9 38.1 – 3.2 25.4 6.4

63.5 1 G3/8 9.5 9.5 38.1–

2.4–

25.4 7.5

76.2 1 G3/8 9.5 9.5 38.1

–2.4––

25.4 7.5

95.2 G1/2 15.9 11.1 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

114.3 G1/2 15.9 11.1 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

139.7 G1/2 15.9 14.2 44.5 – 31.8 13.0

165.1 G3/4 19.1 14.2 50.8 – 38.1 13.0

ZF + strokeP + stroke

LB + strokeXF + stroke


LB + strokeXF + stroke



Dimensions H & HB Continued


Notes1 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of

the bore and rod sizes shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) bore cylinders only.

2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.

BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

R TF UF Y+ stroke

LB P XF ZF

27.4 50.8 63.5 4949 98.4 54 114.3

114.3123.8123.8

36.3 69.8 85.7 4958 101.6 58 117.5

127.0127.0136.5

46.7 85.7 104.7496558

101.6 58117.5133.4127.0

127.0142.9136.5

55.6 98.4 117.4

49715865

104.8 61

120.7142.9130.2136.5

130.2152.4139.7146.1

70.1 119.0 139.7

58746571

123.8 70

142.9158.8149.2155.6

158.8174.6165.1171.5

84.3 138.1 158.7

5881657174

123.8 70

142.9165.1149.2155.6158.8

158.8181.0165.1171.5174.6

104.1 168.2 193.7

58816571748181

130.2 77

149.2171.5155.6161.9165.1171.5171.5

165.1187.3171.5177.8181.0187.3187.3

123.9 193.7 219.1

68847478848484

146.1 83

168.3184.2174.6177.8184.2184.2184.2

187.3203.2193.7196.9203.2203.2203.2



Dimensions C, F & G See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20


Style CSide Lug Mounting(NFPA Style MS2)

Style FSide Tapped Mounting(NFPA Style MS4)

See Notes 1, 3, 5, 6


BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

E EB EE 6(BSPP)

EL EO ES ET F G H 5 J K ND NT 2 R SB 3

38.1 5 – G1/4 – – – – 9.5 38.1 6.4 25.4 5.0 6.46.4 M5 – 6.6

50.8 5 9.0 G3/8 19.1 6.4 14 14.3 9.5 38.1 – 3.2 25.4 6.4 9.5

4.8 M6 36.3 11.0

63.5 5 9.5 G3/8 23.8 7.9 16 19.1 9.5 38.1–

2.4–

25.4 7.59.59.59.5

M8 46.7 11.0

76.2 5 9.5 G3/8 27.0 7.9 20 22.2 9.5 38.1

–2.4––

25.4 7.5

12.711.112.712.7

M10 55.6 11.0

95.2 11.1 G1/2 22.2 9.5 25 25.4 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

19.112.719.119.1

M12 70.1 14.0

114.3 11.1 G1/2 25.4 9.5 32 31.8 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

19.115.919.119.119.1

M12 84.3 14.0

139.7 14.2 G1/2 27.0 12.7 35 38.1 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 13.0

23.819.123.823.823.823.823.8

M16 104.1 22.0

165.1 14.2 G3/4 25.4 12.7 45 41.3 19.1 50.8 – 38.1 13.0

28.622.228.628.628.628.628.6

M20 123.9 22.0

ZB + stroke

LB + stroke

SS + stroke

P + stroke

SN + stroke

ZB + stroke

LB + strokeP + stroke

NT thread, ND deep (x4)




Notes1 Consider the use of a thrust key with this mounting – see page 36.2 Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series).3 Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws.4 Not available in 25.4mm (1”) bore sizes.5 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes

shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) bore cylinders only.6 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller

R2 size ports, please see page 42.

Style GSide End Lug(NFPA Style MS7)


Dimensions C, F & G ContinuedBore

ØRod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

ST SW TN TS US XS XT Y+ stroke

LB P SE SN SS XE ZB max ZE

7.9 7.9 13.5 54.0 69.9 33.333.3

49.249.2

4949 98.4 54 – 54.0 73.0 –

–119.3119.3

––

12.7 9.5 15.5 70.0 88.9 34.944.5

49.258.7

4958 101.6 58 139.7 57.2 73.0 136.5

146.1123.8133.4

142.9152.4

12.7 9.5 22.0 82.6 101.634.950.844.5

49.265.158.7

496558

101.6 58 149.2 57.2 73.0141.3157.2150.8

125.8141.7135.3

149.2165.1158.8

12.7 9.5 31.0 95.3 114.3

34.957.244.550.8

49.271.458.765.1

49715865

104.8 61 158.8 60.3 76.2

147.6170.0157.2163.5

129.0151.2138.4144.9

155.6177.8165.1171.5

19.1 12.7 38.0 120.7 146.1

47.663.554.060.3

61.977.868.374.6

58746571

123.8 70 168.3 66.7 82.6

165.1181.0171.5177.8

152.9168.8159.3165.6

174.6190.5181.0187.3

19.1 12.7 52.0 139.7 165.1

47.669.854.060.363.5

61.984.168.374.677.8

5881657174

123.8 70 174.6 66.7 82.6

168.2190.5174.6181.0184.2

152.9175.1159.3165.6168.8

177.8200.0184.2190.5193.7

25.4 17.5 66.0 174.6 209.5

52.474.658.765.168.374.674.6

61.984.168.374.677.884.184.1

58816571748181

130.2 77 184.2 73.0 79.4

176.2198.4182.6188.9192.1198.4198.4

162.2184.0168.6174.9178.1184.5184.5

188.9211.1195.3201.6204.8211.1211.1

25.4 17.5 80.0 200.0 235.0

58.674.665.168.374.674.674.6

71.487.377.881.087.387.387.3

68847478848484

146.1 83 196.9 79.4 92.1

193.7209.6200.0203.2209.6209.6209.6

181.3197.2187.6191.8197.2197.2197.2

206.4222.3212.7215.9222.3222.3222.3

ZE + stroke

P + strokeLB + stroke

SE + stroke

XE + stroke




Style BBCap Fixed ClevisExcluding 25.4mm (1") bore(NFPA Style MP1)


Style BB Cap Fixed Clevis25.4mm (1") bore only(NFPA Style MP1)

See Notes 2, 3, 4

Dimensions BB & BC See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20Bore

ØRod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

CB CD 1 +0.00-0.05 CW E EE 4

(BSPP)F G H 3 J K

– 11.13 – 38.1 3 G1/4 9.5 38.1 6.4 25.4 5.0

19.9 12.73 12.7 50.8 3 G3/8 9.5 38.1 – 3.2 25.4 6.4

19.9 12.73 12.7 63.5 3 G3/8 9.5 38.1–

2.4–

25.4 7.5

19.9 12.73 12.7 76.2 3 G3/8 9.5 38.1

–2.4––

25.4 7.5

32.6 19.08 15.8 95.2 G1/2 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

32.6 19.08 15.8 114.3 G1/2 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 10.0

32.6 19.08 15.8 139.7 G1/2 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 13.0

39.0 25.43 19.1 165.1 G3/4 19.1 50.8 – 38.1 13.0

XC + stroke

P + strokeZC + stroke

XC + stroke

P + strokeZC + stroke

11.1

Notes1 Dimension CD is the pivot pin diameter except for 25.4mm (1”) bore. Style BB and BC

cylinders of 38.1mm (11/2”) bores and above are supplied complete with a pivot pin.2 On 25.4mm (1”) bore size styles BB and BC a single lug is fi tted, as shown above.

Dimension CD is the crosshole diameter – the pivot pin is not included.3 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes

shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) bore cylinders only.4 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller

R2 size ports, please see page 42.




Style BCCap Detachable Clevis(NFPA Style MP2)


Dimensions BB & BC ContinuedBore

ØRod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

L LR MR Y+ stroke

LB P XC XD ZC ZD

12.7 12.7 12.7 4949 98.4 54 127.0

127.0136.5136.5

138.1138.1

147.6147.6

19.1 15.9 15.9 4958 101.6 58 136.5

146.1146.1155.6

149.2158.8

158.8168.3

19.1 15.9 15.9496558

101.6 58136.5152.4146.1

146.1161.9155.6

149.2165.1158.7

158.8174.6168.3

19.1 15.9 15.9

49715865

104.8 61

139.7161.9149.2155.6

149.2171.5158.8165.1

152.4174.6161.9168.2

161.9184.2171.5177.8

31.8 25.4 23.8

58746571

123.8 70

174.6190.5181.0187.3

190.5206.4196.9203.2

193.7209.6200.0206.4

209.6225.4215.9222.3

31.8 25.4 23.8

5881657174

123.8 70

174.6196.9181.0187.3190.5

190.5212.7196.9203.2206.4

193.7215.9200.0206.4209.6

209.6231.8215.9222.3225.4

31.8 25.4 23.8

58816571748181

130.2 77

181.0203.2187.3193.7196.9203.2203.2

196.9219.1203.2209.6212.7219.1219.1

200.6222.3206.4212.7215.9222.3222.3

215.9238.1222.3228.6231.8238.2238.2

38.1 31.8 30.2

68847478848484

146.1 83

206.4222.3212.7215.9222.3222.3222.3

225.4241.3231.8235.0241.3241.3241.3

231.8247.7238.2241.3247.7247.7247.7

251.0266.7257.4260.4266.7266.7266.7

ZD + stroke

LB + stroke

XD + stroke

P + stroke





Style DHead Trunnion(NFPA Style MT1)

Style DBCap Trunnion(NFPA Style MT2)

Dimensions D, DB & DD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 20


BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(33/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

BD E EE 4(BSPP)

F G H 5 J K TD +0.00-0.03 TL TM

– 38.1 5 G1/4 9.5 38.1 6.4 25.4 5.0 19.05 19.1 –

31.7 50.8 5 G3/8 9.5 38.1 – 3.2 25.4 6.4 25.40 25.4 63.5

38.1 63.5 5 G3/8 9.5 38.1–

2.4–

25.4 7.5 25.40 25.4 76.2

38.1 76.2 5 G3/8 9.5 38.1

–2.4––

25.4 7.5 25.40 25.4 88.9

50.8 95.2 G1/2 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 10.0 25.40 25.4 114.3

50.8 114.3 G1/2 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 10.0 25.40 25.4 133.4

50.8 139.7 G1/2 15.9 44.5 – 31.8 13.0 25.40 25.4 158.8

63.5 165.1 G3/4 19.1 50.8 – 38.1 13.0 34.92 34.9 193.7

See Notes 4, 5

See Notes 4, 5


LB + stroke

XJ + stroke

LB + stroke



Notes1 Note the minimum stroke from the table below.2 XI dimension to be specifi ed by customer. Please note minimum dimension from the

table below.3 Not available in 25.4mm (1”) bore size.4 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller

R2 size ports, please see page 42.5 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and rod sizes

shown below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) bore cylinders only.


Dimensions D, DB & DD Continued


Style DDIntermediate Fixed Trunnion(NFPA Style MT4)

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5

BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

UM UT UV XG Min. XI 2 Y Style DD min. stroke

+ strokeLB P XJ ZB max

– 76.2 – 44.544.5

––

4949 – 98.4 54 101.6

101.6119.3119.3

114.3 101.6 63.5 44.554.0

8089

4958 3.2 101.6 58 104.7

114.3123.8133.4

127.0 114.3 76.244.560.354.0

839993

496558

10.0 101.6 58104.7120.7114.3

125.8141.7135.3

139.7 127.0 88.9

44.566.754.060.3

831059399

49715865

6.4 104.8 61

108.0130.2117.4123.8

129.0151.2138.4144.9

165.1 146.1 108.0

57.273.063.569.8

105121112118

58746571

20.0 123.8 70

127.0142.9133.4139.7

152.9168.8159.3165.6

184.2 165.1 127.0

57.279.463.569.873.0

105127112118121

5881657174

20.0 123.8 70

127.0149.2133.4139.7142.9

152.9175.1159.3165.6168.8

210.0 190.5 152.4

57.279.463.569.873.079.479.4

105127112118121127127

58816571748181

13.0 130.2 77

133.4155.6139.7146.1149.2155.6155.6

162.2184.0168.6174.9178.1184.5184.5

263.6 235.0 177.8

66.782.673.076.282.682.682.6

124140131134140140140

68847478848484

26.0 146.1 83

149.2165.1155.6158.8165.1165.1165.1

181.3197.2187.6191.8197.2197.2197.2


LB + stroke



All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.1 All rod threads are UNF except 1-14 which is UNS.

Rod End Style 4 Rod End Style 8

Rod End Style 9

Rod End Dimensions – 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes

Rod End Details – 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes only

Piston Rod End Data for 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”) bore size cylinders is shown on page 30.

Rod End Styles 4 & 8Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which the work piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the work piece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If a rod end style is not specifi ed, Style 4 will be supplied.

Rod End Style 9 For applications where a female thread is required.

Rod End Style 3Non-standard piston rod ends are designated ‘Style 3’. A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order. Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.

Piston Rod End Data

Bore Ø

Rod No.

MMRod

Diameter

25.4(1")

12

12.7 (1/2")15.9 (5/8")

38.1(11/2")

12

15.9 (5/8")25.4 (1")

50.8(2")

123

15.9 (5/8")34.9 (13/8")25.4 (1")

63.5(21/2")

1234

15.9 (5/8")44.5 (13/4")25.4 (1")34.9 (13/8")

82.6(31/4")

1234

25.4 (1")50.8 (2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")

101.6(4")

12345

25.4 (1")63.5 (21/2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

127.0(5")

1234567

25.4 (1")88.9 (31/2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")

152.4(6")

1234567

34.9 (13/8")101.6 (4")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")

Styles 4 & 9 Style 8

A B+0.00

-0.05D NA V WKK

MetricKK

UNF 1CC

MetricCC

UNF

M8x1.25M10x1.5

5/16-247/16-20

M10x1.5M12x1.5

7/16-201/2-20

15.919.0

25.3728.55

1013

11.114.3

6.46.4

15.915.9

M10x1.5M20x1.5

7/16-203/4-16

M12x1.5M22x1.5

1/2-207/8-14

19.028.6

28.5538.07

1322

14.322.6

6.412.7

15.925.4

M10x1.5M26x1.5M20x1.5

7/16-201-14

3/4-16

M12x1.5M30x2

M22x1.5

1/2-2011/4-127/8-14

19.041.328.5

28.5550.7738.07

133022

14.332.222.6

6.415.912.7

15.931.825.4

M10x1.5M33x2

M20x1.5M26x1.5

7/16-2011/4-123/4-161-14

M12x1.5M39x2

M22x1.5M30x2

1/2-2011/2-127/8-1411/4-12

19.050.828.541.3

28.5560.3038.0750.77

13362230

14.341.622.632.2

6.419.112.715.9

15.938.125.431.8

M20x1.5M39x2

M26x1.5M33x2

3/4-1611/2-121-14

11/4-12

M22x1.5M45x2M30x2M39x2

7/8-1413/4-1211/4-1211/2-12

28.557.141.350.8

38.0766.6550.7760.30

22413036

22.648.032.241.6

6.412.79.512.7

19.134.925.431.8

M20x1.5M48x2

M26x1.5M33x2M39x2

3/4-1617/8-121-14

11/4-1211/2-12

M22x1.5M56x2M30x2M39x2M45x2

7/8-1421/4-1211/4-1211/2-1213/4-12

28.576.241.350.857.1

38.0779.3550.7760.3066.65

2255303641

22.660.332.241.648.0

6.415.99.512.712.7

19.141.325.431.834.9

M20x1.5M64x2

M26x1.5M33x2M39x2M48x2M58x2

3/4-1621/2-121-14

11/4-1211/2-1217/8-1221/4-12

M22x1.5M76x2M30x2M39x2M45x2M56x2M68x2

7/8-1431/4-1211/4-1211/2-1213/4-1221/4-1223/4-12

28.588.941.350.857.176.288.9

38.07107.9250.7760.3066.6579.3595.22

22753036415565

22.685.732.241.648.060.373.0

6.415.99.512.712.715.915.9

19.141.325.431.834.941.341.3

M26x1.5M76x2M33x2M39x2M48x2M58x2M64x2

1-143-12

11/4-1211/2-1217/8-1221/4-1221/2-12

M30x2M95x2M39x2M45x2M56x2M68x2M76x2

11/4-1233/4-1211/2-1213/4-1221/4-1223/4-1231/4-12

41.3101.650.857.176.288.988.9

50.77120.6260.3066.6579.3595.22107.92

30853641556575

32.298.441.648.060.373.085.7

6.412.79.59.512.712.712.7

22.238.128.631.838.138.138.1

Wrench fl ats Wrench fl ats

Wrench fl ats


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesDouble Rod Cylinders

Double Rod Cylinders – 25.4 to 152.4mm Bore SizesAvailable with styles TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G, D, DD

Mounting Styles and CodesDouble rod cylinders are denoted by a ‘K’ in the model code, shown on page 47.

DimensionsTo obtain dimensional information for double rod cylinders, fi rst select the desired mounting style by referring to the corresponding single rod models shown on the preceding pages. Dimensions for the appropriate single rod model should be supplemented by those from the table opposite to provide a full set of dimensions.

Rod StrengthDouble rod cylinders employ two separate piston rods, with one screwed into the end of the other within the piston rod assembly. As a result, one piston rod is stronger than the other. The stronger rod is identifi ed by the letter ‘K’ stamped on its end.

Combination RodsDouble rod cylinders with rods of differing rod diameters are also available. Please contact the factory for details.

CushioningDouble rod cylinders can be supplied with cushions at either or both ends. Cushioning requirements should be specifi ed by inserting a ‘C’ in the ordering code – see page 47. Double rod cylinders that require cushioning are supplied with fl oating cushion sleeves at both ends.

Style 9 Rod EndsIf a stroke of less than 25mm on bore sizes up to 82.6mm (31/4”), or a stroke of less than 100mm on bore sizes of 101.6mm (4”) and over, is required, where Style 9 rod ends are required at both ends, please consult the factory.


Double Rod Cylinders – 203.2 to 355.6mm Bore SizesAvailable with styles TB, TD, JB, C, F, G, D, DD

Bore Ø

Rod No.

MM Rod

Diameter

25.4(1") 1 12.7 (1/2")

38.1(11/2") 1 15.9 (5/8")

50.8(2") 1 15.9 (5/8")

63.5(21/2") 1 15.9 (5/8")

82.6(31/4") 1 25.4 (1")

101.6(4") 1 25.4 (1")

127.0(5") 1 25.4 (1")

152.4(6") 1 34.9 (13/8")

203.2(8") 1 34.9 (13/8")

254.0(10") 1 44.5 (13/4")

304.8(12") 1 50.8 (2")

355.6(14") 1 63.5 (21/2")

All dimensions apply to rod no. 1 only. For alternative rod sizes, please consult the factory.

+ stroke + 2x stroke

LD ZL SSK ZM

120.7 139.7 85.7 152.4

123.8 146.1 85.7 155.6

123.8 147.6 85.7 155.6

127.0 150.8 88.9 158.8

152.4 181.0 95.3 190.6

152.4 181.0 95.3 190.5

158.8 188.9 92.1 196.9

178.0 211.1 104.8 222.3

181.0 – 108.0 225.4

206.4 – 123.8 263.5

219.1 – 136.5 282.6

257.2 – 161.9 333.4

XS

ZM + (2 x stroke)ZL + stroke

P + strokeLD + stroke

SSK + strokeSSK + stroke


ZM + (2 x stroke)



Dimensions TB, TC & TD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30


Style TBTie Rods Extended Head End(NFPA Style MX3)

Style TCTie Rods Extended Cap End(NFPA Style MX2)

BoreØ

Rod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

AA BB DD 1 E EE 3 (BSPP)

F G J

231.1 58.7 5/8 - 18 215.9 G3/4 19.1 50.8 38.1

284.5 68.3 3/4 - 16 269.9 G1 19.1 57.2 50.8

337.8 68.3 3/4 - 16 323.9 G1 19.1 57.2 50.8

391.2 81.0 7/8 - 14 374.7 G11/4 19.1 69.9 57.2

See Notes 1, 2, 3

See Notes 1, 2, 3


LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

LB + stroke

P + stroke



Notes1 All tie rod threads are UNF.2 For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied.3 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.


Dimensions TB, TC & TD Continued


Style TDTie Rods Extended Both Ends(NFPA MX1)

BoreØ

Rod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

K R TT WF Y+ stroke

LB P ZB max

16.0 163.6

101.6177.8101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8

41.357.247.650.857.257.257.257.257.2

688474788484848484

149.2 86

187.4203.3193.8197.0203.3203.3203.3203.3203.3

17.0 201.2

101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

47.650.857.257.257.257.257.257.2

7780868686868686

181.0 107

226.5229.7236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0

17.0 238.8

101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

50.857.257.257.257.257.257.2

80868686868686

193.7 120

242.4248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7

19.0 276.9

101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

57.257.257.257.257.257.2

949494949494

225.4 142

282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6

See Notes 1, 2, 3ZB + stroke

LB + stroke

P + stroke



Dimensions JB, HB & BB See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30


Style JBHead Square(NFPA Style ME3)

Style HBCap Square (NFPA Style ME4)

BoreØ

Rod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

CB CD +0.00-0.08 CW E EB EE 2

(BSPP)F G J K L LR

39.7 25.43 19.1 215.9 18 G3/4 19.1 50.8 38.1 16.0 38.1 31.8

52.4 34.95 25.4 269.9 22 G1 19.1 57.2 50.8 17.0 54.0 47.6

65.1 44.48 31.8 323.9 22 G1 19.1 57.2 50.8 17.0 57.2 54.0

65.1 50.83 31.8 374.7 24 G11/4 19.1 69.9 57.2 19.0 63.5 60.3

See Note 2

See Note 2

P + stroke

LB + stroke

ZJ + stroke

LB + strokeXK + stroke

P + stroke

ZB + stroke



Dimensions JB, HB & BB Continued


Notes1 Supplied complete with pivot pin.2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.

Style BBCap Fixed CLevis(NFPA Style MP1)


BoreØ

Rod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

MR TE TT WF Y+ stroke

LB P XC XK ZB max ZC ZJ

30.2 192.3

101.6177.8101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8

41.357.247.650.857.257.257.257.257.2

688474788484848484

149.2 86

209.6225.4215.9219.1225.4225.4225.4225.4225.4

133.4149.2139.7142.9149.2149.2149.2149.2149.2

187.4203.3193.8197.0203.3203.3203.3203.3203.3

235.0250.8241.3244.5250.8250.8250.8250.8250.8

171.5187.3177.8181.0187.3187.3187.3187.3187.3

41.3 238.8

101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

47.650.857.257.257.257.257.257.2

7780868686868686

181.0 107

263.5266.7273.1273.1273.1273.1273.1273.1

158.8161.9168.3168.3168.3168.3168.3168.3

226.5229.7236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0

298.5301.6308.0308.0308.0308.0308.0308.0

209.6212.7219.1219.1219.1219.1219.1219.1

54.0 281.9

101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

50.857.257.257.257.257.257.2

80868686868686

193.7 120

282.6288.9288.9288.9288.9288.9288.9

174.6181.0181.0181.0181.0181.0181.0

242.4248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7

327.0333.4333.4333.4333.4333.4333.4

225.4231.8231.8231.8231.8231.8231.8

60.3 326.9

101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

57.257.257.257.257.257.2

949494949494

225.4 142

327.0327.0327.0327.0327.0327.0

206.4206.4206.4206.4206.4206.4

282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6

377.8377.8377.8377.8377.8377.8

263.5263.5263.5263.5263.5263.5

See Note 1, 2

P + stroke

LB + stroke

XC + stroke

ZC + stroke

NT thread, ND deep (x4)




Style CSide Lug Mounting(NFPA Style MS2)

Style FSide Tapped Mounting(NFPA Style MS4)

Dimensions C, F & G See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30Bore

ØRod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

E EB EE 5 (BSPP)

EL EO ES ET F G J K ND NT 4 R SB 1 ST

215.9 18 G3/4 28.6 15.9 57.2 50.8 19.1 50.8 38.1 16.0 28.6 M20 163.6 22 25.4

269.9 22 G1 33.3 15.9 69.9 61.9 19.1 57.2 50.8 17.0 38.1 M24 201.2 26 31.8

323.9 22 G1 33.3 15.9 88.9 69.9 19.1 57.2 50.8 17.0 38.1 M24 238.8 26 31.8

374.7 24 G11/4 38.1 19.1 101.6 95.3 19.1 69.9 57.2 19.0 47.6 M30 276.9 33 38.1

See Note 1, 5

See Note 4, 5

P + stroke

SN + strokeLB + stroke

ZB + stroke

P + strokeZB + stroke

SS + stroke

LB + stroke



Dimensions C, F & G Continued


Notes1 Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws.2 Mounting style G is not available on 203.2mm (8”) bores with rod numbers 2, 6, 7, 8 and 0, and 254.0mm (10”) bores with rod

numbers 9 and 0.3 When using mounting Style G, check clearance between mounting members and rod attachment or accessory. If necessary,

specify longer rod extension to avoid interference with mounting member.4 Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series).5 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.

Style GSide End Lugs(NFPA Style MS7)


BoreØ

Rod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

SW TN TS TT US XS XT Y+ stroke

LB P SE SN SS XE ZB max ZE

17.5 114.3 250.8

101.6177.8101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8

285.8

58.774.665.168.374.674.674.674.674.6

71.487.377.881.087.387.387.387.387.3

688474788484848484

149.2 86 187.3 82.6 95.3

200.0–

206.4209.6215.9

––––

187.4203.3193.8197.0203.3203.3203.3203.3203.3

215.9–

222.3225.4231.8

––––

22.2 139.7 314.3

101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

358.8

69.973.079.479.479.479.479.479.4

79.482.688.988.988.988.988.988.9

7780868686868686

181.0 107 228.6 104.8 117.5

242.9246.1252.4252.4252.4252.4

––

226.5229.7236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0

258.8261.9268.3268.3268.3268.3

––

22.2 184.2 368.0

101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

412.8

73.079.479.479.479.479.479.4

82.688.988.988.988.988.988.9

80868686868686

193.7 120 241.3 117.5 130.2

258.8265.1265.1265.1265.1265.1265.1

242.4248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7

274.6281.0281.0281.0281.0281.0281.0

28.6 212.7 431.8

101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

489.0

85.785.785.785.785.785.7

96.896.896.896.896.896.8

949494949494

225.4 142 282.6 139.7 149.2

301.6301.6301.6301.6301.6301.6

282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6

320.7320.7320.7320.7320.7320.7

See Note 2. 3, 5ZE + strokeXE + stroke

P + stroke

LB + stroke

SE + stroke



Dimensions D, DB & DD See also Rod End Dimensions, page 30


Style DHead Trunnion(NFPA Style MT1)

Style DBCap Trunnion(NFPA Style MT2)

E

BoreØ

Rod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

BD E EE 2 (BSPP)

F G J K TD +0.00-0.03 TL TM TT

63.5 215.9 G3/4 19.1 50.8 38.1 16.0 34.93 34.9 247.7

101.6177.8101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8

76.2 269.9 G1 19.1 57.2 50.8 17.0 44.45 44.5 304.8

101.6101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

76.2 323.9 G1 19.1 57.2 50.8 17.0 44.45 44.5 355.6

101.6101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

88.9 374.7 G11/4 19.1 69.9 57.2 19.0 50.83 50.8 412.8

101.6139.7139.7139.7177.8177.8

See Note 2

See Note 2

XJ + stroke

LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

P + stroke


LB + stroke



Notes1 XI dimension to be specifi ed by customer. Please note minimum dimension from the table below.2 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 2A cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, please see page 42.



Style DDIntermediate Fixed Trunnion(NFPA Style MT4)

Dimensions D, DB & DD ContinuedBore

ØRod No.

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

UM UT UV XG Min. XI 1 Y Style DD min. stroke

+ strokeLB P XJ ZB max

317.5 285.8 241.3

66.782.673.076.282.682.682.682.682.6

123.8139.7130.2133.4139.7139.7139.7139.7139.7

688474788484848484

22.2 149.2 86

152.4168.3158.8161.9168.3168.3168.3168.3168.3

187.4203.3193.8197.0203.3203.3203.3203.3203.3

393.7 358.8 298.5

76.279.485.785.785.785.785.785.7

142.9146.1152.4152.4152.4152.4152.4152.4

7780868686868686

22.2 181.0 107

184.2187.3193.7193.7193.7193.7193.7193.7

226.5229.7236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0236.0

444.5 412.8 349.3

79.485.785.785.785.785.785.7

146.1152.4152.4152.4152.4152.4152.4

80868686868686

9.5 193.7 120

200.0206.4206.4206.4206.4206.4206.4

242.4248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7248.7

514.4 476.2 406.4

92.192.192.192.192.192.1

171.5171.5171.5171.5171.5171.5

949494949494

9.5 225.4 142

235.0235.0235.0235.0235.0235.0

282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6282.6

See Notes 1, 2ZB + strokeP + stroke

LB + stroke


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesPiston Rod End Data

Rod End Style 4


Rod End Style 8 Rod End Style 9

Rod End Styles 4 & 8Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which the work piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the work piece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If rod end style is not specifi ed, Style 4 will be supplied.

Rod End Details – 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”) bore sizes

1 All rod threads are UNF except 1-14 which is UNS.

Rod End Dimensions – 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”) bore sizes

Rod End Style 9 For applications where a female thread is required.

Rod End Style 3Non-standard piston rod ends are designated ‘Style 3’.A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order. Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.

BoreØ

Rod No.

MM Rod

Diameter

203.2 (8")

123456780

34.9 (13/8")139.7 (51/2")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")

254.0 (10")

13456790

44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

304.8 (12")

1345689

50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

355.6 (14")

134578

63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

Piston Rod End Data for 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore size cylinders is shown on page 20.

Styles 4 & 9 Style 8

A B+0.00

-0.05D NA V WKK

MetricKK

UNF 1CC

MetricCC

UNF

M26x1.5M100x2M33x2M39x2M48x2M58x2M64x2M76x2M90x2

1-144-12

11/4-1211/2-1217/8-1221/4-1221/2-123-12

31/2-12

M30x2M130x2M39x2M45x2M56x2M68x2M76x2M95x2M110x2

11/4-1251/4-1211/2-1213/4-1221/4-1223/4-1231/4-1233/4-1243/4-12

41.3139.750.857.276.288.988.9101.6127.0

50.77158.7260.3066.6579.3595.22107.92120.62146.02

30120364155657585110

33.3136.542.949.260.373.085.798.4123.8

6.412.79.59.512.712.712.712.712.7

22.238.128.631.838.138.138.138.138.1

M33x2M39x2M48x2M58x2M64x2M76x2M90x2M100x2

11/4-1211/2-1217/8-1221/4-1221/2-123-12

31/2-124-12

M39x2M45x2M56x2M68x2M76x2M95x2M110x2M130x2

11/2-1213/4-1221/4-1223/4-1231/4-1233/4-1243/4-1251/4-12

50.857.276.288.988.9101.6127.0139.7

60.3066.6579.3595.22107.92120.62146.02158.72

364155657585110120

42.949.260.373.085.798.4123.8136.5

9.59.512.712.712.712.712.712.7

28.631.838.138.138.138.138.138.1

M39x2M48x2M58x2M64x2M76x2M90x2M100x2

11/2-1217/8-1221/4-1221/2-123-12

31/2-124-12

M45x2M56x2M68x2M76x2M95x2M110x2M130x2

13/4-1221/4-1223/4-1231/4-1233/4-1243/4-1251/4-12

57.276.288.988.9101.6127.0139.7

66.6579.3595.22107.92120.62146.02158.72

4155657585110120

49.260.373.085.798.4123.8136.5

9.512.712.712.712.712.712.7

31.838.138.138.138.138.138.1

M48x2M58x2M64x2M76x2M90x2M100x2

17/8-1221/4-1221/2-123-12

31/2-124-12

M56x2M68x2M76x2M95x2M110x2M130x2

21/4-1223/4-1231/4-1233/4-1243/4-1251/4-12

76.288.988.9101.6127.0139.7

79.3595.22107.92120.62146.02158.72

55657585110120

60.373.085.798.4123.8136.5

12.712.712.712.712.712.7

38.138.138.138.138.138.1

Wrench fl ats Wrench fl atsWrench fl ats


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesAccessories

Accessory SelectionAccessories for the rod end of a cylinder are selected by reference to the rod end thread, shown on pages 20 and 30, while the same accessories, when used at the cap end, are selected by cylinder bore size. See tables of part numbers below and on the following pages.

Pivot Pin Diameters – Style BBTo obtain the same diameter of pivot pin at the rod end and cap end of a style BB clevis-mounted cylinder fi tted with a rod clevis or plain rod eye, a no. 1 rod should be specifi ed.

Rod and Cap End AccessoriesAccessories for the 2A cylinder comprise:Rod End – rod clevis, eye bracket and pivot pin – plain rod eye, clevis bracket and pivot pin

Cap End – eye bracket for style BB mounting

Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket and Pivot Pin

1 Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 - 1984

2 Mounting plate for 25.4mm (1”) bore single tang BB and BC mounting styles is Clevis Bracket 74076


Plain Rod eye, Clevis Bracket and Pivot Pin

Load CapacityThe various accessories on these pages have been load rated for your convenience. The load capacity in kN is the recommended maximum load for that accessory based on a 4:1 factor of safety in tension. (Pivot pin is rated in shear). Before specifying, compare the actual load or the pull force at maximum operating pressure of the cylinder with the load capacity of the accessory you plan to use. If the load or pull force of the cylinder exceeds the load capacity of the accessory, please consult the factory.

Cap End Eye Bracket for Styles BB and BC Cylinders

ThreadKK

M8x1.25M10x1.5M12x1.5M20x1.5M22x1.5M26x1.5M33x2M39x2M45x2M48x2M58x2M64x2M68x2M76x2M90x2M100x2M110x2

Rod Clevis

Eye Bracket

Pivot Pin

Nominal Force

kN

Masskg

51221G 74077 – 7.7 0.450940G 69195 68368 18.3 0.750941G 69195 68368 18.3 0.750942G 69196 68369 46.8 2.350943G 85361 1 68370 83.8 5.250944G 85361 1 68370 91.0 5.150945G 69198 68371 94.5 9.950946G 85362 1 68372 203.3 19.550947G 85363 1 68373 312.1 28.650948G 85363 1 68373 312.1 28.550949G 85364 1 68374 420.0 48.450950G 85365 1 68375 420.0 63.450951G 85365 1 68375 543.6 63.150952G 73538 73545 256.0 104.850953G 73539 73547 334.4 157.850954G 73539 73547 334.4 156.6

– – – – –

ThreadKK

M8x1.25M10x1.5M12x1.5M20x1.5M22x1.5M26x1.5M33x2M39x2M45x2M48x2M58x2M64x2M68x2M76x2M90x2M100x2M110x2

Plain Rod Eye

Clevis Bracket

Pivot Pin

Nominal Force

kN

Masskg

74075G 74076 74078 15.0 0.569089G 69205 68368 22.3 1.369090G 69205 68368 25.4 1.369091G 69206 68369 54.0 3.269092G 69207 68370 58.0 6.669093G 69207 68370 85.6 6.669094G 69208 68371 149.4 12.769095G 69209 68372 151.6 23.469096G 69210 69215 147.2 41.169097G 69210 69215 147.2 41.569098G 69211 68374 155.6 51.269099G 69212 68375 150.7 65.269100G 69213 69216 164.6 69.573536G 73542 73545 372.3 126.773437G 73542 73545 372.3 124.073438G 73543 82181 457.5 180.773439G 73544 73547 483.4 173.5

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

254.0 (10")

304.8 (12")

355.6 (14")

Eye Bracket Part Number

Nominal Force kN

Masskg

74076 2 16.0 0.4

69195 18.3 0.4

69195 18.3 0.4

69195 18.3 0.4

69196 46.8 1.5

69196 46.8 1.5

69196 46.8 1.5

85361 1 91.0 3.4

85361 1 91.0 3.4

69198 94.5 5.6

85362 1 220.6 11.1

85363 1 312.1 17.0

Pivot Pin for Clevis Bracket and Eye Bracket



1 Includes pivot pin2 Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA

recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 - 1984

Eye Bracket

Rod Clevis (Female Clevis)


Rod Clevis, Eye Bracket and Pivot Pin

Accessories

Pivot Pin for Clevis Bracket and Eye Bracket

Eye Bracket Dimensions

Rod Clevis Dimensions

Part Number

51221G 1

50940G

50941G

50942G

50943G

50944G

50945G

50946G

50947G

50948G

50949G

50950G

50951G

50952G

50953G

50954G

A CB CD+0.10

+0.05CE CW ER KK

Nominal Force

kN

Mass kg

20.6 8.8 7.90 57.2 5.2 7.5 M8x1.25 11.6 0.1

19.1 19.8 12.70 38.1 12.7 12.7 M10x1.5 18.9 0.2

19.1 19.8 12.70 38.1 12.7 12.7 M12x1.5 21.9 0.2

28.6 32.6 19.05 54.0 15.9 19.1 M20x1.5 49.9 0.6

41.3 38.9 25.40 74.6 19.1 25.4 M22x1.5 83.8 1.3

41.3 38.9 25.40 74.6 19.1 25.4 M26x1.5 96.7 1.3

50.8 51.6 34.93 95.3 25.4 34.9 M33x2 149.4 3.1

57.2 64.7 44.45 114.3 31.8 44.5 M39x2 203.3 6.0

76.2 64.7 50.80 139.7 31.8 50.8 M45x2 317.9 8.4

76.2 64.7 50.80 139.7 31.8 50.8 M48x2 341.6 8.3

88.9 77.4 63.50 165.1 38.1 63.5 M58x2 480.2 15.1

88.9 77.4 76.20 171.5 38.1 69.9 M64x2 535.1 19.0

88.9 77.4 76.20 171.5 38.1 69.9 M68x2 589.9 18.7

88.9 102.8 88.90 196.9 50.8 88.9 M76x2 1048.8 34.1

101.6 116.0 101.60 223.8 57.2 101.6 M90x2 1292.2 49.8

101.6 116.0 101.60 223.8 57.2 101.6 M100x2 1480.0 48.6

Part Number

74077

69195

69196

85361 2

69198

85362 2

85363 2

85364 2

85365 2

73538

73539

CB CD+0.10

+0.05DD E F FL LR M MR R

Nominal Force

kN

Masskg

7.9 7.90 6.8 57.2 9.5 25.4 15.9 9.5 12.7 44.5 7.6 0.3

19.1 12.70 10.3 63.5 9.5 28.6 19.1 12.7 14.3 41.4 18.3 0.4

31.8 19.05 13.5 88.9 15.9 47.6 31.8 19.1 22.2 64.8 46.8 1.5

38.1 25.40 16.7 114.3 22.2 60.3 38.1 25.4 31.8 82.6 91.0 3.4

50.8 34.93 16.7 127.0 22.2 76.2 54.0 34.9 41.3 97.0 94.5 5.6

63.5 44.45 23.0 165.1 28.6 85.7 57.2 44.5 54.0 125.7 220.6 11.1

63.5 50.80 27.0 190.5 38.1 101.6 63.5 50.8 61.9 145.5 312.1 17.0

76.2 63.50 30.2 215.9 44.5 120.6 76.2 63.5 76.2 167.1 420.0 27.4

76.2 76.20 33.3 241.3 50.8 133.3 82.6 69.9 82.6 190.5 543.6 35.8

101.6 88.90 46.0 320.7 42.9 144.5 101.6 88.9 95.3 244.3 256.0 55.6

114.3 101.60 52.4 377.8 49.2 163.5 114.3 101.6 108.0 290.8 334.4 84.3

Part Number

74078

68368

68369

68370

68371

68372

68373

69215

68374

68375

69216

73545

82181

73547

CD+0.00

-0.05CL

+0.0

-0.5G Nominal

Force kNMass

kg

11.10 32.7 40 29.4 0.03

12.73 46.3 56 38.4 0.1

19.08 65.4 75 86.1 0.2

25.43 77.9 88 152.9 0.5

34.95 103.4 115 289.8 1.2

44.48 128.8 143 469.1 2.4

50.83 129.7 145 612.7 3.2

50.83 141.4 158 612.7 3.5

63.53 155.1 171 957.4 5.9

76.23 154.7 173 1378.7 8.6

76.23 167.7 185 1378.7 9.2

88.93 205.7 225 1876.8 15.2

101.63 215.5 235 2522.9 22.4

101.63 231.7 251 2522.9 23.5


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesAccessories


Plain Rod Eye Dimensions

Plain Rod Eye and Clevis Bracket

Plain Rod Eye

Clevis Bracket

Clevis Bracket Dimensions

Part Number

74075G

69089G

69090G

69091G

69092G

69093G

69094G

69095G

69096G

69097G

69098G

69099G

69100G

73536G

73437G

73438G

73439G

A min. CA CB CD

+0.10

+0.05ER KK

Nominal Force

kN

Masskg

19.1 38.1 11.1 11.10 15.2 M8x1.25 14.7 0.1

19.1 38.1 19.1 12.70 18.3 M10x1.5 22.3 0.2

19.1 38.1 19.1 12.70 18.3 M12x1.5 25.4 0.2

28.6 52.4 31.8 19.05 27.0 M20x1.5 54.0 0.5

28.6 60.3 38.1 25.40 36.5 M22x1.5 58.0 1.1

41.3 71.4 38.1 25.40 36.5 M26x1.5 96.8 1.1

50.8 87.3 50.8 34.93 50.0 M33x2 149.4 2.6

57.2 101.6 63.5 44.45 63.5 M39x2 200.6 5.1

57.2 111.1 63.5 50.80 72.2 M45x2 238.6 6.4

76.2 127.0 63.5 50.80 72.2 M48x2 334.4 6.8

88.9 147.6 76.2 63.50 90.5 M58x2 440.1 12.1

88.9 155.6 76.2 76.20 108.0 M64x2 490.5 16.0

92.1 165.1 88.9 76.20 108.0 M68x2 549.8 19.6

101.6 193.7 101.6 88.90 126.2 M76x2 719.3 31.1

127.0 193.7 101.6 88.90 126.2 M90x2 969.0 28.4

139.7 231.8 114.3 101.60 144.5 M100x2 1220.9 42.5

139.7 231.8 127.0 101.60 144.5 M110x2 1375.6 48.4

Part Numbers

74076

69205

69206

69207

69208

69209

69210

69211

69212

69213

73542

73543

73544

CB CD+0.10

+0.05CW DD E F FL LR M MR R

Nominal Force

kN

Masskg

12.0 11.10 9.5 6.8 57.2 9.5 25.4 15.9 9.5 12.7 44.5 16.0 0.4

19.8 12.70 12.7 10.3 88.9 12.7 38.1 19.1 12.7 15.9 64.8 32.6 1.0

32.6 19.05 15.9 13.5 127.0 15.9 47.6 30.2 19.1 23.0 97.0 62.4 2.5

38.9 25.40 19.1 16.7 165.1 19.1 57.2 38.1 25.4 31.8 125.7 85.6 5.0

51.6 34.93 25.4 16.7 190.5 22.2 76.2 50.8 34.9 42.1 145.5 164.6 8.8

64.7 44.45 31.8 23.0 241.3 22.2 92.1 69.9 44.5 56.4 190.5 151.6 15.9

64.7 50.80 38.1 27.0 323.9 25.4 108.0 81.0 57.2 70.6 238.8 147.2 31.2

77.4 63.50 38.1 30.2 323.9 25.4 114.3 88.9 63.5 79.4 238.8 155.6 33.2

77.4 76.20 38.1 33.3 323.9 25.4 152.4 108.0 76.2 91.3 238.8 150.7 40.7

90.1 76.20 38.1 33.3 323.9 25.4 152.4 108.0 76.2 91.3 238.8 164.6 40.7

102.8 88.90 50.8 46.0 393.7 42.9 169.9 127.0 88.9 104.8 304.8 372.3 80.4

116.0 101.60 50.8 52.4 444.5 49.2 195.3 146.1 101.6 123.8 349.3 457.5 115.8

128.2 101.60 50.8 52.4 444.5 49.2 195.3 146.1 101.6 123.8 349.3 483.4 101.6



Series 2AN Non-Lubricated Air CylindersIncreased market demand and Parker’s continuous research and testing efforts inspired the development of the Series 2AN Non-Lubricated Air Cylinder, suitable for use with fi ltered air.

These cylinders are designed to operate in environments where it is not possible to add lubrication to the compressed air entering the cylinder. Certain packaging and assembly operations, food environments, and microprocessor chip manufacturing are typical examples of applications where the exhausting of oil into the environment is not desirable.

Available in bore sizes up to 304.8mm (12”) diameter and rod diameters up to 63.5mm (21/2”), the Series 2AN cylinder features rounded lip rod and piston seals.

Rounded LipsealThe rounded sealing lip glides over lubricant fi lm instead of scraping it off, and the increased heel thickness and outer lip extension improve stability and resist rolling. The use of the rounded lipseal reduces friction, increases life and eliminates the need for added lubrication.

Design Features and Benefi tsFor the standard features shown above, please see pages 4 and 5. For available bore and rod sizes, please see table opposite.

Benefi ts of the 2AN Series cylinder include long seal and bearing life and, since no oil is added through the use of lubricators, no oil is expelled into the atmosphere with the exhaust air as the cylinder strokes. In addition, the use of non-lubricated air results in lower overall operating costs.

With the exception of fl uorocarbon elastomer seals, and unless otherwise stated, all modifi cations available with Series 2A Cylinders are also available with Series 2AN cylinders.

Operating TemperaturesThe temperature range for Series 2AN cylinders with Group 1 seals is -20°C to +80°C. Group 5, high temperatures seals, are suitable for operating temperatures between -15°C and +150°C.

Non-Lubricated Air Cylinders

1

3 2 5

4

6 8

7 & 8 Rounded Lipseals

79

2AN Series

Ordering InformationTo order a Non-Lubricated Air Cylinder, specify Series 2AN. See page 47 for the ordering code.

Available Bore and Rod SizesThe following bore and rod sizes are available with Series 2AN cylinders. For all other sizes, please contact the factory.

Bore Ø Rod Number Rod Diameter MM

25.4(1")

12

12.7 (1/2")15.9 (5/8")

38.1(11/2")

12

15.9 (5/8")25.4 (1")

50.8(2")

123

15.9 (5/8")34.9 (13/8")25.4 (1")

63.5(21/2")

1234

15.9 (5/8")44.5 (13/4")25.4 (1")

34.9 (13/8")

82.6(31/4")

1234

25.4 (1")50.8 (2")

34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")

101.6(4")

12345

25.4 (1")63.5 (21/2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

127.0(5")

13456

25.4 (1")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

152.4(6")

1345

34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

203.2(8")

1345

34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

254.0(10")

134

44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")304.8(12")

13

50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesReplacement Parts for 2AN Cylinders

Service Assemblies and Seal KitsService Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for 2AN cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance processes. This page lists only those kits specifi c to 2AN Series cylinders. For standard Series 2A cylinder service kits, please refer to page 45. They contain sub-assemblies which are ready for installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identifi cation plate on the cylinder body and supply the following information:

Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type

Key to Part Numbers(For all other part numbers, please refer to page 44).

14 Gland/bearing cartridge17 Piston40 Wiperseal – for gland41 Rounded Lipseal – for gland42 Rounded Lipseal – for piston45 O-ring – gland/head

2AN Gland Cartridge and Seals

Lipseal Piston

42

17

Seal GroupsGroup 1 Seal Kits are supplied as standard. Special seals are available for 2AN Series cylinders in high temperature (Group 5) applications – please contact the factory for details.

Ordering InformationTo order a non-lubricated air cylinder, specify '2AN' in the order code on page 47.

Contents and Part Numbers of 2AN Seal Kits for Pistons and Glands (see key to part numbers opposite and on page 44)

Gland Cartridge Service Kit Contains items 14, 40, 41, 45.

Gland Service Kit Contains items 40, 41, 45.


Rod Diametermm

12.7 (1/2")

15.9 (5/8")

25.4 (1")

34.9 (13/8")

44.5 (13/4")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

Gland Cartridge Service Kit,

Standard Seals

Gland Service Kit, Standard Seals

RG2AN00051 RK2AN00051

RG2AN00061 RK2AN00061

RG2AN00101 RK2AN00101

RG2AN00131 RK2AN00131

RG2AN00171 RK2AN00171

RG2AN00201 RK2AN00201

RG2AN00251 RK2AN00251

Piston Service Kit, Lipseal PistonContains two each of items 42 and 47.

Tie Rod TorquesPlease refer to the table on page 37.

RepairsAlthough 2AN cylinders are designed to make on-site maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations can only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fi t a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessary to return it to ‘as good as new’ condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that repair would be uneconomical, you will be notifi ed.

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

254.0 (10")

304.8 (12")

Piston Service Kit Lipseal Piston

PK1002AN01

PK1502AN01

PK2002AN01

PK2502AN01

PK3202AN01

PK4002AN01

PK5002AN01

PK6002AN01

PK8002AN01

PK9002AN01

PK9202AN01

2AN Series

40 41 14 45

36 Parker Hannifin Ltd.Cylinder DivisionEurope

Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesMounting Information

Mounting StylesThe notes which follow provide information for use in specific applications and should be read in conjunction with the information given on page 7.

Extended Tie RodsThe standard tie rod extension for cylinders with mounting style TB, TC and TD is shown as BB in dimension tables. Longer or shorter extensions can be supplied.

Cylinders with extended tie rod mountings TB and TC are supplied with an additional set of mounting nuts of the appropriate grade for securing the cylinder to the machine member. For style TD, tie rods extended both ends, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied. In such applications one end is used for mounting and the opposite end to support the cylinder, or to attach other machine components.

Cylinders may be ordered with extended tie rods in addition to another mounting style. The extended tie rods may then be used for mounting other systems or machine components.

Flange Mounted CylindersThe diameter of the rod gland extension (B), pages 20 and 30, at the head end can be used as a pilot to locate the cylinders in relation to the machine. After alignment has been obtained, the flanges may be drilled for pins or dowels to prevent movement.

Pivot MountingsPivot pins are supplied with style BB cap fixed clevis mounted cylinders and style BC cap detachable clevis mounted cylinders, with the exception of 1” bore sizes, which feature a single tang pivot – see page 16.

Trunnion Mounted Cylinders Trunnions require lubricated pillow blocks with minimum bearing clearances. Blocks should be aligned and mounted to eliminate bending moments on the trunnion pins. Self-aligning mounts must not be used to support the trunnions as bending forces can be set up.

An intermediate fixed trunnion mounting can be positioned to balance the weight of the cylinder, or it can be located at any point between the head or cap to suit the application. The position of the trunnion is fixed during manufacture and its location must be specified at the time of order.

Foot Mounted CylindersFoot mounted cylinders should not be pinned or keyed at both ends. Changes in temperature and pressure under normal operating conditions cause the cylinder to increase (or decrease) from its installed length and it therefore must be free to expand and contract. It must not be pinned or keyed at both ends as advantages of cylinder elasticity in absorbing high shock loads would be lost.


Bore sizes above 101.6mm (4”) do not require tie rod supports.

1 GP mounting not available on 25.4mm (1”) bore cylinders.

Tie Rod SupportsTo increase the resistance to buckling of long stroke cylinders, tie rod supports may be fitted. These move the tie rods radially outwards and allow longer than normal strokes to be used without the need for an additional mounting.

Foot Mountings and Thrust KeysThe turning moment which results from the application of force by a foot mounted cylinder must be resisted by secure mounting and effective guidance of the load. A thrust key modification is recommended to provide positive cylinder location.

Thrust key mountings eliminate the need for fitted bolts or external keys on Styles C, F and G side mounted cylinders. The gland retainer plate is extended below the nominal mounting surface to fit into a keyway milled into the mounting surface of the machine member. See ‘Mounting Modifications’ in the order code, page 47.

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

F Nominal FA

+0.0

-0.075PA

+0.0

-0.2PD

9.5 8 4.9 23.8

9.5 8 4.9 30.2

9.5 8 4.9 36.5

9.5 8 4.9 42.9

15.9 14 8.1 55.6

15.9 14 8.1 65.1

15.9 14 8.1 77.8

19.1 18 9.5 92.1

Bore Ø

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

Stroke (Metres)

Number of Supports Required

1.5 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2

1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4

– 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3

– – – 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

– – – – – 1 1 1 1 1

– – – – – – – 1 1 1

Integral key

2a_0910-uk.indd 36 24/11/2006 09:38:38


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesManifold Ports and Pressure Limitations


Manifold PortsSide mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface. Manifold ports are available with both single- and double-rodded cylinders. The ports are drilled and counterbored for O-ring seals which are provided. With these specifi cations, the mounting is designated Style CM. Please consult the factory.

Stroke TolerancesStroke length tolerances are required due to the build-up of tolerances of piston, head, cap and cylinder body. Standard production stroke tolerances are -0.4 to +0.8mm on all bore sizes and stroke lengths. For closer tolerances, please specify the required tolerance plus the operating temperature and pressure. Stroke tolerances of less than 0.4mm are generally impracticable due to the elasticity of cylinders and, in these cases, the use of a stroke limiter should be considered – see page 43.

Mounting Bolts Parker recommends that mounting bolts with a minimum strength of ISO 898/1 grade 10.9 should be used for fi xing cylinders to the machine or base. This recommendation is of particular importance where bolts are placed in tension or subjected to shear forces. Mounting bolts should be torque loaded to their manufacturer’s recommended fi gures.

Tie Rod NutsTie rod mounting nuts, with lubricated threads, should be to a minimum strength of ISO 898/2 grade 10, torque loaded to the fi gures shown.

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

254.0 (10")

304.8 (12")

355.6 (14")

Tie Rod Nut Torques

Nm min-max

lb.ft min-max

3 - 3.5 2 - 2.5

8 - 9 5 - 6

15 - 17 11 - 12

33 - 36 25 - 26

80 - 85 60 - 64

150 - 155 110 - 114

200 - 205 148 - 152

230 - 235 170 - 175

370 - 375 275 - 280

Bore Ø

Rod No.

25.4 (1") 1

38.1 (11/2") 1

50.8 (2") 1

63.5 (21/2") 1

82.6 (31/4") 1

101.6 (4") 1

127.0 (5") 1

152.4 (6") 1

203.2 (8") 1

254.0 (10") 1

304.8 (12") 1

355.6 (14") 1

Y±0.8

P±0.8 EEM ED

Parker O-Ring

No.

49.2 54.0 9.5 17.5 2 - 015

50.8 54.0 12.7 20.6 2 - 017

50.8 54.0 12.7 20.6 2 - 017

50.8 57.2 12.7 20.6 2 - 017

61.9 66.7 15.9 23.8 2 - 019

61.9 66.7 15.9 23.8 2 - 019

61.9 73.0 15.9 23.8 2 - 019

71.4 79.4 22.2 30.2 2 - 023

71.4 82.6 22.2 30.2 2 - 023

79.4 104.8 30.2 38.1 2 - 028

82.6 117.5 30.2 38.1 2 - 028

96.8 139.7 39.7 47.6 2 - 131

Dimensions for rod no. 1 only. For alternative rod sizes, please consult the factory.

Maximum PressureThe maximum working pressure of 18 bar (250 psi) is based on pure tensile and compressive loadings, without the presence of any bending stresses. Where it is impractical to avoid side loadings, eg: by the use of pivot mountings, please consult the factory giving full details of the application.

In many applications, the pressure developed within a cylinder may be greater than the working pressure, due to pressure intensifi cation across the piston and cushioning, eg: in meter-out circuits. In most cases, this intensifi cation does not affect the cylinder mountings or piston rod threads in the form of increased loading. If the induced pressure with the no. 1 rod exceeds 18 bar (250 psi), please consult the factory.

inPHormFor more comprehensive information about pressure limitations for individual cylinders, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.

P + stroke



Deduction for Pull Force


Theoretical Push and Pull Forces

Calculation of Cylinder DiameterGiven that the force and operating pressure of the system are known, and that a piston rod size has been estimated taking account of whether the rod is in tension (pull) or compression (push), then the cylinder bore can be selected.

If the piston rod is in compression, use the ‘Push Force’ table below, as follows:

1. Identify the operating pressure closest to that required.

2. In the same column, identify the force required to move the load (always rounding up).

3. In the same row, look along to the cylinder bore required.

If the cylinder envelope dimensions are too large for the application, increase the operating pressure, if possible, and repeat the exercise.

If the piston rod is in tension, use the ‘Deduction for Pull Force’ table. The procedure is the same but, due to the reduced area caused by the piston rod, the force available on the ‘pull’ stroke will be smaller. To determine the pull force:

1. Follow the procedure for ‘push’ applications as described above.

2. Using the ‘pull’ table, identify the force indicated according to the rod and pressure selected.

3. Deduct this from the original ‘push’ force. The resultant is the net force available to move the load.

If this force is not large enough, go through the process again but increase the system operating pressure or cylinder diameter if possible. If in doubt, our design engineers will be pleased to assist.

inPHormFor more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinder bore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.Push Force

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

254.0 (10")

304.8 (12")

355.6 (14")

Piston Area

mm2 sq. in.

510 0.785

1140 1.767

2020 3.14

3170 4.9

5360 8.3

8110 12.5

12670 20

18240 28.3

32430 50.3

50670 78.5

72930 113

99320 154

Cylinder Push Force in kN

2 bar

3.5 bar

5.5 bar

7 bar

18 bar

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.9

0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 2.1

0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 3.6

0.6 1.1 1.7 2.2 5.7

1.1 1.9 2.9 3.8 9.6

1.6 2.8 4.5 5.7 14.6

2.5 4.4 7.0 8.9 22.8

3.6 6.4 10.0 12.8 32.8

6.5 11.4 17.8 22.7 58.4

10.1 17.7 27.9 35.5 91.2

14.6 25.5 40.1 51.1 131.3

19.9 34.8 54.6 69.5 178.8

Cylinder Push Force in Pounds Force

25 psi

50 psi

65 psi

80 psi

100 psi

250 psi

20 39 51 65 79 196

44 88 115 142 177 443

79 157 204 251 314 785

123 245 319 393 491 1228

208 415 540 664 830 2075

314 628 817 1006 1257 3143

491 982 1277 1571 1964 4910

707 1414 1838 2262 2827 7068

1257 2513 3268 4022 5027 12568

1964 3927 5105 6283 7854 19635

2828 5655 7352 9048 11310 28275

3849 7697 10006 12315 15394 38485

Piston RodØ

12.7 (1/2")

15.9 (5/8")

25.4 (1")

34.9 (13/8")

44.5 (13/4")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

76.2 (3")

88.9 (31/2")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

139.7 (51/2")

Piston Rod Area

mm2 sq. in.

130 0.196

200 0.307

500 0.785

960 1.49

1560 2.41

2020 3.14

3170 4.9

4560 7.0

6210 10

8110 12.5

12670 20

15330 24

Piston Rod Forces in kN

2 bar

3.5 bar

5.5 bar

7 bar

18 bar

0.03 0.05 0.07 0.09 0.2

0.04 0.07 0.1 0.1 0.4

0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.9

0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1.7

0.3 0.5 0.9 1.1 2.8

0.4 0.7 1.1 1.4 3.6

0.6 1.1 1.7 2.2 5.7

0.9 1.6 2.5 3.2 8.2

1.2 2.2 3.4 4.3 11.2

1.6 2.8 4.5 5.7 14.6

2.5 4.4 7.0 8.9 22.8

3.1 5.4 8.4 10.7 27.6

Piston Rod Forces in Pounds Force

25 psi

50 psi

65 psi

80 psi

100 psi

250 psi

5 10 13 16 20 49

8 15 20 25 31 77

20 39 51 65 79 196

37 75 97 119 149 373

60 121 157 193 241 603

79 157 204 251 314 785

123 245 319 393 491 1228

177 354 460 566 707 1767

241 481 625 770 962 2405

314 628 817 1006 1257 3143

491 982 1277 1571 1964 4910

594 1188 1544 1901 2376 5940



graph by following the horizontal band within which the point of intersection lies. Note that stop tube requirements differ for fi xed and pivot mounted cylinders. For cylinders fi tted with a stop tube and cushion at the head end, a dual piston arrangement is required – please consult the factory.

If the required length of stop tube is in the region labelled ‘consult factory’, please submit the following information:

1. Cylinder mounting style.2. Rod end connection and method of guiding load.3. Bore required, stroke, length of rod extension

(dimension W - dimension V – see pages 20 and 30) if greater than standard.

4. Mounting position of cylinder. (Note if at an angle or vertical, and specify the direction of the piston rod.)

5. Operating pressure of cylinder, if limited to less than the standard pressure for the cylinder selected.

For accurate sizing, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur. When specifying a cylinder with a stop tube, please insert an S (Special) and the net stroke of the cylinder in the order code and state the length of the stop tube. Note that net stroke is equal to the gross stroke of the cylinder less the length of the stop tube. The gross stroke determines the envelope dimensions of the cylinder.

Piston Rod Sizes and Stop Tubes

Piston Rod Size SelectionThe selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditions requires the following steps to be carried out:

1. Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod end connection to be used. Consult the Stroke Factor table on page 40 and determine which factor corresponds to the application.

2. Using the appropriate stroke factor from page 40, determine the ‘basic length’ from the equation:

Basic Length = Net Stroke x Stroke Factor (The graph is prepared for standard rod extensions beyond

the face of the gland retainers. For rod extensions greater than standard, add the increases to the net stroke to arrive at the ‘basic length’.)

3. Calculate the load imposed for the thrust application by multiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the system pressure, or by referring to the Push and Pull Force charts on page 38.

4. Using the graph below, look along the values of ‘basic length’ and ‘thrust’ as found in 2 and 3 above, and note the point of intersection.

The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curved line labelled ‘Rod Diameter’ above the point of intersection.

Note: When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of suffi cient diameter to provide the necessary column strength.

Stop TubesStop tubes prevent the cylinder from completing its full stroke, to provide a separation between the piston and the rod bearing at full extension. The required length of stop tube, where necessary, is read from the vertical columns on the right of the

Piston Rod Selection Chart

Cushion sleeve Stop tube

Recommended length of Stop Tube (mm)

Fix

ed M

ount

ings

Piv

ot M

ount

ings

No

Sto

p Tu

be re

quire

d

Consult factoryThrust (kN) – log scale

Bas

ic L

eng

th (m

m) –

log

scal

e

Rod Diameter (mm)



Long Stroke CylindersWhen considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rod should be of suffi cient diameter to provide the necessary column strength.For tensile (pull) loads, rod strength is unaffected by stroke length.For long stroke cylinders under compressive loads, the use of stop tubes should be considered, to reduce bearing stress. The Piston Rod Selection Chart on page 39 provides guidance where unusually long strokes are required.

Stroke FactorsThe stroke factors which follow are used in the calculation of cylinder ‘basic length’ – see Piston Rod Size Selection, page 39.

inPHormFor more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinder bore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.

Stroke Factors

Rod End Connection Mounting Style Type of Mounting Stroke

Factor

Fixed and rigidly guided TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G 0.5

Pivoted and rigidly guided TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G 0.7

Fixed and rigidly guided TC, H, HB 1.0

Pivoted and rigidly guided D 1.0

Pivoted and rigidly guided TC, H, HB, DD 1.5

Supported but not rigidly guided

TB, TD, J, JB, C, F, G 2.0

Pivoted and rigidly guided BB, DB, BC 2.0

Supported but not rigidly guided TC, H, HB 4.0

Supported but not rigidly guided BB, DB, BC 4.0


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesCushioning

An Introduction to CushioningCushioning is recommended as a means of controlling the deceleration of masses, or for applications where piston speeds are in excess of 0.1m/s and the piston will make a full stroke. Cushioning extends cylinder life and reduces undesirable noise and pressure peaks.

Deceleration devices or built-in ‘cushions’ are optional and can be supplied at the head end, cap end, or at both ends of the cylinder without affecting its envelope or mounting dimensions.


Bore Ø

Rod No.

MM Rod

Diameter

25.4(1")

12

12.7 (1/2")15.9 (5/8")

38.1(11/2")

12

15.9 (5/8")25.4 (1")

50.8(2")

123

15.9 (5/8")34.9 (13/8")25.4 (1")

63.5(21/2")

1234

15.9 (5/8")44.5 (13/4")25.4 (1")34.9 (13/8")

82.6(31/4")

1234

25.4 (1")50.8 (2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")

101.6(4")

12345

25.4 (1")63.5 (21/2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")

127.0(5")

1234567

25.4 (1")88.9 (31/2")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")

152.4(6")

1234567

34.9 (13/8")101.6 (4")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")

Cushion Length

Head Cap

See Note 1

22.2 20.6

22.2 20.6

22.2 20.6

28.620.628.628.6

25.4

28.620.628.620.620.6

25.4

28.620.620.620.620.628.628.6

25.4

34.927.027.027.027.027.034.9

31.8

Piston & Rod at Zero Stroke

kg

Rod Only per 10mm

strokekg

0.180.23

0.010.02

0.380.65

0.020.04

0.581.340.85

0.020.070.04

0.912.431.181.68

0.020.120.040.07

1.743.712.263.04

0.040.160.070.12

2.426.362.933.724.39

0.040.250.070.120.16

4.1612.914.685.466.138.11

10.48

0.040.480.070.120.160.250.35

6.3818.567.197.889.9112.3514.86

0.070.630.120.160.250.350.48

Bore Ø

Rod No.

MM Rod

Diameter

203.2 (8")

123456780

34.9 (13/8")139.7 (51/2")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")

254.0 (10")

13456790

44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

304.8 (12")

1345689

50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

355.6 (14")

134578

63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

Cushion Length

Head Cap

27.023.827.027.027.027.034.934.923.8

31.8

44.133.333.333.333.333.330.130.1

44.5

33.133.333.333.333.330.130.1

44.5

46.046.046.046.042.942.9

50.8

Piston & Rod at Zero Stroke

kg

Rod Only per 10mm

strokekg

11.3439.7812.1512.8514.8817.3119.8323.5233.43

0.071.190.120.160.250.350.480.630.98

22.9723.8625.6128.1330.9534.7444.8751.35

0.120.160.250.350.480.630.981.19

40.3642.1144.6247.4451.2361.3667.85

0.160.250.350.480.630.981.19

65.9568.5971.0575.3385.9192.65

0.250.350.480.630.981.19

Bore sizes from 203.2mm to 355.6mm (8” to 14”)

1 Cushions are not available on 25.4mm (1”) bore size.

Bore Sizes from 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”)

Cushion Length & Piston and Rod MassWhere specifi ed, 2A cylinders incorporate the longest cushion sleeve and spear that can be accommodated within the standard envelope without reducing the rod bearing and piston bearing lengths. See table of cushion lengths below. Cushions are adjustable via recessed needle valves.

inPHormCushioning requirements can be calculated for individual cylinder/load combinations using the European cylinder inPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesPorts

1 Requires welded port bosses on both head and cap2 Requires welded port bosses on cap only


Standard PortsSeries 2A and 2AN cylinders are supplied as standard with R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1, spot faced for sealing washers. Smaller R2 size ports, where demanded by the application, are also available. Parker recommends R1 port sizes for their higher fl ow rate and piston speed capacity.

Metric threaded ports to DIN 3852 Pt.1, BSPT (taper thread) ports or NPTF ports in sizes as shown for BSPP ports, can be supplied if specifi ed.

Where required, oversize or additional ports can be supplied on the sides of heads and caps that are not occupied by cushion valves. Refer to the tables of port sizes opposite.

Oversize PortsFor higher speed applications, oversize ports can be supplied in all bore sizes. Ports one size larger than standard are the maximum that can be accommodated in most heads or caps within the standard envelope dimensions. Certain oversize metric, BSPT or NPTF ports require welded port bosses. The bosses protrude from the side of the cylinder. Port sizes are shown in the tables opposite.

Note that Y and P dimensions may vary slightly to accommodate oversize ports – please contact the factory where these dimensions are critical.

Manifold PortsManifold ports are available on all mounting styles to special order. Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface – see page 37.

Ports and Cushion Adjustment LocationThe table below shows standard positions for ports, and cushion adjusting screws where fi tted. However, by specifying the position numbers for the desired locations for head and cap ports, many mounting styles can be assembled with ports located at 90° or 180° from standard. In these cases, cushion needle and check valves are also repositioned, where fi tted, since their relation with the port position does not change.

Position of Ports and Cushion Screws in

Head and Cap

Head PortCushion

Cap PortCushion

Mounting Styles

TB, TC, TD, J, JB, H, HB, BB & BC C D DB DD G & F

12

23

34

41

12

13

31

13

24

31

42

13

24

31

42

12

24

41

12

23

34

41

12

13

24

31

42

13

31

13

24

31

42

12

24

41

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

254.0 (10")

304.8 (12")

355.6 (14")

Standard Port

Port Size (BSPP) Port Size MetricR1 R2

G1/4 G1/4 M14x1.5

G3/8 G1/4 M14x1.5

G3/8 G1/4 M14x1.5

G3/8 G1/4 M14x1.5

G1/2 G1/2 M22x1.5

G1/2 G1/2 M22x1.5

G1/2 G1/2 M22x1.5

G3/4 G3/4 M26x1.5

G3/4 G3/4 M26x1.5

G1 G1 M33x2

G1 G1 M33x2

G11/4 G11/4 M42x2

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

254.0 (10")

304.8 (12")

355.6 (14")

Oversize Port

Port Size (BSPP) Port SizeMetricR1 R2

G3/8 G3/8 M16x1.5

G1/2 1 G3/8 1 M16x1.5

G1/2 1 G3/8 1 M16x1.5

G1/2 2 G3/8 2 M16x1.5

G3/4 2 G3/4 2 M26x1.5 2

G3/4 2 G3/4 2 M26x1.5 2

G3/4 2 G3/4 2 M26x1.5 2

G1 2 G1 2 M33x2 2

G1 2 G1 2 M33x2 2

G11/4 2 G11/4 2 M42x2 2

G11/4 2 G11/4 2 M42x2 2

G11/2 2 G11/2 2 M48x2 2




Optional Features

Removable Trunnions

Removable trunnions are available when machine structures or confi ned space prohibit the use of separate pillow blocks situated close to the cylinder sides. Parker offers a removable trunnion design in 38.1mm to 203.2mm (11/2” to 8”) bore sizes. Mounting diameters and lengths are identical to those in mounting style D and DB for any given bore size. These removable trunnions can be provided on the cap end (see ‘Mounting Modifi cations’ in the order code, page 47) of Series 2A cylinders with any rod diameter. They can also be provided on the head end (see ‘Mounting Modifi cations’ in the order code, page 47) of cylinders with standard rods (rod no. 1).

Maximum pressure ratings of the removable trunnion mountings are shown in the table below.

Single-Acting CylindersStandard 2A series cylinders are of the double-acting type. They are also suitable for use as single-acting cylinders, where the load or other external force is used to return the piston after the pressure stroke.

Spring-Returned, Single-Acting CylindersSeries 2A single-acting cylinders can also be supplied with an internal spring to return the piston after the pressure stroke. Please supply details of load conditions and friction factors, and advise whether the spring is required to advance or return the piston rod.

On spring-returned cylinders, it is recommended that tie rod extensions be specifi ed on the cylinder end in which the spring is located to allow the spring to be ‘backed off’ until compression is relieved. Tie rod nuts should be welded to the tie rods at the opposite end of the cylinder, to further assure safe disassembly. Please consult the factory when ordering spring-returned cylinders.

Stroke LimiterWhere absolute precision in stroke length is required, a screwed adjustable stop can be supplied. Several types are available – the illustration shows a design suitable for infrequent adjustment at the uncushioned cap end of a cylinder. Please contact the factory, specifying details of the application and the adjustment required.

Multiple Stroke PositioningTo obtain linear force in one plane with controlled stopping at intermediate points, several designs are available. For three stopped positions, it is common practice to mount two standard single rod Style H cylinders back-to-back, or to use through-tie rods. By extending or retracting the stroke of each cylinder independently, it is possible to achieve three positions at the piston ends. An alternative technique is to use a tandem cylinder with an independent piston rod in the cap section. Please consult the factory for further details.

Rod End BellowsUnprotected piston rod surfaces which are exposed to contaminants with air hardening properties should be protected by rod end bellows. Longer rod extensions are required to accommodate the collapsed length of the bellows. Please consult the factory for further information.

Metallic Rod WipersMetallic rod wipers replace the standard wiper seal, and are recommended where dust, ice or splashings might damage the wiper seal material. Metallic rod wipers do not affect cylinder dimensions.

DC Proximity SensorsThese can be fi tted to give reliable end of stroke signals. Please consult the factory for further information.

Bore Ø

38.1 to 101.6 (11/2" to 4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

Bar psi

18 250

10 150

13 200

8.5 125

Bore Ø

38.1 (11/2")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

82.6 (31/4")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

152.4 (6")

203.2 (8")

J K min

L max

11 85 127.0

17 85 127.0

17 85 203.2

17 85 203.2

17 85 203.2

17 85 228.6

22 85 228.6

22 85 457.2

Seal

JWrenchSquare

42

17

40 43 41 14 45

44 Parker Hannifin Ltd.Cylinder DivisionEurope


70 Needle valve, cushion adjustment (bore sizes above 63.5mm)70a Needle valve assembly, cartridge type (bore sizes up to 63.5mm)71 Ball – cushion check valve72 Cushion check valve screw73 Floating cushion bush74 Retaining ring for cushion bush

1 Not illustrated2 See page 21 – double rod cylinders

Replacement Parts and Service

Service Assemblies and Seal KitsService Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for 2A cylinders simplify the ordering and maintenance processes. They contain sub-assemblies which are ready for installation, and are supplied with full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identification plate on the cylinder body, and supply the following information:

Serial Number - Bore - Stroke - Model Number - Fluid Type

Key to Part Numbers1 Head7 Cap14 Gland/bearing cartridge15 Cylinder body17 Piston (Lipseal)18 Cushion sleeve19 Tie rod23 Tie rod nut27 Retainer34 Piston rod – single rod, no cushion35 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at head end36 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at cap end37 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at both ends40 Wiperseal – for gland41 Lipseal – for gland42 Lipseal – for piston

43 Back-up washer for gland lipseal 4145 O-ring – gland/head47 O-ring – cylinder body55 Locking pin – piston/rod57 1 Piston rod – double (stronger 2) rod, no cushion58 1 Piston rod – double (stronger 2) rod, cushion one end60 1 Piston rod – double (weaker 2) rod, no cushion61 1 Piston rod – double (weaker 2) rod, cushion one end69 O-ring – needle valve and check valve screws 69a O-ring – cartridge-type needle valve Gland Cartridge and Seals

Lipseal Piston

Piston Rod Ø

12.7 (1/2")

15.9 (5/8")

25.4 (1")

34.9 (13/8")

44.5 (13/4")

50.8 (2")

63.5 (21/2")

76.2 (3")

88.9 (31/2")

101.6 (4")

127.0 (5")

139.7 (51/2")

Gland Cartridge Wrench

Spanner Wrench

69590 11676

69590 11676

69591 11676

69592 11703

69593 11677

69594 11677

69595 11677

69596 11677

69597 11677

69598 11677

69599 11678

69600 11678

2a_0910-uk.indd 44 24/11/2006 09:38:51


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesReplacement Parts and Service

Contents and Part Numbers of Seal Kits for Pistons and Glands (see key to part numbers opposite)

Gland Cartridge Service Kit Contains items 14, 40, 41, 43, 45.

Gland Service Kit Contains items 40, 41, 43, 45.

Piston Service Kit, Lipseal Piston Contains two each of items 42 and 47.

* Seal Groups – OrderingThe part numbers shown in the tables above are for Group 1 seals. For Group 5 seals, substitute a ‘5’ for the ‘1’ at the end of the number sequence. For example, a Group 5 RG gland cartridge kit for a 50.8mm bore cylinder will be RG2AHL205.

Service KitsGroup 1 Service Kits contain seals of Nitrile (Buna-N) elastomers.Group 5 Service Kits contain seals of fl uorocarbon elastomers.

For further information on seals please refer to page 5.

Tie Rod TorquesPlease refer to the table on page 37.

Contents and Part Numbers of Service Assembly Kits(see key to part numbers opposite)

Head AssemblyNon-cushioned: 1, 47Cushioned: 1, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 71, 72 Cap AssemblyNon-cushioned: 7, 47Cushioned: 7, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 73, 74

Cylinder BodyAll types: 15

Cushion Screw/Cartridge AssemblyScrew type: 69, 70Cartridge type: 69a, 70a

Check Valve Screw AssemblyScrew type: 69, 71, 72

Piston Rod AssembliesThese kits contain a fully assembled piston and rod assembly which is ready to install. They comprise a piston assembly, plus a rod assembly from the types listed below.

Piston AssembliesLipseal: 17, 42, 44

Rod AssembliesSingle rod, non-cushioned: 34Single rod, cushioned head: 35, 18Single rod, cushioned cap: 36Single rod, cushioned both ends: 37, 18

Double rod, non-cushioned: 57, 60,Double rod, cushioned stronger end: 58, 60, 18Double rod, cushioned weaker end: 58, 61, 18Double rod, cushioned both ends: 58, 61, 18 x 2

RepairsAlthough 2A cylinders are designed to make on-site maintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operations can only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy to fi t a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessary to return it to ‘as good as new’ condition. Should the condition of the returned cylinder be such that repair would be uneconomical, you will be notifi ed.

Non-Lubricated Service KitsService kits for 2AN Series non-lubricated air cylinders are shown on page 35.

Parker “Lube-A-Cyl” Air Cylinder Lubricant“Lube-A-Cyl” is intended as a supplement to normal lubrication methods, and is recommended for use during reassembly of air cylinders after servicing. It also helps to prevent damage to static and dynamic seals. This multi-purpose lubricant is available in 110g (4 oz) tubes, part no. 76163.

Bore Ø

25.4 (1")38.1 (11/2")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")82.6 (31/4")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")152.4 (6")203.2 (8")254.0 (10")304.8 (12")355.6 (14")

Piston Service Kit, Lipseal Piston *

PK1002A001PK1502A001PK2002A001PK2502A001PK3202A001PK4002A001PK5002A001PK6002A001PK8002A001PK9002A001PK9202A001PK9402A001

Piston RodØ

12.7 (1/2")15.9 (5/8")25.4 (1")34.9 (13/8")44.5 (13/4")50.8 (2")63.5 (21/2")76.2 (3")88.9 (31/2")101.6 (4")127.0 (5")139.7 (51/2")

Gland Cartridge Service Kit,

Standard Seals *

Gland Service Kit, Standard Seals *

RG2AHL051 RK2AHL051RG2AHL061 RK2AHL061RG2AHL101 RK2AHL101RG2AHL131 RK2AHL131RG2AHL171 RK2AHL171RG2AHL201 RK2AHL201RG2AHL251 RK2AHL251RG2AHL301 RK2AHL301RG2AHL351 RK2AHL351RG2AHL401 RK2AHL401RG2AHL501 RK2AHL501RG2AHL551 RK2AHL551




StorageWhen cylinders must be stored for a period of time, the following procedures are recommended:1. Store the cylinders in an indoor area which has a dry, clean

and non-corrosive atmosphere. Take care to protect the cylinder from both internal corrosion and external damage.

2. Whenever possible, cylinders should be stored in a vertical position (piston rod up). This will minimize corrosion due to possible condensation which could occur inside the cylinder, and seal set due to the weight of the piston and rod assembly.

3. Port protector plugs should be left in the cylinder until the time of installation.

4. For long duration storage add a vapour phase inhibitor to both sides of the piston to prevent internal corrosion.

Installation1. Cleanliness is an important consideration, and Parker

cylinders are shipped with the ports plugged to protect them from contaminants entering the ports. These plugs should not be removed until the piping is to be installed. Before making the connection to the cylinder ports, piping should be thoroughly cleaned to remove all chips or burrs which might have resulted from threading or fl aring operations.

2. Cylinders operating in an environment where air drying materials are present such as fast-drying chemicals, paint, or weld splatter, or other hazardous conditions such as excessive heat, should have shields installed to prevent damage to the piston rod and piston rod seals.

3. Correct alignment of the cylinder piston rod and its mating component on the machine should be checked in both the extended and retracted positions. Incorrect alignment will result in excessive rod gland and/or cylinder bore wear, shortening the life of the cylinder.

WarrantyDefective Work or Material Every effort is made to ensure sound material and good workmanship, but the Seller gives no warranty, expressed or implied, of material, workmanship, or fi tness of goods for any particular purpose, whether such purpose be known to the Seller or not. In the event of any material or workmanship proving defective the Seller is prepared to rectify or replace such material at the place of delivery and in the condition originally specifi ed, or if rectifi cation or replacement is not practicable, will credit the value of the goods at the invoice price, if required in writing to do so, provided always that the claim is made and admitted and the material is returned within six months from date of invoice. The Seller’s liability in respect of or consequent upon any such defect whether in original or replaced material or workmanship, is limited as aforesaid and does not extend in any circumstances to cover any other expenditure incurred nor any consequential damages or loss of profi t.

Masses – Series 2A CylindersTo determine the mass of the cylinder, fi rst select the basic mass for zero stroke from the table, then calculate the mass for the cylinder stroke and add the result to the basic mass.Masses for accessories are shown on pages 31 to 33.

Storage Information and Masses

BoreØ

Rod No.

25.4(1")

12

38.1(11/2")

12

50.8(2")

123

63.5(21/2")

1234

82.6(31/4")

1234

101.6(4")

12345

127.0(5")

1234567

152.4(6")

1234567

203.2 (8")

123456780

254.0 (10")

13456790

304.8 (12")

1345689

355.6 (14")

134578

Single Rod Cylinders Double Rod Cylinders Mass at Zero Stroke

Mass per

10mm Stroke

(kg)

Mass at Zero StrokeMass per

10mm Stroke

(kg)

Mounting Styes Mounting StylesTB, TC,

TD, J, JB, H, HB, F

(kg)

C, G, BB, BC, D, DB, DD

(kg)

TB, TD, J, JB, F

(kg)

C, G, D, DD (kg)

1.21.2

1.31.4

0.040.04

1.51.6

1.71.9

0.050.06

1.92.2

2.22.6

0.050.08

2.42.9

2.93.7

0.070.12

3.03.63.2

3.44.33.5

0.070.130.09

3.74.84.0

4.46.24.8

0.080.200.13

4.45.54.54.9

4.66.74.95.6

0.080.180.100.14

5.47.65.76.4

5.910.16.57.8

0.090.300.140.21

8.39.68.69.1

9.011.59.610.6

0.120.240.160.20

10.513.011.012.1

11.816.812.915.0

0.160.400.230.32

11.914.612.212.713.2

12.517.913.214.215.0

0.140.340.170.220.26

15.021.015.616.617.5

16.328.017.519.521.3

0.180.590.250.340.41

18.524.618.819.319.721.222.9

19.532.020.021.122.024.928.3

0.170.610.210.250.290.380.49

23362425262932

25502729313643

0.211.100.280.370.450.620.84

30.038.029.931.032.034.035.0

33483235384144

0.230.790.280.320.400.510.64

37543839424548

44734248546066

0.311.500.400.470.650.871.20

527252535456576067

579858596165687388

0.431.600.470.510.600.710.841.001.40

6410565666872758095

741567678839096107137

0.502.800.600.670.851.101.401.602.40

969798100102104112117

108109111114118123138148

0.570.610.690.800.931.101.501.70

112113115119122128142152

124125128133138147168183

0.700.760.941.201.401.702.402.80

146147149151154161166

161163166170176191200

0.680.760.871.001.201.501.70

168171174178183198208

183187191197205228242

0.831.001.301.501.802.502.90

228230231234242246

250253256262277286

0.870.981.101.301.601.80

266269272278292302

288292297306327342

1.201.401.601.902.603.00


Catalogue HY07-0910/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2A SeriesHow to Order

AccessoriesPlease state on order whether accessories are to be assembled to cylinder or supplied separately.

Mounting Style

Ports

Piston Type

S

Special Features

Piston Rod

Number

Piston Rod End

Piston Rod

Thread

Net Stroke (mm)

Operating Temperature

2A

SeriesPort

Positions

C

Cushion Head

Page 41

Bore

C

Cushion Cap

Page 41

Double Rod Cylinder – example

Key Required for basic cylinderIndicate optional features or leave blank

Mounting

Modifi cations

Code Ports Page R1 BSPP thread (R1 sizes) 42 R2 BSPP thread (R2 sizes) 42 G Metric 42 U NPTF (dry seal pipe thread) 42 B BSPT (taper thread) 42

Code Piston Page L Lipseal 5

Code Mounting Modifi cations Page P Thrust key (styles C, F, G) 36 M Manifold port O-ring seal (style C only) 37 R Removable trunnions 43

Code Mounting Style Page TB Tie Rods Extended Head End 8, 22 TC Tie Rods Extended Cap End 8, 22 TD Tie Rods Extended Both Ends 9, 23 J Head Rectangular Flange 10 JB Head Square Flange 10, 24 H Cap Rectangular Flange 12 HB Cap Square Flange 12, 24 C Side Lug Mounting 14, 26 F Side Tapped Mounting 14, 26 G Side End Lug 15, 27 BB Cap Fixed Clevis 16, 25 BC Cap Detachable Clevis 17 D Head Trunnion 18, 28 DB Cap Trunnion 18, 28 DD Intermediate Trunnion 19, 29

Code Rod Number Page eg : 1 Select from rod numbers 1-9, or 0 20, 30

Code Rod End Style Page 4 Style 4 20, 30 8 Style 8 20, 30 9 Style 9 20, 30 3 Style 3 (non standard) 20, 30

Code Rod Thread Page M Metric – standard 20, 30 A UNF – optional 20, 30

Code Port Position Page eg : 4 Head position 1-4 42 eg : 4 Cap position 1-4 42

Code Operating Page Temp. M Group 1 5 D Group 5 5

Code Special Features Page S Oversize ports 42 S Rod end bellows 43 S Stop tube 39 S Stroke limiter 43 S Tie rod supports 36 – or to customer specifi cation

38.1 C K J 2A R1 1 4 M 1 4 M C 127 D 11

K

Double Rod

Parker Hannifin is the world’s premier supplier of motion and control systems and solutions, with sales and manufacturing facilities throughout the world. For product information and details of your nearest Parker sales office, visit us at www.parker.com or call free on 00800 2727 5374.

Hydraulics GroupSales Offi ces

Austria Wiener NeustadtTel: +43 (0)2622 23501Fax: +43 (0)2622 66212

Austria Wiener Neustadt(Resp for East Europe)Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501-970Fax: +43 (0)2622 23501-977

Belgium NivellesTel: +32 (0)67 280 900Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999

Czech Republic KlecanyTel: +420 284 083 111Fax: +420 284 083 112

Denmark BallerupTel: +45 4356 0400Fax: +45 4373 3107

Finland VantaaTel: +358 20 753 2500Fax: +358 20 753 2200

France Contamine-sur-ArveTel: +33 (0)450 25 80 25Fax: +33 (0)450 25 24 25

GermanyKaarstTel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0Fax: +49 (0)2131 4016 9199

Ireland DublinTel: +353 (0)1 293 9999Fax: +353 (0)1 293 9900

Italy Corsico (MI)Tel: +39 02 45 19 21Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40

The Netherlands OldenzaalTel: +31 (0)541 585000Fax: +31 (0)541 585459

Norway SkiTel: +47 64 91 10 00Fax: +47 64 91 10 90

Poland WarsawTel: +48 (0)22 573 24 00Fax: +48 (0)22 573 24 03

Portugal Leca da PalmeiraTel: +351 22 9997 360Fax: +351 22 9961 527

Slovakia Ref. Czech Republic

Spain MadridTel: +34 91 675 73 00Fax: +34 91 675 77 11

Sweden SpångaTel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10

United Kingdom Warwick Tel: +44 (0)1926 317 878Fax: +44 (0)1926 317 855

InternationalEurope

Catalogue HY07-0910/UK10/06 PC

© Copyright 2006 Parker Hannifi n CorporationAll rights reserved

Australia Castle HillTel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777Fax: +61 (0)2-9842 5111

Canada Milton, OntarioTel: +1 905-693-3000Fax: +1 905-876-0788

China ShanghaiTel: +86 21 5031 2525Fax: +86 21 5834 3714

Asia Pacific GroupHong KongTel: +852 2428 8008Fax: +852 2425 6896

IndiaMumbaiTel: +91 22 5613 7081/82-85Fax: +91 22 2768 6841/6618

JapanTokyoTel: +(81) 3 6408 3900Fax: +(81) 3 5449 7201

Latin America GroupBrazilTel: +55 51 3470 9144Fax: +55 51 3470 9281

South Africa Kempton ParkTel: +27 (0)11-961 0700Fax: +27 (0)11-392 7213

USACleveland (industrial)Tel: +1 216-896-3000Fax: +1 216-896-4031Lincolnshire (mobile)Tel: +1 847-821-1500Fax: +1 847-821-7600

1 Cylinder DivisionEurope

Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders

3L Tie-RodCylinders



The standard range of Parker 3L cylinders comprises 15 mountingstyles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for theselection of the cylinders is given below, with dimensional informationabout each mounting style shown on pages 10 - 21 for 25.4mm to152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes, and pages 22 - 29 for 203.2mm (8”)bore sizes.

Application-specific mounting information is shown on pages 34 - 35.

Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy aparticular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist.Please contact the factory for details.

Most mounting styles areavailable as double rodcylinders



! "#$

1 All rod threads are UNF except 1” - 14 which is UNS.

! "#$


+0.00

-0.05

B

VA W

MMKKNA

DWrench Flats

B

VA W

MMCCNA

B

W

MMKKNA

V

A

DWrench Flats

DWrench Flats

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

retemaiD

4.52)"1(

1 7.21 (1/2 )"2 9.51 (5/8 )"

1.831( 1/2 )"

1 9.51 (5/8 )"2 4.52 )"1(

8.05)"2(

1 9.51 (5/8 )"2 9.43 1( 3/8 )"3 4.52 )"1(

5.362( 1/2 )"

1 4.52 )"1(2 5.44 1( 3/4 )"3 9.43 1( 3/8 )"7 9.51 (5/8 )"

6.283( 1/4 )"

1 4.52 )"1(2 8.05 )"2(3 9.43 1( 3/8 )"4 5.44 1( 3/4 )"

6.101)"4(

1 9.43 1( 3/8 )"2 5.36 2( 1/2 )"3 5.44 1( 3/4 )"4 8.05 )"2(7 4.52 )"1(

0.721)"5(

1 5.44 1( 3/4 )"2 9.88 3( 1/2 )"3 8.05 )"2(4 5.36 2( 1/2 )"5 2.67 )"3(7 4.52 )"1(8 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

4.251)"6(

1 5.44 1( 3/4 )"2 6.101 )"4(3 8.05 )"2(4 5.36 2( 1/2 )"5 2.67 )"3(6 9.88 3( 1/2 )"7 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

Piston Rod End Data for 203.2mm (8”) bore size cylinders is shownon page 46.

Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which thework piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the workpiece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If a rodend style is not specified, Style 4 will be supplied.

For applications where a female thread is required.

Non-standard piston rod ends are designated 'Style 3'.A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order.Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.

9&4elytS 8elytS

A B D AN V WKKcirteM

KKFNU 1

CCcirteM

CCFNU 1

52.1x8M 5/ 61 42- 5.1x01M 7/ 61 02- 9.51 73.52 01 1.11 4.6 9.515.1x01M 7/ 61 02- 5.1x21M 1/2 02- 0.91 55.82 31 3.41 4.6 9.515.1x01M 7/ 61 02- 5.1x21M 1/2 02- 0.91 55.82 31 3.41 4.6 9.515.1x02M 3/4 61- 5.1x22M 7/8 41- 6.82 70.83 22 6.22 7.21 4.525.1x01M 7/ 61 02- 5.1x21M 1/2 02- 0.91 55.82 31 3.41 4.6 9.515.1x62M 41-1 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 2.23 9.51 8.135.1x02M 3/4 61- 5.1x22M 7/8 41- 5.82 70.83 22 6.22 7.21 4.525.1x02M 3/4 61- 5.1x22M 7/8 41- 5.82 70.83 22 6.22 7.21 4.52

2x33M 11/4 21- 2x93M 11/2 21- 8.05 03.06 63 6.14 1.91 1.835.1x62M 41-1 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 2.23 9.51 8.135.1x01M 7/ 61 02- 5.1x21M 1/2 02- 0.91 55.82 31 3.41 4.6 9.515.1x02M 3/4 61- 5.1x22M 7/8 41- 5.82 70.83 22 6.22 4.6 1.91

2x93M 11/2 21- 2x54M 13/4 21- 1.75 56.66 14 0.84 7.21 9.435.1x62M 1 41- 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 2.23 5.9 4.52

2x33M 11/4 21- 2x93M 11/2 21- 8.05 03.06 63 6.14 7.21 8.135.1x62M 1 41- 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 2.23 5.9 4.52

2x84M 17/8 21- 2x65M 21/4 21- 2.67 53.97 55 3.06 9.51 3.142x33M 11/4 21- 2x93M 11/2 21- 8.05 03.06 63 6.14 7.21 8.132x93M 11/2 21- 2x54M 13/4 21- 1.75 56.66 14 0.84 7.21 9.435.1x02M 3/4 61- 5.1x22M 7/8 41- 5.82 70.83 22 6.22 4.6 1.91

2x33M 11/4 21- 2x93M 11/2 21- 8.05 03.06 63 6.14 7.21 8.132x46M 21/2 21- 2x67M 31/4 21- 9.88 29.701 57 7.58 9.51 3.142x93M 11/2 21- 2x54M 13/4 21- 1.75 56.66 14 0.84 7.21 9.432x84M 17/8 21- 2x65M 21/4 21- 2.67 53.97 55 3.06 9.51 3.142x85M 21/4 21- 2x86M 23/4 21- 9.88 22.59 56 0.37 9.51 3.145.1x02M 3/4 61- 5.1x22M 7/8 41- 5.82 70.83 22 6.22 4.6 1.915.1x62M 1 41- 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 2.23 5.9 4.52

2x33M 11/4 21- 2x93M 11/2 21- 8.05 03.06 63 6.14 5.9 6.822x67M 21-3 2x59M 33/4 21- 6.101 26.021 58 4.89 7.21 1.832x93M 11/2 21- 2x54M 13/4 21- 1.75 56.66 14 0.84 5.9 8.132x84M 17/8 21- 2x65M 21/4 21- 2.67 53.97 55 3.06 7.21 1.832x85M 21/4 21- 2x86M 23/4 21- 9.88 22.59 56 0.37 7.21 1.832x46M 21/2 21- 2x67M 31/4 21- 9.88 29.701 57 7.58 7.21 1.835.1x62M 1 41- 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 2.23 4.6 2.22


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders %&

When cylinders must be stored for a period of time, the followingprocedures are recommended:1. Store the cylinders in an indoor area which has a dry, clean and

non-corrosive atmosphere. Take care to protect the cylinder fromboth internal corrosion and external damage.

2. Whenever possible, cylinders should be stored in a verticalposition (piston rod up). This will minimize corrosion due topossible condensation which could occur inside the cylinder, andseal set due to the weight of the piston and rod assembly.

3. Port protector plugs should be left in the cylinder until the time ofinstallation.

4. For long duration storage add a vapour phase inhibitor to bothsides of the piston to prevent internal corrosion.

% 1. Cleanliness is an important consideration, and Parker cylinders

are shipped with the ports plugged to protect them fromcontaminants entering the ports. These plugs should not beremoved until the piping is to be installed. Before making theconnection to the cylinder ports, piping should be thoroughlycleaned to remove all chips or burrs which might have resultedfrom threading or flaring operations.

2. Cylinders operating in an environment where air drying materialsare present such as fast-drying chemicals, paint, or weldsplatter, or other hazardous conditions such as excessive heat,should have shields installed to prevent damage to the piston rodand piston rod seals.

3. Correct alignment of the cylinder piston rod and its matingcomponent on the machine should be checked in both theextended and retracted positions. Incorrect alignment will resultin excessive rod gland and/or cylinder bore wear, shortening thelife of the cylinder.

' Every effort is made to ensure soundmaterial and good workmanship, but the Seller gives no warranty,expressed or implied, of material, workmanship, or fitness of goodsfor any particular purpose, whether such purpose be known to theSeller or not. In the event of any material or workmanship provingdefective the Seller is prepared to rectify or replace such material atthe place of delivery and in the condition originally specified, or ifrectification or replacement is not practicable, will credit the value ofthe goods at the invoice price, if required in writing to do so,provided always that the claim is made and admitted and thematerial is returned within six months from date of invoice. TheSeller’s liability in respect of or consequent upon any such defectwhether in original or replaced material or workmanship, is limited asaforesaid and does not extend in any circumstances to cover anyother expenditure incurred nor any consequential damages or lossof profit.

To determine the mass of the cylinder, first select the basic mass forzero stroke, then calculate the mass for the cylinder stroke and addthe result to the basic mass.


Masses for accessories are shown on pages 31 to 33.

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

2.302)"8(

123456780

srednilyCdoRelgniS srednilyCdoRelbuoD

ekortSoreZtassaMssaM

repmm01ekorts)gk(

ekortSoreZtassaMssaM

repmm01ekorts)gk(

selytSgnitnuoM selytSgnitnuoM

,CT,BT,BJ,J,DT

F,BH,H)gk(

,G,C,D,CB,BB

DD,BD)gk(

,J,DT,BTF,BJ)gk(

,G,CDD,D)gk(

2.1 3.1 40.0 5.1 7.1 50.02.1 4.1 40.0 6.1 9.1 60.09.1 2.2 50.0 4.2 9.2 70.02.2 6.2 80.0 9.2 7.3 21.00.3 4.3 70.0 7.3 4.4 80.06.3 3.4 31.0 8.4 2.6 02.02.3 5.3 90.0 0.4 8.4 31.05.4 9.4 01.0 7.5 5.6 41.05.5 7.6 81.0 6.7 1.01 03.09.4 6.5 41.0 4.6 8.7 12.04.4 6.4 80.0 4.5 9.5 90.03.8 0.9 21.0 5.01 8.11 61.06.9 5.11 42.0 0.31 8.61 04.06.8 6.9 61.0 0.11 9.21 32.01.9 6.01 02.0 1.21 0.51 23.02.21 2.31 71.0 6.51 5.71 52.06.41 9.71 43.0 0.12 0.82 95.07.21 2.41 22.0 6.61 5.91 43.02.31 0.51 62.0 5.71 3.12 14.09.11 5.21 41.0 0.51 3.61 81.03.91 1.12 52.0 52 92 73.06.42 0.23 16.0 63 05 01.17.91 0.22 92.0 62 13 54.02.12 9.42 83.0 92 63 26.09.22 3.82 94.0 23 34 48.05.81 5.91 71.0 32 52 12.08.81 0.02 12.0 42 72 82.09.92 23 82.0 83 24 04.0

83 84 97.0 45 37 05.113 53 23.0 93 84 74.023 83 04.0 24 45 56.043 14 15.0 54 06 78.053 44 46.0 84 66 02.103 33 32.0 73 44 13.035 95 15.0 66 87 76.027 89 06.1 501 651 08.245 16 06.0 86 38 58.065 56 17.0 27 09 01.175 86 48.0 57 69 04.106 37 00.1 08 701 06.125 75 34.0 46 47 05.025 85 74.0 56 67 06.076 88 04.1 59 731 04.2


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders% (

Piston Rod End Data –

25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizes 3Storage Information and Cylinder Mass Data 4Warranty 4Introduction 5Standard Specifications 5Design Features and Benefits 6Cylinder Selection Check List 8Mounting Styles 9Double Rod Cylinders 30Accessories 31Mounting Information 34Push and Pull Forces 36Piston Rod Sizes and Stop Tubes 37Stroke Factors and Long Stroke Cylinders 38Cushioning 39Pressure Limitations 40Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds 41Seals and Fluids 42Optional Features 43Replacement Parts and Service 44Repairs 45Piston Rod End Data – 203.2mm (8”) bore sizes 46How to Order Cylinders 47

%) Accessories 31 - 33Air Bleeds 7, 41, 43Cushioning 39Cylinder Masses 4, 31 - 33Cylinder Selection Check List 8Design Features 6 - 7Double Rod Cylinders 30Forces – Push and Pull 36inPHorm 5Model Numbers 47Mounting Styles and Information 2, 9, 34 - 35Optional Features 43Ordering Instructions 47Piston Rod End Data 3, 46Piston Rod Size Selection 37Piston and Seal Types 7, 42Ports – Standard and Oversize 41Pressure Ratings and Limitations 40Repairs 45Replacement Parts and Service 44 - 45Seals and Fluids 42Speed Limitations 41Standard Specifications 5Stop Tubes 37Storage and Installation 4Stroke Adjusters 43Stroke Factors 38Stroke Tolerances 35Thrust Keys 34Warranty 4

% ( Parker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in the manufacture ofcomponents and systems for motion control. Parker has more than800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanicalapplications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets. Withmore than 45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plantsand administrative offices around the world, Parker providescustomers with technical excellence and first class customerservice. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largestsupplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications.

The 3L cylinders described in this catalogue are 70 bar mediumpressure cylinders, rated for use at working pressures up to 70 bardepending on the rod end and type of service.

In addition to the standard cylinders featured in this catalogue,3L cylinders can be designed to suit customer requirements.

Our engineers will be pleased to advise on unique designs to suitspecific applications.

*European Cylinder inPHorm is Parker Hannifin’s new productselection program that helps you to select the correct part for anapplication. The program prompts for the details of the application,makes the necessary design calculations, and selects a suitableproduct. inPHorm can generate CAD drawings of the selected part,which can be viewed in other software applications, and customisedand imported into other CAD packages. Please contact your localSales Office for further information and ask for HY07-1260/Eur.

+(&(

Medium-duty service – ANSI B93.15-1987 and NFPAspecifications

Standard construction – square end, 4 tie rod design

Standard pressure – to 70 bar (1000 psi) dependent onbore size

Standard fluid – hydraulic mineral oil

Standard temperature – -20°C to +80°C (-4°F to +176°F)

Bore sizes – 25.4mm (1”) to 203.2mm (8”)

Piston rod diameters – 12.7mm (1/2”) to 139.7mm (51/2”)

Mounting styles – 15 standard styles

Strokes – available in any practical stroke length

Cushions – optional at either end or both ends of stroke

Rod ends – three standard choices – specials to order

Tested in accordance with ISO 10100:2001


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders, -&

Gland seal life is maximised by manufacturing piston rods fromprecision ground, high tensile carbon alloy steel, hard chromeplated and polished to 0.2µm max. Piston rods are induction casehardened to Rockwell C54 minimum before chrome plating, resultingin a dent-resistant surface.

./0Continuous lubrication, and therefore longer gland life, are providedby the long bearing surface inboard of the lipseal. The gland,complete with rod seals, can easily be removed without dismantlingthe cylinder, so servicing is quicker – and thereforemore economical.

The serrated lipseal has a series of sealing edges which take oversuccessively as pressure increases, providing efficient sealingunder all operating conditions. On the return stroke the serrationsact as a check valve, allowing the oil adhering to the rod to passback into the cylinder.

service life of up to five times that of traditional seal materials.Standard seals are suitable for speeds of up to 0.5m/s – specialseal combinations including PTFE are available for higherspeed applications.

-Strict quality control standards and precision manufacture ensurethat all tubes meet rigid standards of straightness, roundness andsurface finish. The steel tubing is surface finished to minimise internalfriction and prolong seal life.

-To ensure that the cylinder body remains leak free, even underpressure shock conditions, Parker fits pressure-energisedbody seals.

! Wear-resistant cast iron piston rings are fitted as standard to 3Lcylinders. Lipseal pistons are available to suit different applications –see ‘Piston Seals’ opposite. All pistons are of one-piece type, andfeature wide bearing surfaces to resist side loading. Long threadengagement secures the piston to the piston rod and, for additionalsafety, the piston is secured by thread-locking adhesive and alocking pin.

1 2Deceleration of a load attached to the piston rod is achieved byusing ‘built-in’ cushions at either or both ends of the cylinder – seepage 39 for details. At the head end a cushion sleeve is fitted, whilethe polished cap end spear is an integral part of the piston rod.

3 , 2-245Closer tolerances – and therefore more effective cushioning – arepermitted by the use of a floating cushion sleeve at the head end ofthe cylinder, and a floating cushion bush at the cap end. A speciallydesigned cushion sleeve on bore sizes up to 101.6mm (4”) operatesas a check valve. On larger bore sizes a conventional ball checkvalve is used. The use of a check valve in the head and lifting of thebronze cushion bush in the cap, provides minimum fluid flowrestriction at the start of the return stroke. This allows full pressure tobe applied over the whole area of the piston, to provide full powerand fast cycle times.

The double lip wiperseal acts as a secondary seal, trapping excesslubricating film in the chamber between the wiper and lip seals. Itsouter lip prevents the ingress of dirt into the cylinder, extending thelife of gland and seals.

Standard lipseals are manufactured from an enhancedpolyurethane, giving efficient retention of pressurized fluid and a

7 & 84 79

86

523

1


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders, -&

A variety of piston seal options is available, to suit differentapplications. The seal option should be specified at the time of orderas a seal type cannot be changed unless the piston is alsochanged.

6 278 Needle valves are provided at both ends of the cylinder for precisecushion adjustment, and retained within the head and cap so thatthey cannot be inadvertently removed. The cartridge type needlevalve illustrated below is fitted to cylinders of up to 63.5mm (21/2”)bore – see page 41.

7-Available as an option at both ends, the air bleeds are recessed intothe head and cap and retained so that they cannot be inadvertentlyremoved – see pages 41 and 43.

+(Parker's design and engineering staff are available to producespecial designs to meet customer's specific requirements.Alternative sealing arrangements, special mounting styles, differentbores and rod sizes are just a few of the custom features which canbe supplied.

areextremely durable but allow someleakage across the piston andcannot therefore hold a load inposition. Piston rings are fitted asstandard on series 3L hydrauliccylinders.

can hold a load inposition, but they are not as durableas piston rings. Lipseal pistons areoptional on series 3L hydrauliccylinders.

0+To accommodate the many types of fluid and the varyingtemperature ranges used in industry, Parker offers a range of rodgland, piston and body seals moulded in different profiles and fromdifferent materials. These are described in detail on page 42.


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders(

2(. The following check list indicates the principal factors which shouldbe considered when selecting a hydraulic cylinder for a particularapplication. Further information is available on the pages shown. Ifmore detailed information is required about any aspect of acylinder’s specification, please contact our design engineers whowill be happy to assist.

! "– Weight to be moved and force required– Nominal operating pressure and range– Distance to be travelled– Average and maximum piston speed– Fluid medium and temperature

# $% !%Select the appropriate style for the specific application

&'(%! !%)*+Determine the bore and system pressure required to providethe necessary force

! !%*+*,*+*)Single or double rod?Determine the minimum rod diameter required to withstand buckling forcesIs a stop tube required?Select a suitable rod end and rod end threadCheck pressure rating of selected cylinder and piston rod

- ! !%,Does seal type suit application?

) & % !%Select cushioning requirements if applicable

, ! !%Select suitable portsAre they capable of the speed required?Are the standard positions acceptable?

!%,*#Select seals to suit the chosen fluid medium andtemperature range

&. !%/Are rod end and/or cap end accessories required?

+ (0 !%Air bleeds, rod end bellows etc.

*The European cylinder inPHorm program can assist with theselection and specification of an hydraulic cylinder for a particularapplication. Please ask for HY07-1260/Eur.



The standard range of Parker 3L cylinders comprises 15 mountingstyles, to suit the majority of applications. General guidance for theselection of cylinders is given below, with dimensional informationabout each mounting style shown on the pages indicated.Application-specific mounting information is shown on pages 34and 35.

Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy aparticular application, our design engineers will be happy to assist.Please contact the factory for details.

) 9Cylinders with TB, TC and TD mountings are suitable for straight lineforce transfer applications, and are particularly useful where spaceis limited. For compression (push) applications, cap end tie rodmountings are most appropriate; where the major load places thepiston rod in tension (pull applications), head end mounting stylesshould be specified. Cylinders with tie rods extended at both endsmay be attached to the machine member from either end, allowingthe free end of the cylinder to support a bracket or switch.

, Flange mounted cylinders are also suitable for use on straight lineforce transfer applications. Four flange mounting styles areavailable: head rectangular flange (J), head square flange (JB), caprectangular flange (H), and cap square flange (HB). Selection of thecorrect flange mounting style depends on whether the major forceapplied to the load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull)stresses on the piston rod.

, Foot mounted cylinders do not absorb force on their centreline. As aresult, the application of force by the cylinder produces a turningmoment which attempts to rotate the cylinder about its mountingbolts. It is important, therefore, that the cylinder should be firmlysecured to the mounting surface and that the load should beeffectively guided, to avoid side loads being applied to rod glandand piston bearings. A thrust key modification may be specified toprovide positive cylinder location – see page 34.

5 Cylinders with pivot mountings, which absorb forces on theircentrelines, should be used where the machine member to bemoved travels in a curved path. Pivot mountings may be used fortension (pull) or compression (push) applications. Two pivotmounting styles are available: cap fixed clevis (BB), and capdetachable clevis (BC). These styles may be used if the curvedpath of the piston rod travel is in a single plane, and perpendicular tothe cylinder pivot axis (one degree of freedom).

9 These cylinders are designed to absorb force on their centrelines.They are suitable for tension (pull) or compression (push)applications, and may be used where the machine member to bemoved travels in a curved path in a single plane. Trunnion mountedcylinders are available in head trunnion (D), cap trunnion (DB), andintermediate fixed trunnion (DD). Trunnion pins are designed forshear loads only and should be subjected to minimum bendingstresses.

&*0*1See pages 16-17, 26-27

2*2'*3*3'See pages 12-15, 24

4'*4&*45See pages 10-11, 22-23

''*'&See pages 18-19, 25

5*5'*55See pages 20-21, 28-29


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders9 #

4&Tie Rods Extended Cap End(NFPA Style MX2)

9-:949 See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

4'Tie Rods Extended Head End(NFPA Style MX3)

P + stroke

EE

FK

DD

AA

3

LB + stroke

GF JK

DD

BB

AA

1

3

2

ZB + stroke

J

1E

2 R

ZB + strokeZJ + stroke

P + stroke

EEY

E

RE 4

R

BB G

LB + stroke

E 4

R

Y

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

AA BB DD 2 E EE 6

)PPSB(F G H 5

9.83 1.91 42-01 1.83 5 G1/4 5.9 1.83 4.6

3.15 4.52 1/4 82- 8.05 5 G3/8 5.9 1.83-2.3

2.66 6.82 5/ 61 42- 5.36 5 G3/8 5.9 1.83-4.2

-

5.87 6.82 5/ 61 42- 2.67 5 G3/8 5.9 1.83

-4.2

--

1.99 9.43 3/8 42- 2.59 G1/2 9.51 5.44 -

4.911 9.43 3/8 42- 3.411 G1/2 9.51 5.44 -

2.741 0.64 1/2 02- 7.931 G1/2 9.51 5.44 -

4.571 0.64 1/2 02- 1.561 G3/4 1.91 8.05 -



45Tie Rods Extended Both Ends(NFPA Style MX1)

9-:949 Continued

61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 All tie rod threads (dimension DD) are UNF, with the exception of

25.4mm (1”) bore which is UNC.3 Mounting nuts should be tightened to the torque values shown for tie rod

nuts – see page 35.4 For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For

Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied.5 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and

rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”)bore cylinders only.

6 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders.For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.


See Notes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6F

DD DD

AA

1

4

3

2

ZB + strokeZJ + stroke

P + stroke

EE

Y

BB

G

LB + stroke

J BB

E

E

R

R

E

H

E

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

J K R YekortS+

BL P .xamBZ JZ

4.52 0.5 4.7294

4.89 453.911 3.411

94 3.911 3.411

4.52 4.6 3.6394

6.101 858.321 4.711

85 4.331 0.721

4.52 5.7 7.6494

6.101 858.521 3.811

56 7.141 2.43185 3.531 8.721

4.52 5.7 6.55

85

8.401 16

4.831 9.03117 2.151 3.74156 9.441 4.73194 0.921 5.121

8.13 0.01 1.07

85

8.321 07

9.251 9.24147 8.861 8.85156 3.951 3.84117 6.561 6.551

8.13 0.01 3.48

56

8.321 07

3.951 3.94118 1.571 1.56117 6.561 6.55147 8.861 8.85185 9.251 9.241

8.13 0.31 1.401

17

2.031 77

9.471 9.16118 0.481 0.17147 1.871 1.56118 5.481 5.17118 5.481 5.17185 2.261 2.94156 6.861 6.551

1.83 0.31 9.321

47

1.641 38

6.781 6.47148 2.791 2.48187 8.191 8.87148 2.791 2.48148 2.791 2.48148 2.791 2.48186 3.181 3.861


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders*, #

;4;- See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


2Head Rectangular Flange(NFPA Style MF1)

2'Head Square Flange(NFPA Style MF5) See Notes 1, 2, 3

KF

1

3

2

FB(x4)

KF

1

4

3

2


EE

Y

W

GLB + stroke

J

UFE

RE 4

TF

W

YZB + stroke

P + stroke

EE

GLB + stroke

J

UFE

UF R TF

TFR

E

FB(x8)

See Notes 1, 2, 3

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

E EE 3

)PPSB(F BF G H 2 J K

1.83 2 G1/4 5.9 4.6 1.83 4.6 4.52 0.5

8.05 2 G3/8 5.9 9.7 1.83-

4.52 4.62.3

5.36 2 G3/8 5.9 5.9 1.83-

4.52 5.74.2-

2.67 2 G3/8 5.9 5.9 1.83

-

4.52 5.74.2

--

2.59 G1/2 9.51 1.11 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

3.411 G1/2 9.51 1.11 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

7.931 G1/2 9.51 2.41 5.44 - 8.13 0.31

1.561 G3/4 1.91 2.41 8.05 - 1.83 0.31


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders*, #

61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and

rod sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) borecylinders only.


;4;-Continued


E

H

E

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

R FT FU W YekortS+

BL P .xamBZ

4.72 8.05 5.369.51 94

4.89 453.911

9.51 94 3.911

3.63 8.96 7.589.51 94

6.101 858.321

4.52 85 4.331

7.64 7.58 7.4019.51 94

6.101 858.521

8.13 56 7.1414.52 85 3.531

6.55 4.89 4.711

4.52 85

8.401 16

4.8311.83 17 2.1518.13 56 9.4419.51 94 0.921

1.07 0.911 7.931

1.91 85

8.321 07

9.2519.43 47 8.8614.52 56 3.9518.13 17 6.561

3.48 1.831 7.851

4.52 56

8.321 07

3.9513.14 18 1.5718.13 17 6.5619.43 47 8.8611.91 85 9.251

1.401 2.861 7.391

8.13 17

2.031 77

9.4713.14 18 0.4819.43 47 1.8713.14 18 5.4813.14 18 5.4811.91 85 2.2614.52 56 6.861

9.321 7.391 1.912

6.82 47

1.641 38

6.7811.83 48 2.7918.13 87 8.1911.83 48 2.7911.83 48 2.7911.83 48 2.7912.22 86 3.181


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders+, #

*4*- See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34

3Cap Rectangular Flange(NFPA Style MF2)


3'Cap Square Flange(NFPA Style MF6)

See Notes 1, 2, 3

See Notes 1,2, 3

FF

1

3

4

FB(x4)

LB + strokeF

F

J

XF + stroke

R

3

4

FB(x8)

TF

K

TFR

2

UFE

RE 2

TF


EEY

K

GLB + stroke

XF + stroke

J

UFE1

E

UF

YZF + stroke

P + strokeEE

G

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

E EE 3

)PPSB(F BF G H 2 J K

1.83 2 G1/4 5.9 4.6 1.83 4.6 4.52 0.5

8.05 2 G3/8 5.9 9.7 1.83-

4.52 4.62.3

5.36 2 G3/8 5.9 5.9 1.83-

4.52 5.74.2-

2.67 2 G3/8 5.9 5.9 1.83

-

4.52 5.74.2

--

2.59 G1/2 9.51 1.11 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

3.411 G1/2 9.51 1.11 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

7.931 G1/2 9.51 2.41 5.44 - 8.13 0.31

1.561 G3/4 1.91 2.41 8.05 - 1.83 0.31


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders+, #

*4*- Continued


61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and



E

H

E

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

R FT FU YekortS+

BL P FX FZ

4.72 8.05 5.3694

4.89 453.411 8.321

94 3.411 8.321

3.63 8.96 7.5894

6.101 855.711 0.721

85 0.721 5.631

7.64 7.58 7.40194

6.101 855.711 0.721

56 4.331 9.24185 0.721 5.631

6.55 4.89 4.711

85

8.401 16

2.031 7.93117 9.241 4.25156 5.631 1.64194 7.021 2.031

1.07 0.911 7.931

85

8.321 07

9.241 8.85147 8.851 6.47156 2.941 1.56117 6.551 5.171

3.48 1.831 7.851

56

8.321 07

2.941 1.56118 1.561 0.18117 6.551 5.17147 8.851 6.47185 9.241 8.851

1.401 2.861 7.391

17

2.031 77

9.161 8.77118 5.171 3.78147 1.561 0.18118 5.171 3.78118 5.171 3.78185 2.941 1.56156 6.551 5.171

9.321 7.391 1.912

47

1.641 38

6.471 7.39148 2.481 2.30287 8.771 9.69148 2.481 2.30248 2.481 2.30248 2.481 2.30286 3.861 3.781


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders, #

:,40 See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


&Side Lug Mounting(NFPA Style MS2)

0Side Tapped Mounting(NFPA Style MS4)

See Notes 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8

See Notes 1, 2, 3, 7, 8

F KSW

E

E

1

4

3

TS

-0.15-0.20

SW

SB(x4)

US

2

E/2

F K

1

3

-0.15-0.20E/2

NT thread, ND deep(4 mounting holes)


LB + strokeEE

Y

XS

GSS + stroke

J


LB + stroke

EE

Y

G

SN + stroke

J

XT TN

2E 4

E

ST

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

E BE EE 8

)PPSB(LE OE SE TE F G H 7 J K DN TN 3 R BS 4

1.83 7 - G1/4 - - - - 5.9 1.83 4.6 4.52 0.54.6

5M - 6.64.6

8.05 7 0.9 G3/8 1.91 4.6 41 3.41 5.9 1.83-

4.52 4.65.9

6M 3.63 0.112.3 8.4

5.36 7 5.9 G3/8 8.32 9.7 61 1.91 5.9 1.83-

4.52 5.75.9

8M 7.64 0.114.2 5.9- 5.9

2.67 7 5.9 G3/8 0.72 9.7 02 2.22 5.9 1.83

-

4.52 5.7

7.21

01M 6.55 0.114.2 1.11

- 7.21- 7.21

2.59 1.11 G1/2 2.22 5.9 52 4.52 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

1.91

21M 1.07 0.417.211.911.91

3.411 1.11 G1/2 4.52 5.9 23 8.13 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

1.91

21M 3.48 0.419.511.911.911.91

7.931 2.41 G1/2 0.72 7.21 53 1.83 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.31

8.32

61M 1.401 0.22

1.918.328.328.328.328.32

1.561 2.41 G3/4 4.52 7.21 54 3.14 1.91 8.05 - 1.83 0.31

6.82

02M 9.321 0.22

2.226.826.826.826.826.82


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders, #

:,40 Continued


61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 Consider the use of a thrust key with this mounting – see page 34.3 Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series).4 Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws.5 Not available in 25.4mm (1”) bore sizes.6 Style C cylinders can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for

mounting and sealing to a manifold surface – see page 35.7 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and



E

H

E

See Notes 1, 2, 5, 7, 8

F

EO

1

4

3

EOEB(x4)

2

0.2 - 0.4

ZE + strokeXE + stroke

P + strokeLB + stroke

EEY

EL

G

SE + stroke

J

EL

K

E

E

R

ES ES

ET

-0.15-0.20E/2

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

TS WS NT ST SU SX TX YekortS+

BL P ES NS SS EX .xamBZ EZ

9.7 9.7 5.31 0.45 9.963.33 2.94 94

4.89 45 - 0.45 0.37- 3.911 -

3.33 2.94 94 - 3.911 -

7.21 5.9 5.51 0.07 9.889.43 2.94 94

6.101 85 7.931 2.75 0.375.631 8.321 9.241

5.44 7.85 85 1.641 4.331 4.251

7.21 5.9 0.22 6.28 6.1019.43 2.94 94

6.101 85 2.941 2.75 0.373.141 8.521 2.941

8.05 1.56 56 2.751 7.141 1.5615.44 7.85 85 8.051 3.531 8.851

7.21 5.9 0.13 3.59 3.411

5.44 7.85 85

8.401 16 8.851 3.06 2.67

2.751 4.831 1.5612.75 4.17 17 0.071 2.151 8.7718.05 1.56 56 5.361 9.441 5.1719.43 2.94 94 6.741 0.921 6.551

1.91 7.21 0.83 7.021 1.641

6.74 9.16 85

8.321 07 3.861 7.66 6.28

1.561 9.251 6.4715.36 8.77 47 0.181 8.861 5.0910.45 3.86 56 5.171 3.951 0.1813.06 6.47 17 8.771 6.561 3.781

1.91 7.21 0.25 7.931 1.561

0.45 3.86 56

8.321 07 6.471 7.66 6.28

6.471 3.951 2.4818.96 1.48 18 5.091 1.571 0.0023.06 6.47 17 0.181 6.561 5.0915.36 8.77 47 2.481 8.861 7.3916.74 9.16 85 3.861 9.251 8.771

4.52 5.71 0.66 6.471 5.902

1.56 6.47 17

2.031 77 2.481 0.37 4.97

9.881 9.471 6.1026.47 1.48 18 4.891 0.481 1.1123.86 8.77 47 1.291 1.871 8.4026.47 1.48 18 4.891 5.481 1.1126.47 1.48 18 4.891 5.481 1.1124.25 9.16 85 2.671 2.261 9.8817.85 3.86 56 6.281 6.861 3.591

4.52 5.71 0.08 0.002 0.532

1.56 8.77 47

1.641 38 9.691 4.97 1.29

0.002 6.781 7.2126.47 3.78 48 6.902 2.791 3.2223.86 0.18 87 2.302 8.191 9.5126.47 3.78 48 6.902 2.791 3.2226.47 3.78 48 6.902 2.791 3.2226.47 3.78 48 6.902 2.791 3.2226.85 4.17 86 7.391 3.181 4.602

1Side End Lug(NFPA Style MS7)



'&Cap Detachable Clevis(NFPA Style MP2)

--4- See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


+0.00

-0.05

''7 -#8Cap Fixed Clevis(NFPA Style MP1)

CD

FCWCW

2

3

4

K

F

CD

F

LR

1

2

3

4

MR

E

YZC + strokeP + stroke

EE

JG

XC + stroke

E

E

CBCWCW G

XD + stroke

Y

K EE

P + stroke

LB + stroke

ZD + stroke

JL

CB

1E

MR

LR

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

BC DC WC E EE 6

)PPSB(WE F G H 5 J K

- 02.11 - 1.83 5 G1/4 1.11 5.9 1.83 4.6 4.52 0.5

9.91 37.21 7.21 8.05 5 G3/8 - 5.9 1.83-

4.52 4.62.3

9.91 37.21 7.21 5.36 5 G3/8 - 5.9 1.83-

4.52 5.74.2-

9.91 37.21 7.21 2.67 5 G3/8 - 5.9 1.83

-

4.52 5.74.2

--

6.23 80.91 8.51 2.59 G1/2 - 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

6.23 80.91 8.51 3.411 G1/2 - 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.01

6.23 80.91 8.51 7.931 G1/2 - 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.31

9.83 34.52 1.91 1.561 G3/4 - 1.91 8.05 - 1.83 0.31


See Notes 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6

L



--4- Continued


E

H

E

''79Cap Fixed Clevis(NFPA Style MP1)

61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 Supplied complete with pivot pin. Dimension CD is the pivot pin diameter

except for 25.4mm (1”) bore.3 On 25.4mm (1”) bore size styles BB and BC a single eye clevis mounting lug

11.1mm thick is fitted. Dimension CD is the crosshole diameter – the pivotpin is not included.

4 Cylinders with long strokes being used in thrust (push) applications arelimited by piston rod column strength. See piston selection chart on page 37.

5 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore androd sizes shown in the table below and to the cap end of 38.1mm (11/2”) borecylinders only.


CD

F

2

3

4

K

E

YZC + strokeP + stroke

EE

JG

XC + stroke

L

1E

MR

LR

EW

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

L RL RM YekortS+

BL P CX DX CZ DZ

7.21 7.21 7.2194

4.89 450.721 5.631 1.831 6.741

94 0.721 5.631 1.831 6.741

1.91 3.41 9.5194

6.101 855.631 1.641 2.941 8.851

85 1.641 6.551 8.851 3.861

1.91 3.41 9.5194

6.101 855.631 1.641 2.941 8.851

56 4.251 9.161 1.561 6.47185 1.641 6.551 7.851 3.861

1.91 3.41 9.51

85

8.401 16

2.941 8.851 9.161 5.17117 9.161 5.171 6.471 2.48156 6.551 1.561 2.861 8.77194 7.931 2.941 4.251 9.161

8.13 4.52 8.32

85

8.321 07

6.471 5.091 7.391 6.90247 5.091 4.602 6.902 4.52256 0.181 9.691 0.002 9.51217 3.781 2.302 4.602 3.222

8.13 4.52 8.32

56

8.321 07

0.181 9.691 0.002 9.51218 9.691 7.212 9.512 8.13217 3.781 2.302 4.602 3.22247 5.091 4.602 6.902 4.52285 6.471 5.091 7.391 6.902

8.13 4.52 8.32

17

2.031 77

7.391 6.902 7.212 6.82218 2.302 1.912 3.222 1.83247 9.691 7.212 9.512 8.13218 2.302 1.912 3.222 2.83218 2.302 1.912 3.222 2.83285 0.181 9.691 6.002 9.51256 3.781 2.302 4.602 3.222

1.83 8.13 2.03

47

1.641 38

7.212 8.132 2.832 4.75248 3.222 3.142 7.742 7.66287 9.512 0.532 3.142 4.06248 3.222 3.142 7.742 7.66248 3.222 3.142 7.742 7.66248 3.222 3.142 7.742 7.66286 4.602 4.522 8.132 8.052

See Notes 3, 6



5Head Trunnion(NFPA Style MT1)

:-4 See also Dimensions, page 3 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


+0.00

-0.03

5'Cap Trunnion(NFPA Style MT2)

KF

1

R3.2

2

KF

1

R3.2

TD2

TL


LB + strokeEE

Y

G

XG

J

UT

E 4

TL E3

TL


LB + strokeEE

Y

G

XJ + stroke

J E3

TL

UT

E 4

See Notes 2, 5, 6

See Notes 2, 5, 6

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

DB E EE 6

)PPSB(F G H 5 J K DT LT MT

- 1.83 5 G1/4 5.9 1.83 4.6 4.52 0.5 50.91 1.91 -

7.13 8.05 5 G3/8 5.9 1.83-

4.52 4.6 04.52 4.52 5.362.3

1.83 5.36 5 G3/8 5.9 1.83-

4.52 5.7 04.52 4.52 2.674.2-

1.83 2.67 5 G3/8 5.9 1.83

-

4.52 5.7 04.52 4.52 9.884.2

--

8.05 2.59 G1/2 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.01 04.52 4.52 3.411

8.05 3.411 G1/2 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.01 04.52 4.52 4.331

8.05 7.931 G1/2 9.51 5.44 - 8.13 0.31 04.52 4.52 8.851

5.36 1.561 G3/4 1.91 8.05 - 1.83 0.31 29.43 9.43 7.391

TD



55Intermediate Fixed Trunnion(NFPA Style MT4)

61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 Trunnions are nitro-carburised or chrome plated for improved corrosion

resistance.3 XI dimension to be specified by customer, note minimum dimension.4 Not available in 25.4mm (1”) bore size.5 The extra height ‘H’ of the port face applies to the head end of the bore and



:-4 Continued


E

H

E

KF

1

4

R3.2

2

See Notes 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6

Y

BDEE

LB + strokeP + stroke

ZB + stroke

G

XI

J

UV

E

TD

EUM

TM

3

TLTL

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

12

1.831( 1/2 )"

12

8.05)"2(

123

5.362( 1/2 )"

1237

6.283( 1/4 )"

1234

6.101)"4(

12347

0.721)"5(

1234578

4.251)"6(

1234567

MU TU VU GX.niM 3

IXY

DDelytSekortS.niM

ekortS+

BL P JX .xamBZ

- 2.67 -5.44 - 94

- 4.89 456.101 3.911

5.44 - 94 6.101 3.911

3.411 6.101 5.365.44 08 94

2.3 6.101 857.401 8.321

0.45 98 85 3.411 4.331

0.721 3.411 2.675.44 38 94

0.01 6.101 857.401 8.521

3.06 99 56 7.021 7.1410.45 39 85 3.411 3.531

7.931 0.721 9.88

0.45 39 85

4.6 8.401 16

4.711 4.8317.66 501 17 2.031 2.1513.06 99 56 8.321 9.4415.44 38 94 0.801 0.921

1.561 1.641 0.801

2.75 501 85

0.02 8.321 07

0.721 9.2510.37 121 47 9.241 8.8615.36 211 56 4.331 3.9518.96 811 17 7.931 6.561

2.481 1.561 0.721

5.36 211 56

0.02 8.321 07

4.331 3.9514.97 721 18 2.941 1.5718.96 811 17 7.931 6.5610.37 121 47 9.241 8.8612.75 501 85 0.721 9.251

6.902 5.091 4.251

8.96 811 17

0.31 2.031 77

1.641 9.4714.97 721 18 6.551 0.4810.37 121 47 2.941 1.8714.97 721 18 6.551 5.4814.97 721 18 6.551 5.4812.75 501 85 4.331 2.2615.36 211 56 7.931 6.861

6.362 0.532 8.771

0.37 131 47

0.62 1.641 38

6.551 6.7816.28 041 48 1.561 2.7912.67 431 87 8.851 8.1916.28 041 48 1.561 2.7916.28 041 48 1.561 2.7916.28 041 48 1.561 2.7917.66 421 86 2.941 3.181


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders9 <3="#

9-:949 See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34

See Notes 1, 2, 3

See Notes 1, 2, 3

4'Tie Rods Extended Head End(NFPA Style MX3)

4&Tie Rods Extended Cap End(NFPA Style MX2)

E

KF

1

4

3

E

R

JG

LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

2

P + stroke

EEY

WF

DD

BB

AA

E

K

F

1

4

3

E

R

R

JG

LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

2

P + stroke

EE

Y

WF

DDBB

AA

ZJ + stroke

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

AA BB DD( FNU )

E EE 3

)PPSB(F G J K

1.132 7.85 5/8 81- 9.512 G3/4 1.91 8.05 1.83 61


TT

TT

R


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders9 <3="#

61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 For Styles TB and TC an additional set of mounting nuts are supplied. For Style TD, two additional sets of mounting nuts are supplied.3 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.

9-:949 Continued

See Notes 1, 2, 3

45Tie Rods Extended Both Ends(NFPA Style MX1)

E

F

1

4

3

E

R

R

JG

LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

2

P + strokeEE

Y

WF

DDBB

AA

BBDD

ZJ + stroke

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

R TT FW YekortS+

BL P .xamBZ JZ

6.361

6.101 8.05 87

2.941 68

0.791 0.181

8.771 2.75 48 3.302 3.781

6.101 2.75 48 3.302 3.781

7.931 2.75 48 3.302 3.781

7.931 2.75 48 3.302 3.781

7.931 2.75 48 3.302 3.781

6.101 3.14 86 4.781 5.171

6.101 6.74 47 8.391 8.771

8.771 2.75 48 3.302 3.781


TT



TE

*+,5

;-:*-4-- See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


See Notes 1, 3

See Notes 1, 3

+0.00

-0.05

2'Head Square(NFPA Style ME3)

3'Cap Square(NFPA Style ME4)

K

1

4

3EB(x4)

KF

4

3

2

E

TE

ZB + strokeP + strokeY

J

LB + stroke

1WF

ZJ + strokeP + stroke

LB + stroke

EEY

G J

G

EE

E

E

XK + strokeTE

TE

E

2

F

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

BC DC WC E BE EE 3

)PPSB(F G J K L RL

7.93 34.52 1.91 9.512 81 G3/4 1.91 8.05 1.83 61 1.83 8.13

TT EB(x4)


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders*+,5

;-:*-4-- Continued


61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 Supplied complete with pivot pin.3 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.

''Cap Fixed Clevis(NFPA Style MP1) See Notes 1, 2, 3

42 E

LR

E

G

XC + stroke

P + strokeY

EE

ZC + stroke

JF

CD1

MR

LB + strokeCBCW CW

LK

3

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

RM ET TT FW YekortS+

BL P CX KX .xamBZ CZ JZ

2.03 3.291

6.101 8.05 87

2.941 0.68

1.912 9.241 0.791 5.442 0.181

8.771 2.75 48 4.522 2.941 3.302 8.052 3.781

6.101 2.75 48 4.522 2.941 3.302 8.052 3.781

7.931 2.75 48 4.522 2.941 3.302 8.052 3.781

7.931 2.75 48 4.522 2.941 3.302 8.052 3.781

7.931 2.75 48 4.522 2.941 3.302 8.052 3.781

6.101 3.14 86 5.902 4.331 4.781 0.532 5.171

6.101 6.74 47 9.512 7.931 8.391 3.142 8.771

8.771 2.75 48 4.522 2.941 3.302 8.052 3.781


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders, <#

:,40 See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34


See Notes 1, 5, 6


&Side Lug Mounting(NFPA Style MS2)

0Side Tapped Mounting(NFPA Style MS4)

KF G J

LB + stroke

SS + stroke

EE

4

3

2

US

4

3

2

NT thread, ND deep4 tapped mounting holes

E

TN

E

1

YZB + stroke

P + stroke

G

LB + stroke

SN + stroke

P + strokeY

EE

ZB + stroke

KJF

SB(x4)

XT

ST

SW

E

TS

-0.15-0.20E/2

XS

1

-0.15-0.20E/2

E

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

E BE EE 6

)PPSB(LE OE SE TE F G J K DN TN 5 R BS TS

9.512 81 G3/4 6.82 9.51 2.75 8.05 1.91 8.05 1.83 61 6.82 02M 6.361 22 4.52

TT

TT


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders, <#

:,40 Continued


61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 Upper surfaces of lugs are machined for socket head screws.3 For mounting style G, rod diameters greater than 63.5mm (21/2”), i.e. rod numbers 2, 4, 5, 6 and 0, are not available.4 Style C cylinders can be supplied with the cylinder ports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface – see page 35.5 Tapped mounting holes are metric (coarse pitch series).6 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.

See Notes 1, 3, 6

1Side End Lug(NFPA Style MS7)

EL ESEO ES

3

2

ET

E

REB(x4)

1

0.4 minKG J

XE + strokeP + strokeY

EE

LB + stroke

4E

F

ZE + stroke

SE + stroke

EL EO

-0.15-0.20E/2

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

WS NT ST TT SU SX TX YekortS+

BL P ES NS SS EX BZ .xam EZ

5.71 3.411 8.052

6.101

8.582

3.86 0.18 87

2.941 68 3.781 6.28 3.59

6.902 0.791 4.522

8.771 6.47 3.78 48 - 3.302 -

6.101 6.47 3.78 48 9.512 3.302 8.132

7.931 6.47 3.78 48 - 3.302 -

7.931 6.47 3.78 48 - 3.302 -

7.931 6.47 3.78 48 - 3.302 -

6.101 7.85 4.17 86 0.002 4.781 9.512

6.101 1.56 8.77 47 4.602 8.391 3.222

8.771 6.47 3.78 48 - 3.302 -

TT



:-:4 See also Dimensions, page 46 & Mounting Information, pages 9 & 34+0.00

-0.03


See Notes 1, 2, 4

See Notes 1, 2, 4

5Head Trunnion(NFPA Style MT1)

5'Cap Trunnion(NFPA Style MT2)

E

KF

4

3

2 TM

E

KF

1

4

3

UT

TD

JG

LB + stroke

ZB + stroke

2

ZB + strokeP + strokeY

J

LB + stroke

G

P + strokeEE

Y

TL TLXG

EE

E

R3.2

XJ + stroke

1

UT

R3.2

TL TL

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

DB E EE 4

)PPSB(F G J K DT LT MT TT

5.36 9.512 G3/4 1.91 8.05 1.83 61 39.43 9.43 7.742

6.101

8.771

6.101

7.931

7.931

7.931

6.101

6.101

8.771

T T

TTE



61 All cylinders are subject to maximum pressure ratings – see page 40.2 Trunnions are nitro-carburised or chrome plated for improved corrosion resistance.3 XI dimension to be specified by customer, note minimum dimension.4 R1 size BSPP ports to ISO 228/1 are supplied as standard on 3L cylinders. For smaller R2 size ports, see page 41.

:-:4 Continued


55Intermediate Fixed Trunnion(NFPA Style MT4)

K

1

2

3

BDUM


LB + stroke

EEY

G J

E

XI E

4

F

TD

R3.2

TL TLTM

UV


MU TU VU GX IX.niM 3 YDDelytSekorts.nim

ekortS+

BL P JX .xamBZ

5.713 7.582 3.142

2.67 4.331 87

2.22 2.941 68

9.161 0.791

6.28 7.931 48 3.861 3.302

6.28 7.931 48 3.861 3.302

6.28 7.931 48 3.861 3.302

6.28 7.931 48 3.861 3.302

6.28 7.931 48 3.861 3.302

7.66 8.321 86 4.251 4.781

0.37 2.031 47 8.851 8.391

6.28 7.931 48 3.861 3.302

eroBØ

doR.oN

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

TT


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders#

5&#--#'

Double rod cylinders are denoted by a 'K' in the model code, shownon page 47.

To obtain dimensional information for double rod cylinders, firstselect the desired mounting style by referring to thecorresponding single rod models shown on the preceding pages.Dimensions for the appropriate single rod model should besupplemented by those from the table opposite to provide a full setof dimensions.

2Double rod cylinders employ two separate piston rods, with onescrewed into the end of the other within the piston rod assembly. Asa result, one piston rod is stronger than the other. The stronger rodis identified by the letter 'K' stamped on its end, and its pressurelimitations with a 4:1 design factor are identical to those shown in thetable on page 40 for the equivalent single rod assembly. The weakerrod should always be used for the lighter duty. Pressure limitationsfor the weaker rod in pull applications at a 4:1 design factor are alsoidentical to those on page 40.

&Double rod cylinders with stronger and weaker rods of differing rodsizes are also available. Please contact the factory for details.

2Double rod cylinders can be supplied with cushions at either or bothends. Cushioning requirements should be specified by inserting a'C' in the ordering code – see page 47. Double rod cylinders thatrequire cushioning are supplied with floating cushion sleeves asstandard.

6If a stroke of less than 25mm on bore sizes up to 82.6mm(31/4”), or a stroke of less than 100mm on bore sizes of 101.6mm(4”) and over, is required, where Style 9 rod ends are required atboth ends, please consult the factory.

5&#+#'


Available with Styles TB, TD,J, JB, C, F, G, D and DD

Available with Styles TB,TD, JB, C, F, G, D, and DD

FK

ZM + (2 x stroke)


Y

EE

G G

SSK + stroke

ZL + stroke

XSF

MM

K

ZM + (2 x stroke)


Y

EE

G GSSK + stroke

MM

F F

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

retemaiD

4.52)"1(

1 7.21 (1/2 )"2 9.51 (5/8 )"

1.831( 1/2 )"

1 9.51 (5/8 )"2 4.52 )"1(

8.05)"2(

1 9.51 (5/8 )"2 9.43 1( 3/8 )"3 4.52 )"1(

5.362( 1/2 )"

1 4.52 )"1(2 5.44 1( 3/4 )"3 9.43 1( 3/8 )"7 9.51 (5/8 )"

6.283( 1/4 )"

1 4.52 )"1(2 8.05 )"2(3 9.43 1( 3/8 )"4 5.44 1( 3/4 )"

6.101)"4(

1 9.43 1( 3/8 )"2 5.36 2( 1/2 )"3 5.44 1( 3/4 )"4 8.05 )"2(7 4.52 )"1(

0.721)"5(

1 5.44 1( 3/4 )"2 9.88 3( 1/2 )"3 8.05 )"2(4 5.36 2( 1/2 )"5 2.67 )"3(7 4.52 )"1(8 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

4.251)"6(

1 5.44 1( 3/4 )"2 6.101 )"4(3 8.05 )"2(4 5.36 2( 1/2 )"5 2.67 )"3(6 9.88 3( 1/2 )"7 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

2.302)"8(

1 8.05 )"2(2 7.931 5( 1/2 )"3 5.36 2( 1/2 )"4 2.67 )"3(5 9.88 3( 1/2 )"6 6.101 )"4(7 9.43 1( 3/8 )"8 5.44 1( 3/4 )"0 0.721 )"5(

XS

ekortSddAx2ddA

ekortSDL LZ KSS MZ

7.021 7.931 7.58 4.251

8.3211.641

7.586.551

6.551 6.471

8.3216.741

7.586.551

5.361 3.7811.751 6.471

0.721

3.061

9.88

8.7710.371 2.3027.661 6.0918.051 8.851

4.251

0.181

3.59

6.0919.691 3.2223.781 2.3026.391 0.612

4.251

3.781

3.59

2.3022.302 0.5326.391 0.6129.691 3.2220.181 5.091

8.851

6.102

1.29

3.2221.112 3.1427.402 6.8221.112 3.1421.112 3.1429.881 9.6912.591 6.902

0.871

4.712

8.401

2.5320.722 2.4527.022 3.1420.722 2.4520.722 2.4520.722 2.4521.112 3.222

0.181 - 0.801

5.4422.7522.7522.7522.7522.7524.5223.8322.752


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders7((

&:*'!:!

1 Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA recommendedstandard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 – 1984

2 Mounting plate for 25.4mm (1”) bore single tang BB and BCmounting styles is Clevis Bracket 74076, shown on page 33

&';'''&&


!*&:'!:!

7((( Accessories for the rod end of a cylinder are selected by referenceto the rod end thread, shown on pages 3 and 46, while the sameaccessories, when used at the cap end, are selected by cylinderbore size. See tables of part numbers below and on the followingpages.

+7((Accessories for the 3L cylinder comprise: – rod clevis, eye bracket and pivot pin

– plain rod eye, clevis bracket and pivot pin

– eye bracket for style BB mounting

+( The various accessories on these pages have been load rated foryour convenience. The load capacity in kN is the recommendedmaximum load for that accessory based on a 4:1 factor of safety intension. (The pivot pin is rated in shear). Before specifying, comparethe actual load or the pull force at maximum operating pressure ofthe cylinder with the load capacity of the accessory you plan to use.If the load or pull force of the cylinder exceeds the load capacity ofthe accessory, please consult the factory.

daerhTKK

52.1x8M

5.1x01M

5.1x21M

5.1x02M

5.1x22M

5.1x62M

2x33M

2x93M

2x54M

2x84M

2x85M

2x46M

2x86M

2x67M

2x09M

2x001M

2x011M

sivelCdoReyE

tekcarBniPtoviP

lanimoNNkecroF

ssaMgk

G12215 77047 - 7.7 4.0

G04905 59196 86386 3.81 7.0

G14905 59196 86386 3.81 7.0

G24905 69196 96386 8.64 3.2

G34905 16358 1 07386 8.38 2.5

G44905 16358 1 07386 0.19 1.5

G54905 89196 17386 5.49 9.9

G64905 26358 1 27386 3.302 5.91

G74905 36358 1 37386 1.213 6.82

G84905 36358 1 37386 1.213 5.82

G94905 46358 1 47386 0.024 4.84

G05905 56358 1 57386 0.024 4.36

G15905 56358 1 57386 6.345 1.36

G25905 83537 54537 0.652 8.401

G35905 93537 74537 4.433 8.751

G45905 93537 74537 4.433 6.651

- - - - -

daerhTKK

52.1x8M

5.1x01M

5.1x21M

5.1x02M

5.1x22M

5.1x62M

2x33M

2x93M

2x54M

2x84M

2x85M

2x46M

2x86M

2x67M

2x09M

2x001M

2x011M

doRnialPeyE

sivelCtekcarB

niPtoviPlanimoN

NkecroFssaM

gk

G57047 67047 87047 0.51 5.0

G98096 50296 86386 3.22 3.1

G09096 50296 86386 4.52 3.1

G19096 60296 96386 0.45 2.3

G29096 70296 07386 0.85 6.6

G39096 70296 07386 6.58 6.6

G49096 80296 17386 4.941 7.21

G59096 90296 27386 6.151 4.32

G69096 01296 51296 2.741 1.14

G79096 01296 51296 2.741 5.14

G89096 11296 47386 6.551 2.15

G99096 21296 57386 7.051 2.56

G00196 31296 61296 6.461 5.96

G63537 24537 54537 3.273 7.621

G73437 24537 54537 3.273 0.421

G83437 34537 18128 5.754 7.081

G93437 44537 74537 4.384 5.371

eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

tekcarBeyE.oNtraP

ecroFlanimoNNk

ssaMgk

67047 2 0.61 4.0

59196 3.81 4.0

59196 3.81 4.0

59196 3.81 4.0

69196 8.64 5.1

69196 8.64 5.1

69196 8.64 5.1

16358 1 0.19 4.3

16358 1 0.19 4.3



!:!;&:''

'5

1 Includes pivot pin2 Cylinder accessory dimensions conform to NFPA

recommended standard, NFPA/T3.6.8.R1 – 1984

+0.10

+0.05

+0.00

-0.05

+0.0

-0.5

'

!:!;&:''

&:5

&:<0&:=+0.10

+0.05


5:-(. 5

CW

A

ER

KK

CE

CD

CBCW

E

R

CB

CD

E

MR

FL

R

DD(x4)

F

M

LR

G

CD

CL

25°

traP.oN

G12215 1

G04905

G14905

G24905

G34905

G44905

G54905

G64905

G74905

G84905

G94905

G05905

G15905

G25905

G35905

G45905

A BC DC EC WC RE KKlanimoN

ecroFNk

ssaMgk

6.02 8.8 09.7 2.75 2.5 5.7 52.1x8M 6.11 1.0

1.91 8.91 07.21 1.83 7.21 7.21 5.1x01M 9.81 2.0

1.91 8.91 07.21 1.83 7.21 7.21 5.1x21M 9.12 2.0

6.82 6.23 50.91 0.45 9.51 1.91 5.1x02M 9.94 6.0

3.14 9.83 04.52 6.47 1.91 4.52 5.1x22M 8.38 3.1

3.14 9.83 04.52 6.47 1.91 4.52 5.1x62M 7.69 3.1

8.05 6.15 39.43 3.59 4.52 9.43 2x33M 4.941 1.3

2.75 7.46 54.44 3.411 8.13 5.44 2x93M 3.302 0.6

2.67 7.46 08.05 7.931 8.13 8.05 2x54M 9.713 4.8

2.67 7.46 08.05 7.931 8.13 8.05 2x84M 6.143 3.8

9.88 4.77 05.36 1.561 1.83 5.36 2x85M 2.084 1.51

9.88 4.77 02.67 5.171 1.83 9.96 2x46M 1.535 0.91

9.88 4.77 02.67 5.171 1.83 9.96 2x86M 9.985 7.81

9.88 8.201 09.88 9.691 8.05 9.88 2x67M 8.8401 1.43

6.101 0.611 6.101 8.322 2.75 6.101 2x09M 2.2921 8.94

6.101 0.611 6.101 8.322 2.75 6.101 2x001M 0.0841 6.84

traP.oN

77047

59196

69196

16358 2

89196

26358 2

36358 2

46358 2

56358 2

83537

93537

BC DC DD E F LF RL M RM RlanimoN

ecroFNk

ssaMgk

9.7 9.7 8.6 2.75 5.9 4.52 9.51 5.9 7.21 5.44 6.7 3.0

1.91 07.21 3.01 5.36 5.9 6.82 1.91 7.21 3.41 4.14 3.81 4.0

8.13 50.91 5.31 9.88 9.51 6.74 8.13 1.91 2.22 8.46 8.64 5.1

1.83 04.52 7.61 3.411 2.22 3.06 1.83 4.52 8.13 6.28 0.19 4.3

8.05 39.43 7.61 0.721 2.22 2.67 0.45 9.43 3.14 0.79 5.49 6.5

5.36 54.44 0.32 1.561 6.82 7.58 2.75 5.44 0.45 7.521 6.022 1.11

5.36 08.05 0.72 5.091 1.83 6.101 5.36 8.05 9.16 5.541 1.213 0.71

2.67 05.36 2.03 9.512 5.44 6.021 2.67 5.36 2.67 1.761 0.024 4.72

2.67 02.67 3.33 3.142 8.05 3.331 6.28 9.96 6.28 5.091 6.345 8.53

6.101 09.88 0.64 7.023 9.24 5.441 6.101 9.88 3.59 3.442 0.652 6.55

3.411 6.101 4.25 8.773 2.94 5.361 3.411 6.101 0.801 8.092 4.433 3.48

traP.oN

87047

86386

96386

07386

17386

27386

37386

51296

47386

57386

61296

54537

18128

74537

DC LC GecroFlanimoN

NkssaM

gk

1.11 7.23 04 4.92 30.0

37.21 3.64 65 4.83 1.0

80.91 4.56 57 1.68 2.0

34.52 9.77 88 9.251 5.0

59.43 4.301 511 8.982 2.1

84.44 8.821 341 1.964 4.2

38.05 7.921 541 7.216 2.3

38.05 4.141 851 7.216 5.3

35.36 1.551 171 4.759 9.5

32.67 7.451 371 7.8731 6.8

32.67 7.761 581 7.8731 2.9

39.88 7.502 522 8.6781 2.51

36.101 5.512 532 9.2252 4.22

36.101 7.132 152 9.2252 5.32



&:'5

+0.10

+0.05


!5

5-(.

CA

KK

CB

CDCD

ER

CB

CD

E

MR

R

DD(x4)

F

M

LR

CW CW

25°

Amin.

+0.10

+0.05

traP.oN

G57047

G98096

G09096

G19096

G29096

G39096

G49096

G59096

G69096

G79096

G89096

G99096

G00196

G63537

G73437

G83437

G93437

A.nim

AC BC DC RE KKlanimoN

ecroFNk

ssaMgk

1.91 1.83 1.11 1.11 2.51 52.1x8M 7.41 1.0

1.91 1.83 1.91 07.21 3.81 5.1x01M 3.22 2.0

1.91 1.83 1.91 07.21 3.81 5.1x21M 4.52 2.0

6.82 4.25 8.13 50.91 0.72 5.1x02M 0.45 5.0

6.82 3.06 1.83 04.52 5.63 5.1x22M 0.85 1.1

3.14 4.17 1.83 04.52 5.63 5.1x62M 8.69 1.1

8.05 3.78 8.05 39.43 0.05 2x33M 4.941 6.2

2.75 6.101 5.36 54.44 5.36 2x93M 6.002 1.5

2.75 1.111 5.36 08.05 2.27 2x54M 6.832 4.6

2.67 0.721 5.36 08.05 2.27 2x84M 4.433 8.6

9.88 6.741 2.67 05.36 5.09 2x85M 1.044 1.21

9.88 6.551 2.67 02.67 0.801 2x46M 5.094 0.61

1.29 1.561 9.88 02.67 0.801 2x86M 8.945 6.91

6.101 7.391 6.101 09.88 2.621 2x67M 3.917 1.13

0.721 7.391 6.101 09.88 2.621 2x09M 0.969 4.82

7.931 8.132 3.411 6.101 5.441 2x001M 9.0221 5.24

7.931 8.132 0.721 6.101 5.441 2x011M 6.5731 4.84

.oNtraP

67047

50296

60296

70296

80296

90296

01296

11296

21296

31296

24537

34537

44537

BC DC WC DD E F LF RL M RM RlanimoN

ecroFNk

ssaMgk

0.21 1.11 5.9 8.6 2.75 5.9 4.52 9.51 5.9 7.21 5.44 0.61 4.0

8.91 07.21 7.21 3.01 9.88 7.21 1.83 1.91 7.21 9.51 8.46 6.23 0.1

6.23 50.91 9.51 5.31 0.721 9.51 6.74 2.03 1.91 0.32 0.79 4.26 5.2

9.83 04.52 1.91 7.61 1.561 1.91 2.75 1.83 4.52 8.13 7.521 6.58 0.5

6.15 39.43 4.52 7.61 5.091 2.22 2.67 8.05 9.43 1.24 5.541 6.461 8.8

7.46 54.44 8.13 0.32 3.142 2.22 1.29 9.96 5.44 4.65 5.091 6.151 9.51

7.46 08.05 1.83 0.72 9.323 4.52 0.801 0.18 2.75 6.07 8.832 2.741 2.13

4.77 05.36 1.83 2.03 9.323 4.52 3.411 9.88 5.36 4.97 8.832 6.551 2.33

4.77 02.67 1.83 3.33 9.323 4.52 4.251 0.801 2.67 3.19 8.832 7.051 7.04

1.09 02.67 1.83 3.33 9.323 4.52 4.251 0.801 2.67 3.19 8.832 6.461 7.04

8.201 09.88 8.05 0.64 7.393 9.24 9.961 0.721 9.88 8.401 8.403 3.273 4.08

0.611 6.101 8.05 4.25 5.444 2.94 3.591 1.641 6.101 8.321 3.943 5.754 8.511

2.821 6.101 8.05 4.25 5.444 2.94 3.591 1.641 6.101 8.321 3.943 4.384 6.101

!

&:'

FL

CDCD

ER



General guidance for the selection of mounting styles is given onpage 9. The notes which follow provide information for use in specificapplications and should be read in conjunction with the informationgiven on page 9.

) 9The standard tie rod extension for cylinders with mounting styles TB,TC and TD is shown as BB in dimension tables. Longer or shorterextensions can be supplied.

Cylinders with extended tie rod mountings TB and TC are suppliedwith an additional set of mounting nuts of the appropriate grade forsecuring the cylinder to the machine member. For style TD, tie rodsextended both ends, two additional sets of mounting nuts aresupplied.

Cylinders may be ordered with extended tie rods in addition toanother mounting style. The extended tie rods may then be used formounting other systems or machine components.

, The diameter of the rod gland extension (B) at the head end can beused as a pilot to locate the cylinder in relation to the machine. Afteralignment has been obtained, the flange may be drilled for pins ordowels to prevent shifting.

5 Pivot pins are supplied with Style BB cap fixed clevis mountedcylinders and Style BC cap detachable clevis mounted cylinders,with the exception of 1” bore sizes.

9 Trunnions require lubricated pillow blocks with minimum bearingclearances. Blocks should be aligned and mounted to eliminatebending moments on the trunnion pins. Self-aligning mounts mustnot be used to support the trunnions as bending forces can beset up.

An intermediate fixed trunnion mounting can be positioned tobalance the weight of the cylinder, or it can be located at any pointbetween the head or cap to suit the application. The position of thetrunnion is fixed during manufacture and its location must bespecified at the time of order.

, Foot mounted cylinders should not be pinned or keyed at bothends. Changes in temperature and pressure under normaloperating conditions cause the cylinder to increase (or decrease)from its installed length and it therefore must be free to expand andcontract. It must not be pinned or keyed at both ends asadvantages of cylinder elasticity in absorbing high shock loadswould be lost.


, 92 >The turning moment which results from the application of force by afoot mounted cylinder must be resisted by secure mounting andeffective guidance of the load. A thrust key modification isrecommended to provide positive cylinder location.

Thrust key mountings eliminate the need for fitted bolts or externalkeys on Styles C, F and G side mounted cylinders. The glandretainer plate is extendedbelow the nominal mountingsurface to fit into a keywaymilled into the mounting surfaceof the machine member. See'Mounting Modifications' in theorder code, page 47.

+0.0

-0.075

+0.0

-0.2

9++ To increase the resistance to buckling of long stroke cylinders,tie rod supports may be fitted.These move the tie rodsradially outwards and allowlonger than normal strokes tobe used without the need foran additional mounting.

Bore sizes above 101.6mm (4”) do not require tie rod supports.

1 G mounting is not available with a thrust key on 25.4mm (1”) bore.

PAFA

Integral Key

F

PD

eroBØ

4.52 )"1( 1

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

eroBØ

1.83

8.05

5.36

6.28

6.101

F.moN

AF AP DP

5.9 8 9.4 8.32

5.9 8 9.4 2.03

5.9 8 9.4 5.63

5.9 8 9.4 9.24

9.51 41 1.8 6.55

9.51 41 1.8 1.56

9.51 41 1.8 8.77

1.91 81 5.9 1.29

)sertem(ekortS

fo.oNstroppuS

.d'qeR

9.0 2.1 5.1 8.1 1.2 4.2 7.2 0.3 3.3 6.3 9.3 2.4

- - 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4

- - - 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3

- - - - - 1 1 1 1 1 2 2

- - - - - - - 1 1 1 1 1

- - - - - - - - - 1 1 1




.9(Stroke length tolerances are required due to the build-up oftolerances of piston, head, cap and cylinder body. Standardproduction stroke tolerances are -0.4 to +0.8mm on all bore sizesand stroke lengths. For closer tolerances, please specify therequired tolerance plus the operating temperature and pressure.Stroke tolerances of less than 0.4mm are generally impracticabledue to the elasticity of cylinders and, in these cases, the use of astroke adjuster should be considered – see page 43.

- Parker recommends that mounting bolts with a minimum strength ofISO 898/1 grade 10.9 should be used for fixing cylinders to themachine or base. This recommendation is of particular importancewhere bolts are placed in tension or subjected to shear forces.Mounting bolts should be torque loaded to their manufacturer'srecommended figures.

9? Tie rod mounting nuts, with lubricated threads, should be to aminimum strength of ISO 898/2 grade 10, torque loaded to thefigures shown.

& Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinderports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface.Manifold ports are available with both single- and double-roddedcylinders. The ports are drilled and counterbored for O-ring sealswhich are provided. With these specifications, the mounting isdesignated Style CM. Please consult the factory.

ED

EEM

Y P + Stroke

eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

snoitacificepSeuqroTtuNdoReiT

mNxam-nim

tf.blxam-nim

5.3-3 5.2-2

9-8 6-5

71-51 21-11

63-33 62-52

58-08 46-06

551-051 411-011

eroBØ

doR.oN

4.52)"1(

1

2

1.831( 1/2 )"

1

2

8.05)"2(

1

2

3

5.362( 1/2 )"

1

2

3

7

6.283( 1/4 )"

1

2

3

4

6.101)"4(

1

2

3

4

7

0.721)"5(

1

2

3

4

5

7

8

4.251)"6(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

2.302)"8(

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

0

Y8.0±

P8.0±

EE M DErekraP

.oNgniR-O

2.94 0.45 5.9 5.71 510-2

8.050.45 7.21 6.02 710-2

3.06

8.05

0.45 7.21 6.02 710-27.66

3.06

3.06

2.75 7.21 6.02 710-20.37

7.66

8.05

9.16

7.66 9.51 8.32 910-28.77

3.86

6.47

3.96

7.66 9.51 8.32 910-2

1.48

6.47

8.77

9.16

6.47

0.37 9.51 8.32 910-2

1.48

8.77

1.48

1.48

9.16

3.86

9.77

4.97 2.22 2.03 320-2

3.78

0.18

3.78

3.78

3.78

4.17

0.18

6.28 2.22 2.03 320-2

3.78

3.78

3.78

3.78

3.78

4.17

8.77

3.78


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders92 (2,(

( & Given that the force and operating pressure of the system areknown, and that a piston rod size has been estimated takingaccount of whether the rod is in tension (pull) or compression(push), then the cylinder bore can be selected.

If the piston rod is in compression, use the 'Push Force' table below,as follows:


2. In the same column, identify the force required to move the load(always rounding up).


If the cylinder envelope dimensions are too large for the application,increase the operating pressure, if possible, and repeat theexercise.

If the piston rod is in tension, use the 'Deduction for Pull Force' table.The procedure is the same but, due to the reduced area caused bythe piston rod, the force available on the 'pull' stroke will be smaller.

To determine the pull force:

1. Follow the procedure for 'push' applications as described above.

2. Using the 'pull' table, identify the force indicated according tothe rod and pressure selected.

3. Deduct this from the original 'push' force. The resultant is the netforce available to move the load.

If this force is not large enough, go through the process again butincrease the system operating pressure or cylinder diameter ifpossible. If in doubt, our design engineers will be pleased to assist.

For maximum pressures, please refer to page 40.

*For more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinderbore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHormselection program (HY07-1260/Eur).

( &,(

2,(


eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

aerAnotsiP

mm 2 .ni.qs

015 587.0

0411 767.1

0202 41.3

0713 19.4

0635 03.8

0118 75.21

07621 46.91

04281 72.82

03423 72.05

NkniecroFhsuPrednilyC

5rab

01rab

52rab

07rab

001rab

041rab

3.0 5.0 3.1 6.3 1.5 -

6.0 1.1 9.2 0.8 4.11 0.61

0.1 0.2 1.5 1.41 2.02 3.82

6.1 2.3 9.7 2.22 7.13 4.44

7.2 4.5 4.31 5.73 5.35 3.57

1.4 1.8 3.02 8.65 1.18 3.311

4.6 7.21 6.13 5.88 721 3.771

1.9 3.81 5.54 821 381 3.552

2.61 5.23 1.18 722 523 7.454

ecroFsdnuoPniecroFhsuPrednilyC

08isp

001isp

052isp

0001isp

0051isp

0002isp

56 97 691 587 7711 -

241 771 344 0771 1562 0453

152 413 587 0413 3174 0826

393 194 8221 0194 4637 0289

466 038 5702 0038 05421 00661

6001 7521 3413 07521 65881 04152

1751 4691 0194 04691 06492 08293

2622 7282 8607 07282 60424 04565

2204 7205 86521 07205 60457 045001

reptnemecalpsiDekortSmm01

sertiL sllaG.pmI

0500.0 1100.0

4110.0 5200.0

2020.0 4400.0

7130.0 0700.0

5350.0 0210.0

1180.0 8710.0

7621.0 9720.0

7281.0 2040.0

6423.0 4170.0

notsiPdoR

Ø

7.21 (1/2 )"

9.51 (5/8 )"

4.52 )"1(

9.43 1( 3/8 )"

5.44 1( 3/4 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

2.67 )"3(

9.88 3( 1/2 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

7.931 5( 1/2 )"

aerAdoRnotsiP

mm 2 .ni.qs

031 691.0

002 703.0

005 587.0

069 94.1

0651 14.2

0202 41.3

0713 19.4

0654 70.7

0126 26.9

0118 75.21

07621 46.91

03351 67.32

NknisecroFdoRnotsiP

5rab

01rab

52rab

07rab

001rab

041rab

1.0 1.0 3.0 9.0 3.1 -

1.0 2.0 5.0 4.1 0.2 8.2

3.0 5.0 3.1 5.3 0.5 0.7

5.0 0.1 4.2 8.6 6.9 5.31

8.0 6.1 9.3 9.01 6.51 9.12

0.1 0.2 1.5 1.41 2.02 3.82

6.1 2.3 9.7 2.22 7.13 4.44

3.2 6.4 4.11 0.23 6.54 9.36

1.3 2.6 5.51 4.34 0.26 7.68

1.4 1.8 3.02 8.65 1.18 0.411

4.6 7.21 6.13 7.88 621 3.771

7.7 3.51 4.83 701 351 7.412

ecroFsdnuoPnisecroFdoRnotsiP

08isp

001isp

052isp

0001isp

0051isp

0002isp

61 02 94 691 492 -

52 13 77 703 164 416

56 97 691 587 7711 0751

911 941 373 0941 5322 0892

391 142 306 0142 5163 0284

152 413 587 0413 3174 0826

393 194 8221 0194 4637 0289

665 707 7671 0707 40601 04141

077 269 5042 0269 03441 04291

6001 7521 3413 07521 65881 04152

1751 4691 0194 04691 06492 08293

1091 6732 0495 06732 04653 02574

reptnemecalpsiDekortSmm01

sertiL sllaG.pmI

3100.0 3000.0

0200.0 4000.0

0500.0 1100.0

7900.0 1200.0

6510.0 4300.0

2020.0 4400.0

7130.0 0700.0

6540.0 0010.0

1260.0 7310.0

1180.0 8710.0

7621.0 9720.0

3251.0 5330.0


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders $ +9#

+9#Stop tubes prevent the cylinder from completing its full stroke, toprovide a spread between the piston and the rod bearing at fullextension. Note that stop tube requirements differ for fixed and pivotmounted cylinders. The required length of stop tube, wherenecessary, is read from the vertical columns on the right of thegraph by following the horizontal band within which the point ofintersection lies. If the required length of stop tube is in the regionlabelled 'consult factory', please supply the following:

1. Cylinder mounting style.2. Rod end connection and method of guiding load.3. Bore required, stroke, length of rod extension (dimension W -

dimension V – see pages 3 and 46) if greater than standard.4. Mounting position of cylinder. (Note if at an angle or

vertical, and specify the direction of the piston rod.)5. Operating pressure of cylinder, if limited to less than

the standard pressure for the cylinder selected.

For accurate sizing, please refer to the European cylinder inPHormselection program (HY07-1260/Eur). When specifying a cylinder witha stop tube, please insert an S (Special) and the stroke of thecylinder in the order code and state the length of the stop tube. Notethat net stroke is equal to the gross stroke of the cylinder less thelength of the stop tube. The gross stroke determines the envelopedimensions of the cylinder.

$( The selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditions requires thefollowing steps to be carried out:

1. Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod endconnection to be used. Consult the Stroke Factor table on page38 and determine which factor corresponds to the application.

2. Using the appropriate stroke factor from page 38, determinethe 'basic length' from the equation:

Basic Length = Net Stroke x Stroke Factor

(The graph is prepared for standard rod extensions beyondthe face of the gland retainers. For rod extensions greater thanstandard, add the increases to the net stroke to arrive at the'basic length'.)

3. Calculate the load imposed for the thrust application bymultiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the systempressure, or by referring to the Push and Pull Force charts onpage 36.

4. Using the graph below, look along the values of 'basic length'and 'thrust' as found in 2 and 3 above, and note the point ofintersection.

When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the pistonrod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessarycolumn strength.

The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curved linelabelled 'Rod Diameter' above the point of intersection.

Cushion Sleeve

Recommended Lengthof Stop Tube (mm)

!&

Stop Tube

Consult Factory


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders .,(

.When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the piston rodshould be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessary columnstrength.

For tensile (pull) loads, rod strength is unaffected by stroke length.

For long stroke cylinders under compressive loads, the use of stoptubes should be considered, to reduce bearing stress. The PistonRod Selection Chart on page 37 provides guidance where unusuallylong strokes are required.

.,( The stroke factors which follow are used in the calculation of cylinder'basic length' – see Piston Rod Size Selection, page 37.

*For more comprehensive information on the calculation of cylinderbore size required, please refer to the European cylinder inPHormselection program HY07-1260/Eur.

noitcennoCdnEdoR gnitnuoMelytS gnitnuoMfoepyT ekortS

rotcaF

dediuGyldigiRdnadexiF ,BJ,J,DT,BTG,F,C 5.0

dediuGyldigiRdnadetoviP ,BJ,J,DT,BTG,F,C 7.0

dediuGyldigiRdnadexiF BH,H,CT 0.1

dediuGyldigiRdnadetoviP D 0.1

dediuGyldigiRdnadetoviP ,BH,H,CTDD 5.1

yldigiRtontubdetroppuSdediuG

,BJ,J,DT,BTG,F,C 0.2

dediuGyldigiRdnadetoviP CB,BD,BB 0.2

dediuGyldigiRtontubdexiF BH,H,CT 0.4

yldigiRtontubdetoviPdediuG CB,BD,BB 0.4


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders2

7% ( 2Cushioning is recommended as a means of controlling thedeceleration of masses, or for applications where piston speeds arein excess of 0.1m/s and the piston will make a full stroke. Cushioningextends cylinder life and reduces undesirable noise and hydraulicshock. Deceleration devices or built-in ‘cushions’ are optional andcan be supplied at the head end, cap end, or at both ends of thecylinder without affecting its envelope or mounting dimensions.

2Many forms of cushioning exist, and each has its own specific meritsand advantages. Final speed may be adjusted using the cushionscrews. Note that cushion performance will be affected by the use ofwater or high water based fluids. Please consult the factory fordetails.

7 5,&2To complement the standard cushioning, special cushions can bedesigned to suit applications where the energy to be absorbedexceeds the standard cushion performance. Please consult thefactory for further details.

2( Modelling the cushion performance on uniform deceleration, theformulae below can be used to determine the approximate forcedeveloped in the cushion chamber when decelerating a load.

*Cushioning requirements can be calculated automatically forindividual cylinder/load combinations using the European cylinderinPHorm selection program HY07-1260/Eur.

0F = ma + Ad P/10 + mgsin - f(for inclined or vertically downward direction of mass)

F = ma + Ad P/10 - mgsin - f(for inclined or vertically upward direction of mass)

Where:F = total force acting on the cushion chamber in Newtonsm = mass of load in kilogrammes (including piston, rod, and rod

end accessories, see table and pages 31 to 33)a = deceleration in m/s2, derived from the formula

v2

2s x 10-3

where: v = piston velocity in m/ss = cushion length in mm

Ad = area acted on by pump pressure in mm2 (see page 36)P = pump pressure in barg = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81m/s2

= angle to the horizontal in degreesf = friction forces in Newtons = mg x 0.15

>The following example shows how to calculate horizontal deceleration(=0).

Selected bore/rod 127/44.5mm (No. 1 rod)Pressure = 35 barMass = 2268kgVelocity = 0.6m/sCushion length = 27mmFriction coefficient = 0.15 or 3337N.

F = ma + Ad P/10

and F = 2268 x 6.66 + 12670 x 35/10 - 3337 = 56128N

The total deceleration force is developed by the fluid compressed inthe cushion chamber. This pressure is approximately equal to theforce divided by the annular area (cylinder bore area - rod area):

This induced pressure should not exceed 135 bar.

2 24 Where specified, 3L cylinders incorporate the longest cushionsleeve and spear that can be accommodated within the standardenvelope without reducing the rod bearing and piston bearinglengths (see table of cushion lengths below). Cushions areadjustable via recessed needle valves.

a =

where a = = 6.66 m/s2

=5.1N/mm2 or 51 bar.


0.62

2 x 27 x 10-3

56128N

12670mm2 - 1560mm2

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

retemaiD

4.52)"1(

1 7.21 (1/2 )"2 9.51 (5/8 )"

1.831( 1/2 )"

1 9.51 (5/8 )"2 4.52 )"1(

8.05)"2(

1 9.51 (5/8 )"2 9.43 1( 3/8 )"3 4.52 )"1(

5.362( 1/2 )"

1 4.52 )"1(2 5.44 1( 3/4 )"3 9.43 1( 3/8 )"4 9.51 (5/8 )"

6.283( 1/4 )"

1 4.52 )"1(2 8.05 )"2(3 9.43 1( 3/8 )"4 5.44 1( 3/4 )"

6.101)"4(

1 9.43 1( 3/8 )"2 5.36 2( 1/2 )"3 5.44 1( 3/4 )"4 8.05 )"2(7 4.52 )"1(

0.721)"5(

1 5.44 1( 3/4 )"2 9.88 3( 1/2 )"3 8.05 )"2(4 5.36 2( 1/2 )"5 2.67 )"3(7 4.52 )"1(8 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

4.251)"6(

1 5.44 1( 3/4 )"2 6.101 )"4(3 8.05 )"2(4 5.36 2( 1/2 )"5 2.67 )"3(6 9.88 3( 1/2 )"7 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

2.302)"8(

1 8.05 )"2(2 7.931 5( 1/2 )"3 5.36 2( 1/2 )"4 2.67 )"3(5 9.88 3( 1/2 )"6 6.101 )"4(7 9.43 1( 3/8 )"8 5.44 1( 3/4 )"0 0.721 )"5(

doR&notsiPoreZta

)gk(ekortS

ylnOdoRmm01rep

)gk(ekortS

81.0 10.032.0 20.083.0 20.056.0 40.085.0 20.043.1 70.058.0 40.081.1 40.034.2 21.086.1 70.019.0 20.047.1 40.017.3 61.062.2 70.040.3 21.039.2 70.063.6 52.027.3 21.093.4 61.024.2 40.064.5 21.019.21 84.0

31.6 61.011.8 52.084.01 53.0

61.4 40.086.4 70.091.7 21.065.81 36.0

88.7 61.019.9 52.053.21 53.068.41 84.0

83.6 70.058.21 61.087.93 91.188.41 52.013.71 53.038.91 84.025.32 36.043.11 70.051.21 21.034.33 89.0

htgneLnoihsuC

daeH paC

2.22 1.91

2.22 6.02

2.22 6.02

2.22 6.02

6.82

4.526.026.826.826.82

4.526.026.826.026.026.82

4.52

6.026.026.026.026.826.829.43

8.13

0.720.720.720.720.729.430.72

8.13

8.320.720.720.720.729.439.438.32



)&;

% ( The pressure limitations of a hydraulic cylinder must be reviewedwhen considering its application. To assist the designer in obtainingthe optimum performance from a cylinder, the following guidelinesare provided. If in doubt, please consult the factory.

@A+ At low operating pressures, a wide range of application factorsbegin to affect cylinder performance. As a result, considerationshould be given to factors such as seal friction and mountingalignment when selecting a cylinder for low pressure use. LowFriction seals are available to special order, to optimise performanceat low pressures. For further information, please consult the factory.

)Series 3L cylinders are recommended for pressures up to 70 barwith hydraulic oil as the fluid medium. For pressures above thoseindicated, Series 2H cylinders should be considered. The 4:1design factor rating shown is conservative for continuous severeapplications. Safety factors at other pressures can be calculatedfrom this rating. In addition, mounting styles, stroke, etc., should beconsidered because of the limiting effect they may have on theseratings.

The designer must, however, take account of fatigue stress whichmay restrict the cylinder to a lower pressure. Three main areas ofcylinder design may be affected: the cylinder body (pressureenvelope), the cylinder mountings, and the piston rod.

The maximum pressures indicated in the tables opposite are basedon pure tensile and compressive loadings, without the presence ofany bending stresses. Where it is impractical to avoid side loadings,eg: by the use of pivot mountings, please consult the factory givingfull details of the application.

-5+"In many applications, the pressure developed within a cylinder maybe greater than the working pressure, due to pressure intensifica-tion across the piston and cushioning, eg: meter-out circuits. In mostcases, this intensification does not affect the cylinder mountings orpiston rod threads in the form of increased loading. This inducedpressure should not exceed 135 bar. If in doubt, please consult thefactory.

*For more comprehensive information about pressure limitations forindividual cylinders, please refer to the European cylinder inPHormselection program (HY07-1260/Eur).

)

For pressures exceeding those shown use mounting JB


ØeroB)1.oNdoRhtiw(

4.52 )"1(1.83 1( 1/2 )"8.05 )"2(5.36 2( 1/2 )"6.28 3( 1/4 )"6.101 )"4(0.721 )"5(4.251 )"6(2.302 )"8(

rotcaFngiseD1:4)dleiy(

)rab( )isp(

041 0002511 0561

07 000108 081156 52905 00705 09604 06553 015

ecivreSytud-yvaeH

)rab( )isp(

501 0051501 0051

07 000107 000107 000107 000106 05805 05704 006

eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

–gnitnuoMJelytS noitacilppAhsuP)raB(

.soNdoR8dna,7,1 2.oNdoR .soNdoR

4dna3.soNdoR

6dna5

54 03 - -

54 52 - -

53 51 52 -

02 01 51 -

54 52 03 -

03 51 52 -

02 01 51 51

52 51 02 51


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders :( +


Series 3L cylinders are supplied as standard with R1 size BSPPports to ISO 228/1, spot faced for sealing washers. Smaller R2 sizeports, where demanded by the application, are also available. Parkerrecommends R1 port sizes for their higher flow rate and piston

speed capacity. Metricthreaded ports to DIN 3852Pt.1 and ISO 6149, or NPTFports in sizes as shown forBSPP ports, can be suppliedif specified. The ISO 6149port incorporates a raisedring in the spot face foridentification.

Where required, oversize oradditional ports can be supplied on the sides of heads and capsthat are not occupied by cushion valves. Refer to the tables of portsizes opposite.

A5$ For higher speed applications, oversize ports can be supplied in allbore sizes. Ports one size larger than standard are the maximumthat can be accommodated in most heads or caps within thestandard envelope dimensions. Certain oversize metric, BSPT orNPTF ports require welded port bosses, which protrude from theside of the cylinder. Port sizes are shown in the tables opposite.Note that Y and P dimensions may vary slightly to accommodateoversize ports – please contact the factory where these dimensionsare critical.

$ +One of the factors which influences the speed of a hydraulic cylinderis fluid flow in the connecting lines, particularly at the cap end port,due to the absence of a piston rod. Fluid velocity in connecting linesshould be limited to 5m/s to minimize fluid turbulence, pressure lossand water hammer effects. The tables opposite are a guide for usewhen determining whether cylinder ports are adequate for theapplication. Data shown gives piston speeds for standard andoversize ports and connecting lines where the velocity of the fluid is5m/s. If the desired piston speed results in a fluid flow in excess of5m/s in connecting lines, larger lines with two ports per cap shouldbe considered. Parker recommends that a flow rate of 12m/s inconnecting lines should not be exceeded.

+ Where large masses are involved, or piston speeds exceed 0.1m/sand the piston will make a full stroke, cushions are recommended –see page 39. For cylinders with oversize ports and with a fluidvelocity exceeding 8m/s into the cap end, please consult the factorywith details of the application.

1 This refers to fluid velocity in connecting lines, not piston velocity2 Requires welded port bosses on both head and cap3 Requires welded port bosses on cap only4 Tube bore, flow and piston speed data do not apply

:7-278 ( The table below shows standard positions for ports, and cushionadjusting screws where fitted. However, by specifying the positionnumbers for the desired locations for head and cap ports, manymounting styles can be assembled with ports located at 90° or 180°from standard. In these cases, cushion needleand check valves are also repositioned, wherefitted, since their relation with the port positiondoes not change. Air bleeds, see page 43, maybe fitted in unoccupied faces of the head or cap,depending on mounting.

& Manifold ports are available on all mounting styles to special order.Side mounted cylinders (Style C) can be supplied with the cylinderports arranged for mounting and sealing to a manifold surface – seepage 35.

!"#$%

Raised Ringwithin Spot Face

eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

troPdradnatSeziStroP

)PPSB( eziStroPcirteM

ebuTeroB

mm

nim/ltawolF

ces/m5 1

notsiPnideepS

ces/m1R 2RG1/4 G1/4 5.1x41M 7 5.11 24.0

G3/8 G1/44 5.1x41M 8 9.41 73.0

G3/8 G1/44 5.1x41M 8 9.41 12.0

G3/8 G1/44 5.1x41M 8 9.41 31.0

G1/2 G1/2 5.1x22M 31 0.04 21.0

G1/2 G1/2 5.1x22M 31 0.04 80.0

G1/2 G1/2 5.1x22M 31 0.04 50.0

G3/4 G3/4 5.1x62M 81 2.67 60.0

G3/4 G3/4 5.1x62M 81 2.67 30.0

eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

selytSgnitnuoM

,BJ,J,DT,CT,BTBH&H

CB,BB C 5 D BD DD F&G

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 1 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 4

2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 2 4 1

1 2 3 4 1 3 1 1 2 3 4 1 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 4

2 3 4 1 2 4 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 3 4 1 2 2 4 1

dnastroPfosnoitisoPdaeHniswercSnoihsuC

paCdna

daeHtroP

noihsuC

paCtroP

noihsuC

5 Ports in positions 2 and 4 can be fitted. Please consult the factory.

troPezisrevOeziStroP

)PPSB( eziStroPcirteM

ebuTeroB

mm

nim/ltawolF

ces/m5 1

notsiPdeepS)ces/m(1R 2R

G3/8 G3/8 5.1x61M 8 9.41 28.0

G1/22 G3/8

4 5.1x61M 31 0.04 65.0

G1/22 G3/8

4 5.1x61M 31 0.04 23.0

G1/23 G3/8

4 5.1x61M 31 0.04 02.0

G3/43 G3/4

3 5.1x62M 3 81 2.67 81.0

G3/43 G3/4

3 5.1x62M 3 81 2.67 21.0

G3/43 G3/4

3 5.1x62M 3 81 2.67 80.0

1G 3 1G 3 2x33M 3 22 9.311 01.0

1G 3 1G 3 2x33M 3 22 9.311 60.0

1

3

24


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders,

(%$Sealing materials used in standard cylinders are suitable for usewith most petroleum-based hydraulic fluids.

Special seals are available for use with water-glycol or water-in-oilemulsions, and with fluids such as fire-resistant synthetic phosphateester and phosphate ester-based fluids.

The table above is a guide to the sealing compounds and operatingparameters of the materials used for standard and optional rodgland, piston and body seals. If there is any doubt regarding sealcompatibility with the operating medium, please consult the factory.

10Special seals for use with specific 'green fluids' are available tospecial order. Please consult the factory for details.

>0The environment in which a cylinder is used may cause fluids suchas cutting fluids, coolants, and wash down fluids, to come intocontact with the external surfaces of the cylinder. These fluids mayattack the cylinder O-ring seals, the piston rod wiper and/or the rodseal, and must be taken into account when selecting and specifyingseal compounds.

4Group 1 seals can be operated at temperatures between -20°C and+80°C. Where operating conditions result in temperatures whichexceed these limits, special seal compounds may be required toensure satisfactory service life – please consult the factory.

For seal groups 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7, where operating conditions falloutside of those specified in the table above, please contact thefactory.

(5%$Group 1 seals are fitted as standard to 3L cylinders. For otherduties, the optional seal groups 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 are available –please quote in the cylinder order code, shown on page 47. (Pleasenote that system pressure for Group 6 seals for use with HFA fluidsshould not exceed 70 bar).

Special seals can also be supplied – please consult the factory withdetails of the application. Please insert an S (Special) in the ordercode and specify fluid medium when ordering.

"0For applications where very low friction and an absence of stick-slipare important, the option of low friction seals is available. Pleaseconsult the factory.

?:Special modifications to cylinders are available for high water contentfluids. Modifications include a stainless steel piston rod with lipsealpiston, and plating of internal surfaces. When ordering, pleasespecify the maximum operating pressure or load/speed conditions,as the stainless steel rod is of lower tensile strength than thestandard material.

!?Parker Hannifin can also supply cylinders for use with pure water asthe fluid medium. Please consult the factory.

?Parker Hannifin warrants cylinders modified for water orhigh water content fluid service to be free of defects in materials orworkmanship, but cannot accept responsibility for premature failurecaused by excessive wear resulting from lack of lubricity, or wherefailure is caused by corrosion, electrolysis or mineral deposits withinthe cylinder.

0For maximum component life, the system should be protected fromcontamination by effective filtration. Fluid cleanliness should be inaccordance with ISO 4406. The quantity of filters should be inaccordance with the appropriate ISO standards.

The rating of the filter medium depends on the system componentsand the application. The minimum required for hydraulic systemsshould be class 19/15 to ISO 4406, which equates to 24µ(1075) toISO 4572.

1 For HLPD fluids where the maximum temperature exceeds 60°C, please contact the factory.

puorG :fonoitanibmoca–slairetaMlaeS 2891-4/3476OSIotmuideMdiulF egnaRerutarepmeT

1 decnahne,EFTP,)RBN(elirtiN)UA(enahteruylop

DPLH,PLH,LH,HHliOlareniM 1 ,lio6065H-LIM,MH,negortin,ria

C°08+otC°02- 1

2 EFTP,)RBN(elirtiN )CFH(locylgretaW C°06+otC°02-

3 EFTP,)RPE(enelyporPenelyhtE sdiulfretseetahpsohpemoS007,005lordykS

liociluardyhhtiwelbitapmoctoneraslaes3ssalC

C°45otC°32-

4 )elirtiN(laicepS liociluardyhroriaerutarepmetwoL C°66otC°64-

5 EFTP,)MPF(remotsalenobracoroulF )R-DFH(sretseetahpsohpnodesabsdiulftnatsisereriFliociluardyhrofelbatiusoslA tohniroserutarepmethgihta

.stnemnorivne lordykShtiwesurofelbatiustoNsnoitadnemmocers'rerutcafunamdiulfeeS

C°051+otC°51-

6 ,elirtingnidulcnisdnuopmocsuoiraVnobracoroulf,enahteruylopdecnahne

EFTPdnasremotsale

retaW)AFH(5/59noislumeretawniliO

C°05+otC°5+

7 )BFH(04/06noislumelioniretaW C°05+otC°5+


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod CylindersA+ ,

B7( Standard 3L series cylinders are of the double-acting type. They arealso suitable for use as single-acting cylinders, where the load orother external force is used to return the piston after the pressurestroke. Cast iron piston rings should not be used with single-actingcylinders.

%/*%/.%&Series 3L single-acting cylinders can also be supplied with aninternal spring to return the piston after the pressure stroke. Pleasesupply details of load conditions and friction factors, and advisewhether the spring is required to extend or return the piston rod.

On spring-returned cylinders, it is recommended that tie rodextensions be specified on the cylinder end in which the spring islocated to allow the spring to be 'backed off' until compression isrelieved. Tie rod nuts should be welded to the tie rods at theopposite end of the cylinder, to further assure safe disassembly.Please consult the factory when ordering spring-returned cylinders.

+ . To obtain linear force in one plane with controlled stopping atintermediate points, several designs are available. For threestopped positions, it is common practice to mount two standardsingle rod Style H cylinders back-to-back, or to use through-tierods. By extending or retracting the stroke of each cylinderindependently, it is possible to achieve three positions at the pistonends. An alternative technique is to use a tandem cylinder with anindependent piston rod in the cap section. Please consult the factoryfor further details.

-@Unprotected piston rod surfaces which are exposed tocontaminants with air hardening properties should be protected byrod end bellows. Longer rod extensions are required toaccommodate the collapsed length of the bellows. Please consult thefactory for further information.

('+Metallic rod wipers replace the standard wiper seal, and arerecommended where dust, ice or splashings might damage thewiper seal material. Metallic rod wipers do not affect cylinderdimensions.

@ (2These can be fitted to give reliable end of stroke signals. Seecatalogue HY07-0810/UK for details.

,#(.Linear position transducers of various types are available for 3Lseries cylinders. Please consult the factory for further details.

7-The option of bleed screws, illustrated on page 7, is available ateither or both ends of the cylinder, at any position except in the portface – see page 41. The selected positions should be shown in theorder code – see page 47.

. Where absolute precision in stroke length is required, a screwedadjustable stop can be supplied at the cap end. Several types areavailable – the illustrationshows a design suitablefor infrequent adjustmentof an uncushionedcylinder. Please contactthe factory, specifyingdetails of the applicationand the adjustmentrequired.

(.5(These units provide positive locking of the piston rod. They requirehydraulic pressure to release, while loss of pressure causes theclamp to operate, allowing them to be used as a fail-safe device.Please consult the factory for further information.


eroBØ

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

JK

.nimL

.xam

11 58 0.721

71 58 0.721

71 58 2.302

71 58 2.302

71 58 2.302

71 58 6.822

22 58 6.822

22 58 2.754

JWrenchSquare

K

Seal

L


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders+( 5(

5(7#> Service Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for 3L cylinders simplify theordering and maintenance processes. They containsub-assemblies which are ready for installation, and are suppliedwith full instructions. When ordering Service Assemblies and SealKits, please refer to the identification plate on the cylinder body, andsupply the following information:

!"#$%& ' ' ( )'*#$%& '#$!*+,

60 1 Piston rod – double (weaker 2) rod, no cushion61 1 Piston rod – double (weaker 2) rod, cushion one end69 O-ring – needle valve and check valve screws69a O-ring – cartridge-type needle valve70 Needle valve, cushion adjustment –

bore sizes above 63.5mm (21/2”)70a Needle valve assembly, cartridge type –

bore sizes up to 63.5mm (21/2”)71 Ball – cushion check valve –

bore sizes above 101.6mm (4”)72 Cushion check valve screw –

bore sizes above 101.6mm (4”)73 Floating cushion bush74 Retaining ring for cushion bush

1 Not illustrated2 See page 30 – double rod strength

> ?#1 Head7 Cap14 Gland/bearing cartridge15 Cylinder body16 Piston - Cast Iron Ring17 Piston - Lipseal18 Cushion sleeve19 Tie rod23 Tie rod nut27 Retainer

#"*" ( !*-"* "#

"(. !(

/!,"#!(

34 Piston rod – single rod, no cushion35 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at head end36 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at cap end37 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at both ends40 Wiperseal – for gland41 Lipseal – for gland42 Lipseal – for Lipseal piston43 Back-up washer for gland lipseal 41

(Groups 2, 5, 6 & 7 seals)44 Back-up washer for Lipseal piston45 O-ring – gland/head47 O-ring – cylinder body48 Cast iron piston ring55 Locking pin – piston/rod57 1 Piston rod – double (stronger 2) rod, no cushion58 1 Piston rod – double (stronger 2) rod, cushion one end

4143 14 4540 4244

48

16

17

doRØ

7.219.514.529.435.448.055.362.679.886.1010.7217.931

dnalGegdirtraC

hcnerW

rennapShcnerW

09596 6761109596 6761119596 6761129596 3071139596 7761149596 7761159596 7761169596 7761179596 7761189596 7761199596 8761100696 87611


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders+( 5(

?#&5(7#> (see key to part numbers opposite)

"*%&#+Non-cushioned: 1, 47Cushioned: 1, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 71, 72

",%&#+Non-cushioned: 7, 47Cushioned: 7, 47, 69, (69a), 70, (70a), 73, 74

+#!* *+All types: 15

$! 0 1" ( !*-%&#+Screw type: 69, 70Cartridge type: 69a, 70a

0)2"#3 0 %&#+Screw type: 69, 71, 72 (bore sizes above 101.6mm)

!(4*%&#!These kits contain a fully assembled piston and rod assembly whichis ready to install. They comprise a piston assembly, plus a rodassembly from the types listed below.

!(%&#!Cast Iron Ring: 16, 48Lipseal: 17, 42, 44

4*%&#!Single rod, non-cushioned: 34, 55Single rod, cushioned head: 35, 18, 55Single rod, cushioned cap: 36, 55Single rod, cushioned both ends: 37, 18, 55

Double rod, non-cushioned: 57, 60, 55Double rod, cushioned stronger end: 58, 60, 18, 55Double rod, cushioned weaker end: 58, 61, 18, 55Double rod, cushioned both ends: 58, 61, 18 x 2, 55

44@Please refer to the table on page 35.

+Although 3L cylinders are designed to make on-site maintenance orrepairs as easy as possible, some operations can only be carriedout in our factory. It is standard policy to fit a cylinder returned to thefactory for repair with those replacement parts which are necessaryto return it to 'as good as new' condition. Should the condition of thereturned cylinder be such that repair would be uneconomical, youwill be notified.

6&'# are manufactured from an enhanced polyurethanematerial and do not require a gland lipseal back-up washer. Theseseals provide improved performance in mineral oil applications.They should not be used if the working fluid is water glycol.&'" – System pressure should not exceed 70 bar whenusing HFA fluids.

?#&> & 0(see key to part numbers opposite)

&()& Contain items 14, 40, 41, 43,45. Where the original gland incorporates a gland drain, pleaseconsult the factory. (Includes RK Kit).

(()& Contain items 40, 41, 43, 45.

()** Contains two of item 47.

() Contains CB Kit, plus three of item 48.

(() Contains CB Kit, plus two each of items42 and 44.

A17(%The part numbers shown in the tables above are for Group 1 seals.For Group 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 seals, substitute ‘AHL’ for ‘HLTS’ whereused, and substitute a ‘2’, ‘3’, ‘4’, '5', '6' or ‘7’ for the '1' at the end ofthe number sequence. For example, a Group 5 RG Gland CartridgeKit for a 50.8mm bore cylinder will be RG2AHL205.


retemaiDdoRmm

7.21 (1/2 )"

9.51 (5/8 )"

4.52 )"1(

9.43 1( 3/8 )"

5.44 1( 3/4 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

2.67 )"3(

9.88 3( 1/2 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

7.931 5( 1/2 )"

tiKGRdnalGdradnatS

*slaeSdnaegdirtraC

tiKKRdradnatSrofslaeS*egdirtraCdnalG

150STLH2GR 150STLH2KR












eroBØ

4.52 )"1(

1.83 1( 1/2 )"

8.05 )"2(

5.36 2( 1/2 )"

6.28 3( 1/4 )"

6.101 )"4(

0.721 )"5(

4.251 )"6(

2.302 )"8(

ydoBBC*slaeS

notsiPRP*sgniR

notsiPKP*slaeS

100LH201BC 100L301RP 10LLH201KP

100LH251BC 100L351RP 10LLH251KP

100LH202BC 100L302RP 10LLH202KP

100LH252BC 100L352RP 10LLH252KP

100LH223BC 100L323RP 10LLH223KP

100LH204BC 100L304RP 10LLH204KP

100LH205BC 100L305RP 10LLH205KP

100LH206BC 100L306RP 10LLH206KP

100LH208BC 100L308RP 10LLH208KP



<3 "#$


+0.00

-0.05

Style 4 rod ends are recommended for all applications in which thework piece is secured against the rod shoulder. Where the workpiece is not shouldered, Style 8 rod ends are recommended. If rodend style is not specified, Style 4 will be supplied.

For applications where a female thread is required.

Non-standard piston rod ends are designated 'Style 3'.A dimensional sketch or description should accompany the order.Please specify dimensions KK or CC, and A.

<3 "#$

1 All rod threads are UNF except 1” - 14 which is UNS.

Piston Rod End Data for 25.4mm to 152.4mm (1” to 6”) bore sizecylinders is shown on page 3.

DWrench Flats

KK

DWrench Flats

B

V

A W

MMKKNA B

A

MMCCNA

V

DWrench Flats

B

A

MMNA

W

V

W

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

retemaiD

2.302)"8(

1 8.05 )"2(

2 7.931 5( 1/2 )"

3 5.36 2( 1/2 )"

4 2.67 )"3(

5 9.88 3( 1/2 )"

6 6.101 )"4(

7 9.43 1( 3/8 )"

8 5.44 1( 3/4 )"

0 1 72 0. )"5(

9&4elytS 8elytS

A B D AN V WKKcirteM

KKFNU 1

CCcirteM

CCFNU

2x93M 11/2 21- 2x54M 13/4 21- 2.75 56.66 14 2.94 5.9 8.13

2x001M 21-4 2x031M 51/4 21- 7.931 27.851 021 5.631 7.21 1.83

2x84M 17/8 21- 2x65M 21/4 21- 2.67 53.97 55 3.06 7.21 1.83

2x85M 21/4 21- 2x86M 23/4 21- 9.88 22.59 56 0.37 7.21 1.83

2x46M 21/2 21- 2x67M 31/4 21- 9.88 29.701 57 7.58 7.21 1.83

2x67M 21-3 2x59M 33/4 21- 6.101 26.021 58 4.89 7.21 1.83

5.1x62M 1 41- 2x03M 11/4 21- 3.14 77.05 03 3.33 3.6 2.22

2x33M 11/4 21- 2x93M 11/2 21- 8.05 03.06 63 9.24 5.9 6.82

2x09M 31/2 21- 2x011M 43/4 21- 0.721 20.641 011 8.321 7.21 1.83


Catalogue HY07-1130/UK Tie Rod Cylinders*@9A

.Please state on order whether accessories are to be assembled tocylinder or supplied separately.

MountingStyle

Ports

PistonType

S

SpecialFeatures

PistonRod

Number

PistonRodEnd

RodThread

NetStroke

(mm)

FluidMedium

AirBleeds

3L

Series

PortPositions

C

CushionHead

Page 39

Bore CushionCapPage

39

#)+

'+, eg:1 Select from

Rod No.1, 2, 3, 4,5, 6, 7, 8 or 0 3, 46

' * TB Tie Rods Extended Head End 10, 22TC Tie Rods Extended Cap End 10, 22TD Tie Rods Extended Both Ends 10, 22J Head Rectangular Flange 12, 24JB Head Square Flange 12, 24H Cap Rectangular Flange 14, 24HB Cap Square Flange 14, 24C Side Lug Mounting 16, 26F Side Tapped Mounting 16, 26G Side End Lug 17, 27BB Cap Fixed Clevis 18, 25BC Cap Detachable Clevis 18D Head Trunnion 20, 28DB Cap Trunnion 20, 28DD Intermediate Trunnion 20, 28

C Cast Iron Piston Rings

(Standard) 7L Lipseal 7

-' S Oversize Ports 41S Rod End Bellows 43S Special Seals 42S Stop Tube 37S Stroke Limiter 43S Tie Rod Supports 34S Water Service Modifications 42

– or to customer specification

1 Head position 1-4 411 Cap position 1-4 41

-' '+

M Group 1 42C Group 2 42P Group 3 42R Group 4 42D Group 5 42A1 Group 6 42B Group 7 42

.

4 Head position 1-4 434 Cap position 1-4 4300 No air bleeds 43

/ M Metric (standard) 3, 46A UNF (optional) 3, 46

* 4 Style 4 3, 468 Style 8 3, 469 Style 9 3, 463 Style 3 (Special) – please

supply description or drawing 3, 46

* R1 BSPP thread (R1 sizes) 41R2 BSPP thread (R2 sizes) 41G Metric 41Y Metric to ISO 6149 41U NPTF (dry seal pipe thread) 41

BRequired for basic cylinderIndicate optional features or leave blank

C

MountingModifications

K

DoubleRod

P Thrust Key (Styles C, F, G) 34M Manifold Port O-Ring Seal

(Style C only) 35

1.83 C K J L3 1R L 1 4 M 1 4 M C 721 D 11 44



!" #

Hydraulics GroupSales Offices

Tel: +43 (0)2622 23501 970Fax: +43 (0)2622 23501 977

Tel: +32 (0)67 280 900Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999

Tel: +420 2 830 85 221Fax: +420 2 830 85 360

Tel: +45 4356 0400Fax: +45 4373 8431

Tel: +358 (0)9 4767 31Fax: +358 (0)9 4767 3200

Tel: +33 (0)450 25 80 25Fax: +33 (0)450 03 67 37

Tel: +49 (0)2131 4016 0Fax: +49 (0)2131 4016 9199

Tel: +36 (06)1 220 4155Fax: +36 (06)1 422 1525

Tel: +353 (0)1 801 4010Fax: +353 (0)1 801 4132

!"#Tel: +39 02 45 19 21Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40

$%Tel: +31 (0)541 585000Fax: +31 (0)541 585459

!&Tel: +47 64 91 10 00Fax: +47 64 91 10 90

" 'Tel: +48 (0)22 863 49 42Fax: +48 (0)22 863 49 44

" (Tel: +351 22 9997 360Fax: +351 22 9961 527

# $)*+%) ,

#"Tel: +34 91 675 73 00Fax: +34 91 675 77 11

#! -Tel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10

%& * !#Tel: +44 (0)1923 492 000Fax: +44 (0)1923 256 059$ !,#Tel: +44 (0)1924 282 200Fax: +44 (0)1924 282 299

Catalogue HY07-1130/UK2M 05/03 PD

© Copyright 2003Parker Hannifin CorporationAll rights reserved.

.Tel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777Fax: +61 (0)2-9899 6184

"/$Tel: +1 905-693-3000Fax: +1 905-876-0788

Tel: +86 10 6561 0520Fax: +86 10 6561 0526

"' ./'Tel: +852 2428 8008Fax: +852 2425 6896

",Tel: +91 22 7907081Fax: +91 22 7907080

(0&1Tel: +(81) 3 6408 3900Fax: +(81) 3 5449 7201

) %Tel: +55 12 3954-5100Fax: +55 12 3954-5266

# ' &Tel: +27 (0)11-392 7280Fax: +27 (0)11-392 7213

%# !#Tel: +1 216-896-3000Fax: +1 216-896-4031( !,#Tel: +1 847-821-1500Fax: +1 847-821-7600

ACP SeriesPiston AccumulatorsPED 97/23/EC accumulators forworking pressures up to 275 bar

Catalogue HY07-1246/UKJuly 2002

2 Parker HannifinCylinder DivisionEurope

Catalogue HY07-1246/UK Piston AccumulatorsACP Series

Introducing the new ACP Series ....Parker's new ACP Series piston accumulators are tough,reliable units designed to withstand high compressionratios. Offering exceptional strength and fatigue resistance,the ACP range of premium quality accumulators combinesa design proven in the most demanding mobile andindustrial environments with an innovative manufacturingprocess. ACP Series piston accumulators are acost-effective alternative to diaphragm and bladderaccumulator designs.

Why use an ACP Series Piston Accumulator?! high-strength crimped construction provides long,

reliable service life! small piston seal area minimizes the permeability

problems associated with diaphragm accumulators! maintenance-free, sealed-for-life design! versatile – wide range of lengths and bore sizes

allows installation to be adapted to available space! rechargeable and 'tamperproof' versions – available

with gas valve for customer charging, or valveless! manufactured to EU Pressure Equipment Directive

97/23/EC – can be used in any European Union orEEA country without additional certification

! custom sizes available for unique applications

SpecificationStandard volumes 0.08 to 0.95 litresBore diameters 40mm and 50mmMax. working pressure 260 bar – 40mm bore sizes

275 bar – 50mm bore sizesMax. piston speed 4m/sWorking temp. range shell: -20°C to +150°C

seals: see table on page 3

Rechargeable or 'Tamperproof' DesignsACP Series accumulators are available in two versions.Rechargeable models allow the user to monitor andregulate the gas pre-charge to suit different operatingconditions, and feature a Schrader-type gas valve cartridgeto ISO 4570 8V1. Tamperproof, sealed-for-life versions ofthe ACP are pre-charged on assembly to customerspecification and are completely maintenance-free.

Features and BenefitsLightweight PistonThe ACP Series feature a dished, lightweight aluminiumpiston, deep-walled for stability in the bore.! high efficiency – fast response times! reduced system shock in rapid cycling applications! extra gas capacity

Introduction and Features

Rugged ConstructionACP Series accumulators feature ahigh strength, compact, steel shelland caps, permanently joined andsealed by a revolutionary crimpingprocess.! effective heat dissipation prevents

fluid and seal degradation! superior fatigue life! micro-finished for extended seal life

Effective, Durable Sealing50mm bore models featureParker's unique, patented five-bladed V-O-ring piston seal. The40mm model combines anelastomeric seal with a low frictionPTFE piston ring. All modelsemploy PTFE bearing rings toeliminate metal-to-metal contactbetween the tube and piston.

! dependable, full pressure storage of hydraulic energy! effective separation of fluid and gas for long service

intervals! reduced wear for extended service life! safe in operation – cannot suffer catastrophic failure

Unlike a bladder or diaphragm unit, the piston and sealdesign prevents sudden failure of the accumulator, makingthe ACP particularly suitable for applications such assteering and braking circuits where catastrophic failurecould be dangerous.

Protective Steel Gas CapModels fitted with a gasvalve are supplied witha protective steel cap.Tamperproof versions arefitted with a threaded plugwhich provides progressiverelease of pre-chargepressure prior to safe disposal.! steel cap reduces the risk of damage

from external impact! security – cap provides a secondary seal

Spanner HolesTo permit easy installation onhydraulic manifolds, or in areaswhere mounting space isrestricted, spanner holes areprovided on all models.


Catalogue HY07-1246/UK Piston AccumulatorsACP SeriesApplication Data

Applications! Construction and mining equipment – suspension and

load stabilising systems, emergency back-up forsteering, braking and pilot circuits

! Hydrostatic drives – shock absorption when changingdirection

! Assembly automation – reducing noise and smoothingpump pulsations

! Fork lifts and cherry pickers – pressure spike damping! Transportation vehicles – suspension and braking

systems! Turbine engines – maintaining oil pressure for lubrication! Machine tools – energy saving

Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/ECAll ACP Series piston accumulators are manufactured incompliance with the European Pressure EquipmentDirective 97/23/EC, recognized and accepted in allmember states of the European Union and EuropeanEconomic Area. Accumulators with a gas volume of lessthan 1 litre do not require CE marking or a Declaration ofConformity, but must be manufactured in accordancewith sound engineering practice to ensure safety in use.

MountingThe choice of lengths and bore sizes available in theACP range makes these piston accumulators particularlysuitable for applications where mounting space is critical.The same fluid capacity can be achieved from differentconfigurations of bore and overall length, providingexceptional versatility for the designer.

'U' bolts are recommended for the secure attachment oflarger ACP accumulators – please contact the factory forfurther information.

* 260 bar for 40mm bore models

seireS

PCA

A

PA

EBA

noitcurtsnoCepyT&

dradnatSlavorppA

gnikroW.xaMerusserP

diulFyticapaC

sertil.aiDeroB notsiP.xaM

deepSgnitnuoMecafretnI eugolataC

notsip,depmirC EC *572 59.0-80.0 mm05-04 s/m4 cirteM KU/6421

notsip,dedaerhT EC 053 83-1.0 mm051-05.ni6-2 s/m4 hcnI&cirteM KU/5421

notsip,dedaerhT EC 053 003-6 mm063-081 s/m8 cirteM KU/0421

reddalB EC 053 5.84-1 – – cirteM KU/5321

Seals, Fluids and Temperature Ranges

epyTlaeS edoC muideMdiulFerutarepmeT

egnaR

)RBN(elirtiN K,esopruplareneG

sdiulfdesab-muelortepC°57+otC°03-

nobracoroulF)MPF(remotsalE

EerutarepmethgiH

sdiulfcitehtnysro/dnaC°021+otC°52-

enelyhtE)RPE(enelyporP

D sretse-etahpsohP C°021+otC°04-

detanegordyH)RBNH(elirtiN

Hdnadesab-liotsoM

sdiulfelbadargedoibC°061+otC°04-

Parker's Accumulator Product RangeParker offers an extensive range of accumulators andassociated products for mobile and industrial applications.In addition to the accumulators listed in the table, the

emuloVsertiL

dednemmoceR.xaMwolF

etuniMrepsertiL

23.0-80.0 04

59.0-05.0 001

Optional PortsHydraulic ports are available in a range of male andfemale sizes, in both BSPP, metric and SAE styles.Metric ports are offered to both the DIN 3852-1 and theISO 6149-1 standards – see pages 4 and 5.

Maximum Flow RatesThe flow rates shown arefor standard port sizes.For higher flow ports,please contact thefactory.

range includes UCA charging and gauging kits (bulletinno. 1244-T) and ASB safety blocks (catalogue no. 1241).


Catalogue HY07-1246/UK Piston AccumulatorsACP Series

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise specified.

Dimensions

Dimensions ACP withoutGas Valve (Code D)

Port Availability

standardo optional• * Metric ports are available to DIN 3852-1 or ISO 6149-1

Dimensions ACP with Gas Valve (Code A)

Male Port all models

ledoM edoC

AE40PCA

800610230050

AE50PCA

610230050570001

eroB emuloVsertiLØ

83

80.061.023.005.0

15

61.023.005.057.059.0

A B C)PPSB(D

elameF elaM

5.44

551

4.52 8/3G 4/3G522563325

5.06

771

4.52 4/3G 1G452143164855

ledoM edoC

DE40PCA

800610230050

DE50PCA

610230050570001

eroB emuloVsertiLØ

83

80.061.023.005.0

15

61.023.005.057.059.0

A B C)PPSB(D

elameF elaM

5.44

231

2 8/3G 4/3G202243005

5.06

451

2 4/3G 1G132813834435

ledoM

40PCA

50PCA

PPSBelameF PPSBelaM *cirteMelameF *cirteMelaM EASelameF EASelaM

8/3 2/1 4/3 4/3 1 5.1x41M 5.1x81M 5.1x22M 5.1x81M 5.1x22M 6 8 01 21 61

• o • o • o • • •o o • o • o o • o • o • o o •

D

A

D

B

C

B

C

A

D


Catalogue HY07-1246/UK Piston AccumulatorsACP SeriesOrdering Code

For more information aboutParker's range of accumulatorproducts, please contact:

Parker Hannifin plc6 Greycaine RoadWatfordHerts. UKWD24 7QAPhone: 01923 492000Fax: 01923 210562Email: [email protected]

Visit us at www.parker.com

Type ofconstruction

WorkingPressure

2

DesignNumber

Seal Type

PortSize

Capacity

P

PistonType

AC

Series Model Options

WARNINGFailure or improper selection or use of the product and/or systems described herein can cause death, personal injury and property damage.

This document and other information from Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries and authorized distributors provide product and/or systemoptions for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that all aspects of the application are analysed and the informationconcerning the product or system in the current product catalogue is reviewed. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for theseproducts or systems, the user, through its own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the final selection of the products and systemsand assuring that all performance, safety and warning requirements of the application are met.

The products described herein, including without limitation, product features, specifications, designs, availability and pricing, are subject to change byParker Hannifin Corporation and its subsidiaries at any time without notice.

Offer of SaleThe items described in this document are hereby offered for sale by Parker Hannifin Corporation, its subsidiaries or authorized distributors. This offer andits acceptance are governed by the provisions stated in the full 'Offer of Sale'.

Code Working PressureR 260 bar (40mm bore only)E 275 bar (50mm bore only)

Code Model Volume008 04 0.08 litre016 04 0.16 litre032 04 0.32 litre050 04 0.50 litre

016 05 0.16 litre032 05 0.32 litre050 05 0.50 litre075 05 0.75 litre100 05 0.95 litre

Code Service/FluidK StandardE High temperaturesD Phosphate-estersH Extended temp. rangeS Special

Code Port Size and TypeRA 3/8" BSPP FemaleRB 1/2" BSPP FemaleRC 3/4" BSPP FemaleRD 1" BSPP Female

LC 3/4" BSPP MaleLD 1" BSPP Male

GA M14 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 FemaleGB M18 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 FemaleGC M22 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Female

HB M18 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 MaleHC M22 x 1.5 DIN 3852-1 Male

YA M14 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 FemaleYB M18 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 FemaleYC M22 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Female

ZB M18 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 MaleZC M22 x 1.5 ISO 6149-1 Male

TB SAE #6 FemaleTC SAE #8 FemaleTI SAE #10 Female

AD SAE #12 MaleAE SAE #16 Male

Code Approval TypeE To PED 97/23/EC – for use in EuropeA No approvals – not for European use

Code Valve OptionsA Gas valve (standard)D No gas valve

Code Bore Size(Nominal)

04 40mm05 50mm

Code Port2 BSPP port4 Metric port1 SAE port3 Special

Cylinder DivisionSales Offices

Austria MarchtrenkParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (7242) 56921Fax: (7242) 5692120

Belgium NivellesParker Hannifin SA NVTel: 67 280 900Fax: 67 280 999

Czech Republic PragueParker Hannifin CorporationTel: (02) 830 85 221Fax: (02) 830 85 360

Denmark IshøjParker Hannifin Danmark A/STel: 43 56 04 00Fax: 43 73 31 07

Finland VantaaParker Hannifin OyTel: 9 476 731Fax: 9 476 73200

France Contamine-sur-ArveParker Hannifin SATel: 4 50 25.80.25Fax: 4 50 03.67.37

Germany CologneParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (221) 71720Fax: (221) 7172219

Hungary BudapestParker Hannifin Corp.Tel: 1 252 8137Fax: 1 252 8129

Ireland CloneeParker Sales (Ireland) Ltd.Tel: (353) 1 8014010Fax: (353) 1 8014132

Italy Arsago-SeprioParker Hannifin S.p.A.Tel: (0331) 765611Fax: (0331) 765612

H d li

HY07-1246/1-UK2M PD 0702


Need a Parker part?Call Parker's European Product Information Centreon 00800 27 27 5374

Netherlands OldenzaalParker Hannifin B.V.Tel: (0541) 585000Fax: (0541) 585459

Norway SkiParker Hannifin A/STel: 64 91 10 00Fax: 64 91 10 90

Poland WarsawParker Hannifin Corp.Tel: (22) 863 49 42Fax: (22) 863 49 44

Portugal Leca da PalmeiraParker Hannifin Portugal Lda.Tel: (22) 999 7360Fax: (22) 996 1527

Slovakia Ref. Czech Republic

Spain MadridParker Hannifin Espana S.A.Tel: (91) 675 73 00Fax: (91) 675 77 11

Sweden SpångaParker Hannifin AB.Tel: 08 5979 50 00Fax: 08 5979 51 20

Switzerland RomanshornHydrel A.G. RomanshornTel: (714) 66 66 66Fax: (714) 66 63 33

Turkey IstanbulHidroser Hidrolik - PnömatikTel: (212) 886 72 70Fax: (212) 886 69 35

United Kingdom WatfordParker Hannifin PlcTel: (01923) 492000Fax: (01923) 248557

A Series PistonAccumulators250 & 350 bar accumulators with fluidvolumes from 0.1 litres to 76 litres

Catalogue HY07-1240/UKOctober 2004

2 Parker Hannifin plcCylinder DivisionWatford, Herts.

Catalogue HY07-1240/UK Piston AccumulatorsA SeriesIntroduction

Contents PageAccumulator Selection 2Certification 2Specification 3Features and Benefits 4Capacities and Dimensions 5Ports 6Operating Temperatures 6Seals and Fluid Media 6Options and Spare Parts 7Accumulator Sizing 8Accessories 10How to Order 11

Accumulator SelectionParker offers a comprehensive range of CE-approved pistonand bladder accumulators to suit different application andperformance criteria.

A Series piston accumulators, described in this catalogue,are designed for industrial and mobile applications wherepiston speeds and flow rates are relatively low, such as insuspension systems, power units and pressure maintenance.

AP Series piston accumulators are high performanceaccumulators designed for demanding industrial applicationssuch as die-casting and plastic injection moulding, where highflow rates and piston speeds up to 8m/s are routinely demanded.AP Series accumulators are described in catalogue HY07-1247.

BAE Series bladder accumulators For applications where fastresponse times, a higher tolerance of fluid contamination andan instantaneous failure mode are required, the BAE Series ofbladder accumulators is available – see catalogue HY07-1235.

When selecting an accumulator, factors to be consideredshould include the following:

appropriate certification for the country of final destination

maximum working pressure

fluid capacity

gas capacity

flow rate, port type and size

mounting space and orientation

Guidance regarding the selection of a piston or bladderaccumulator is provided in Parker bulletin HY07-1243, ‘Makingthe Choice’.

In addition, the type of gas valve and its connection and therequirement for a charging and gauging kit should also beconsidered. In certain industrial applications, the use of asafety shut-off valve or ‘safety block’ is mandatory, and asuitable valve should be incorporated into the system design.Parker offers a range of safety blocks for this purpose – seecatalogue HY07-1241.

CertificationAccumulators are pressure vessels which are subject to thesafety laws and regulations of the country in which they areoperated. In addition, other industry-specific regulations mayapply in applications such as shipbuilding, aviation etc.

Prior to the adoption of the Europe-wide CE approval forpressure vessels in 2002, many European member statesoperated their own approvals systems, eg: TÜV in Germany,DRIRE in France, ISPESL in Italy etc. Following the introductionof the Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/EC), users ofaccumulators can opt for CE approval in place of existingnational standards. CE approval incorporates the requirementsof all existing national approvals, enabling an approved pressurevessel to be used in any European Union member state withoutthe need for local approval.

MountingThe wide variety of lengths and bore sizes available withinParker’s piston accumulator range makes this design particularlysuitable for applications where mounting space is critical. Thesame fluid capacity can be achieved from different configurationsof bore and overall length, providing exceptional versatility forthe designer. While the optimum mounting orientation isvertical, angled and horizontal mountings are permissible if thehydraulic fluid is kept clean; high levels of contaminants in thefluid can result in uneven or accelerated seal wear.

Special DesignsFor applications where a standard accumulator is not suitable,our engineers will be pleased to discuss custom designs to suityour application.

Industry-Leading Systems CapabilityParker’s comprehensive range of pumps, valves, hoses andfiltration products enables you to design and build a completehydraulic system with proven, 100% compatible parts.With value-adding services which extend from design tocommissioning and in-service support, you can be confidentthat Parker is the right partner for your motion and controlapplication.


Catalogue HY07-1240/UK Piston AccumulatorsA Series

250 and 350 Bar Pressure RangesA Series accumulators are available to suit maximum workingpressures of 250 and 350 bar. The same premium qualitydesign and technical features guarantee optimum performanceand service life from every model, while differing wall thicknessesto suit 250 or 350 bar working pressures allow the designer tospecify precisely the right performance envelope for theapplication.

SpecificationMax. working pressures 250 and 350 bar

Bore sizes (nominal):250 bar range 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200mm350 bar range 50, 75, 100, 150mm

Working temp. range shell: -20 to +150°C (CE approved)seals: see page 6(other temperatures – consult factory)

Fluid volumes 0.1–76 litres

Max. piston speed 4m/s

Port style BSPP (standard – others on request)

Gas valve 350 bar rated cored type

Approval CE (standard – others on request)

MaterialsShell – high strength steel

End caps – steel

Pistons – lightweight aluminium alloy

Piston and end cap seals – NBR (standard): other com-pounds to suit application

Piston seal backup washers – PTFE

Piston bearing rings – PTFE

Gas valve assembly – stainless steel

Gas valve protector – steel

Paint finish – black primer (standard – others on request)

Custom DesignsFor unique applications and hostile environments, differentdesigns, materials and coatings can be supplied. Please contactour engineering department to discuss custom solutions toindividual application requirements.

Available OptionsA wide variety of options is available for A Series accumulators,including:

Threaded and manifold port styles and sizes

Seal compounds

Metric and inch mounting styles

High flow gas ports for use with remote gas storage bottles

Water service versions

Gas valves

Safety fuses

Accumulator mounting systems

Precharge monitors and piston position sensors

Certifications to suit different market requirements

FiltrationFor maximum component life, the system should be protectedfrom contamination by effective filtration. Fluid cleanlinessshould be in accordance with ISO 4406. The quality of filtersshould be in accordance with the appropriate ISO standards.

The rating of the filter media depends on the system componentsand the application. The minimum required for hydraulicsystems should be class 19/15 to ISO 4406, which equates to25µ (β10≥75) to ISO 4572.

SafetyCharging must be carried out by qualified personnel.

Before taking any readings or pressurizing with nitrogen, theaccumulator must be isolated from the hydraulic system andthe fluid side discharged in order to depressurize it.Use only nitrogen (N2) to pressurize the accumulator.

Danger of Explosion – Never Charge withOxygen

The types of nitrogen permitted are: type S (99.8% pure);type R (99.99% pure); type U (99.993% pure).

Specification

Actual Bore Sizes and Theoretical MaximumFlow Rates


ledoM erusserP

2A 053/052

3A 053/052

4A 053/052

5A 052

6A 053/052

8A 052

eroBlanimoN.aiD

eroBlautcA.aiD

dednemmoceRmpl–wolF.xaM

05 4.15 083

57 2.67 528

001 4.201 0051

521 0.721 0022

051 9.641 0013

002 0.002 0075



1, 2 & 3 Shell and CapsEffective heat dissipation is vital for long seal life. Compact,rugged steel shell and end caps allow heat to dissipate efficiently,while the bore of the accumulator is micro-finished to maximiseseal life. Downtime is minimised by the use of threaded caps tosimplify maintenance of the accumulator, permitting quick andeasy installation of seals.

4 PistonRapid response in high cycling applications is assured byParker’s lightweight piston design. The dished profile of thealuminium piston gives extra gas capacity while maintainingstability in the bore, and permits a greater usable volume of fluid.Piston position sensors, available as an optional feature, enablethe condition of the accumulator’s precharge to be monitored.

5 Piston SealingLong service intervals are made possible by total separation ofoil and gas, even under the most severe operating conditions.Parker’s A Series accumulators feature a wide piston sealassembly comprising a unique five-bladed V-profile O-ring withback-up washers, which eliminates seal roll-over even in highspeed applications. The V-O-ring holds full pressure throughoutlong idle periods between cycles, providing dependable, fullpressure storage of hydraulic energy.

6 PTFE Bearing RingsTo reduce wear and extend service life, carbon-filled PTFEbearing rings are fitted, eliminating metal-to-metal contactbetween the piston and bore.

7 Safety Bleed GroovesA bleed groove in the gas cap progressively releases unrelievedgas pressure in the accumulator as the gas cap is unscrewed.Note: to avoid the risk of damage or injury, an accumulatormust always be discharged before disassembly.

8 Gas ValveTo avoid the risk of damage or injury, an accumulator must bedischarged before disassembling. For added safety, the gasvalves fitted by Parker vent progressively as they are unscrewed.A robust, cored-type gas valve rated at 350 bar is fitted asstandard to all A Series piston accumulators. A mechanicallyopened and closed poppet-type gas valve cartridge, also ratedat 350 bar, is available as an option.

9 Gas Valve ProtectorTo prevent accidental – and potentially hazardous – damage tothe gas valve, the steel gas valve protector reduces the risk tothe valve from external impact.

10 PortsTo provide the required flow rate and simplify system design, awide range of port types and sizes is available. BSPP ports aresupplied as standard; ISO, metric and SAE threaded and metricflanged ports to ISO 6162 are available to special order.

Features and Benefits

V-O-ring

PTFE back-upwasher

1

23

4

5 6

7

8

910



250 and 350 Bar Models, Capacities and Dimensions


Capacities and Dimensions

D

B

A

CMounting holesE ThreadG Deep F p.c.d.

ledoM edoC

2A

50000100510092008500

3A

92008500090061103810

4A

8500611013207430875085006110

5A 132074308750

6A

1320743087504290551133710132

8A

87505511337101322772888256430264

eroBØ

diulFemuloV

sertiL

saGemuloV

sertiL

4.15

1.0 1.051.0 2.052.0 52.0

5.0 5.00.1 0.1

2.67

5.0 55.00.1 0.15.1 5.10.2 0.20.3 0.3

4.201

0.1 1.10.2 0.28.3 0.47.5 9.55.9 6.90.1 3.10.2 2.2

0.721 8.3 1.47.5 0.65.9 8.9

9.641

8.3 3.47.5 2.65.9 0.0151 7.5191 4.915.82 9.82

83 4.83

0.002

5.9 7.0191 2.025.82 7.92

83 1.9354 2.6474 2.8475 0.8567 2.77

raB052 raB053

gkthgieW

8.1 7.20.2 0.35.2 3.30.3 3.44.4 2.60.9 0.911 1131 3141 5161 0251 8181 2232 0392 8314 4522 –62 –23 –93 –25 –53 3524 0645 4737 6958 011211 841741 381

89 –221 –641 –071 –981 –491 –712 –662 –

raB052 raB053C E 2 F G

A BD

PPSBA B

DPPSB

16

271

G3/4 46

271

G3/4 72 1 – – –112 112052 052063 063095 095

19

062

G3/4 69

062

G3/4 92 1 01M 06 51463 463184 184375 375418 418

121

592

1G 721

603

1G 92 1 21M 28 81114 224046 156278 3880331 1431

351

272

1G – – – 92 1 21M 001 81643694546349

571

244

1G 1/2 081

784

1G 92 1 21M 011 81

455 006877 4283111 95117331 38316981 14914542 0052

032

926

2G – – – 24 61M 071 42

139232123514771438163128372



Hydraulic and Gas PortsThe ports shown on page 5 are supplied as standard at thefluid ends of A Series accumulators, and at the gas ends ofthese accumulators when ordered for use with gas bottles.A range of optional threaded and flanged ports is also available,as shown in the tables below. These are specified by adding therelevant code to the accumulator model number – see page 11.Note that, where the required fluid port is the standard BSPPsize for the accumulator model chosen, the fluid port field in theorder code should be left blank.

Notes to Tables1 Where the optional poppet-type gas valve is fitted (see page 7),

dimension C should be increased by 13mm.

2 A Series piston accumulators are supplied as standard with themetric threaded mounting holes shown in the table. They are alsoavailable with inch pattern mounting holes, indicated by the DesignNumber in the model code – see page 11.


Ports and Fluid Media

Optional Threaded Ports

Optional Flanged PortsA Series accumulators are available with metric flange ports toISO 6162, as shown in the table. Inch pattern flange ports andflange ports for higher pressure operation are also available –please consult the factory for details.

1 Where the required fluid port is the standard BSPP size for the accumulator bore diameter chosen (see dimension D, page 5), the fluid portfield in the order code on page 11 should be left blank.

A

F

B

C

Operating Temperatures, Seals and FluidsA Series piston accumulators are fitted as standard with nitrile(NBR) seals. A range of alternative seal materials is availablefor use at higher or lower temperatures, or with synthetic or highwater content fluids, as shown in the table. Other seals are alsoavailable for use in exceptional conditions – please consult thefactory with details of the application.The shells of Parker’s A series accumulators are CE approvedfor operation at temperatures between -20°C and +150°C.

Water ServiceA Series piston accumulators are available for use with wateras the fluid medium. Modifications include plating of all workingsurfaces. Please consult the factory for details.

* Parker recommends that bolts with a minimum strength of ISO 898/1grade 12.9 should be used for attaching port flanges to the accumulator.

PPSB 1 1-2583NIDotcirteM 1-9416OSIotcirteM daerhTEAS

daerhTeziS

morFledoM

edoCdaerhT

eziSmorF

ledoMedoC

daerhTeziS

morFledoM

edoCdaerhT

eziSmorF

ledoMedoC

G3/4 2A CR 41M 2A AG 41M 2A AY 5# 2A AT

1G 3A DR 81M 2A BG 81M 2A BY 6# 2A BT

1G 1/4 3A ER 22M 2A CG 22M 2A CY 8# 2A CT

1G 1/2 4A FR 72M 2A DG 72M 2A DY 01# 2A IT

2G 4A GR 33M 3A EG 33M 3A EY 21# 2A DT

- - - 24M 3A FG 24M 3A FY 61# 3A ET

- - - - - - - - - 02# 3A FT

- - - - - - - - - 42# 4A GT

2616OSIotstroPegnalF

egnalFeziS

morFledoM

*A B C F edoC52.0± 52.0±

31ND 3A 8M 5.71 1.83 31 TM

91ND 3A 01M 3.22 6.74 91 UM

52ND 3A 01M 2.62 4.25 52 VM

23ND 3A 01M 2.03 7.85 23 WM

83ND 4A 21M 7.53 9.96 83 JM

15ND 4A 21M 9.24 8.77 15 LM

46ND 6A 21M 8.05 9.88 46 MM

67ND 8A 61M 9.16 4.601 67 NM

epyTlaeS edoC muideMdiulFerutarepmeT

egnaR

)RBN(elirtiN K,esopruplareneG

sdiulfdesab-muelortepC°57+otC°03-

nobracoroulF)MPF(remotsalE

EerutarepmethgiH

sdiulfcitehtnysro/dnaC°021+otC°52-

enelyhtE)RPE(enelyporP

D sretse-etahpsohP C°021+otC°04-

detanegordyH)RBNH(elirtiN

Hdnadesab-liotsoMsdiulfelbadargedoib

C°061+otC°04-

detalixobraC)RBNX(elirtiN

Jhgih,locylgretaW

sdiulftnetnocretawC°57+otC°03-

erutarepmeTwoL)RBN(elirtiN

QsdiulfesopruplareneG

serutarepmetwoltaC°07+otC°54-



Gas ValvesThe standard gas charging valve fitted to A Series 250 and 350bar piston accumulators is a cored-type gas valve, rated at 350bar. A mechanically opened and closed poppet-type gas valvecartridge, also rated at 350 bar, is available as an option.Both types of charging valve may be used with the Chargingand Gauging Kit illustrated on page 10.

Safety FusesSafety fuses are available on A Series accumulators to preventover-pressurization of gas due to external heat or excesshydraulic pressure. They comprise a housing incorporating adisk which is calibrated to rupture at a pre-determined pressure,to be specified by the customer at the time of ordering. Pleasecontact the factory for further information.

Piston Position SensorsPosition sensors, available as an optional feature, enable awide range of conditions to be monitored. The design illustratedis one of several available to suit differing applications. In thisdesign, non-contacting proximity sensors monitor the travel of asteel rod which bears against the gas side of the piston, indicatingpiston positions specified by the customer. The resulting signalscan be used to switch pumps on or off, or to operate controlvalves in a pre-set sequence.For more information, please contact our EngineeringDepartment with details of the application.

Piston Accumulator Seal KitsSeal kits are available for all A Series accumulator models.When ordering seal kits, please supply the complete modelnumber from the identification plate and specify the fluid typeand the temperature at which the accumulator is to be used.

Seal Kit NumbersThe seal kits listed contain items 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 11.

Parts List1 Shell 8 O-ring2 Hydraulic cap 9 O-ring back-up washer3 Gas cap 10 Gas valve4 Piston 11 Gas valve O-ring5 V-O-ring 12 Gas valve protector6 V-O-ring back-up washers 13 Gas valve protector screw7 PTFE bearing ring (piston)

Standard Cored-TypeGas Valve

Optional Poppet-TypeGas Valve

x = customerspecifieddimension

1

23

4

5 & 67

8 & 9

10

12

13

11

Optional Features and Spares

x

x

ledoM

2A

3A

4A

5A

6A

8A

elirtiNRBN

nobracoroulFremotsalE

MPF

enelyhtEenelyporP

RPE

detanegordyHelirtiNRBNH

elirtiNdetalixobraCRBNX

elirtiN.pmeTwoLRBN

000K0020KR 000E0020KR 000D0020KR 000H0020KR 000J0020KR 000Q0020KR







Catalogue HY07-1240/UK Piston AccumulatorsA SeriesSizing an Accumulator

Calculating Accumulator SizeAccurate calculation of accumulator size requires many factorsto be considered – the working volume of fluid, ambient andmaximum operating temperatures, the working pressure rangeetc. In addition, correction factors must be applied to allow fortemperature compensation between the ambient and gastemperatures, and the consequent effect on precharge pressurein the accumulator. Where the working cycle is sufficiently rapidthat no heat transfer takes place, the process is termedadiabatic. Conversely, where the process takes place at aconstant temperature, it is termed isothermal.

Accumulator Sizing ChartsThe charts shown opposite are used to estimate the size ofpiston accumulator required to provide a given volume of fluiddischarge from the accumulator.

The curves are based on the following formula:

∆V = 0.855 Vo [(P2/P

1)1/n – 1]

(P2 /P1)1/f

where:

∆V = volume of fluid discharged

Vo = Accumulator size

f = charge coefficient

n = discharge coefficient

P2 = maximum system pressure

P1 = minimum system pressure

It is assumed that the gas precharge pressure = 0.9 P1

Isothermal and Adiabatic OperationIn constructing the curves, the following factors have beenassumed.

For isothermal operation eg: slow charge and discharge time,f and n = 1

For adiabatic operation, eg: fast charge and discharge time,f and n = 1.8

Note: The charts provide an estimate of the volume ofaccumulator required to store and release a given volume offluid under specified conditions. In practice, the true charge anddischarge coefficients will depend on the application, and maycause significant variations from the chart results. If in doubt,please contact our engineering department for a more detailedcalculation.

Where the ratio P2/P

1 exceeds 1.9, a fatigue analysis is

necessary. Please contact our engineering department forfurther information.

How to Use the Sizing ChartThese charts are used to find accumulator size Vo

when the

required output ∆V is known.

ExampleRefer to the red lines in the charts opposite.∆V = 6 litresP

2= 170 bar

P1

= 100 bar

Step 1As the accumulator output ∆V is known, choose the appropriatepair of charts from the two sets shown opposite. For outputs upto 50 litres use charts A and B, and for outputs above 50 litresuse charts C and D. In this case, as the required output is 6 litres,charts A and B should be used.

Step 2Calculate P

2/P

1 by dividing the maximum system pressure by

the minimum pressure required to make the machine function.In this case, 170/100 = 1.7

Step 3Using chart A, locate 1.7 on the X-axis and draw a vertical lineto the top of the chart.

Step 4Depending on the cycle time, select the appropriate curve onchart A. For fast cycle times, use the adiabatic curve; for slowcycle times, the isothermal curve should be used. In this case,use the adiabatic curve. (n and f = 1.8)

Step 5On chart A, identify the point at which the vertical line drawn instep 3 crosses the chosen curve (in this case adiabatic) anddraw a horizontal line across to the right hand end of chart B.

Step 6Using the lower X-axis on chart B, locate the requiredaccumulator output (∆V), in this case 6 litres. Draw a verticalline to the top of the chart.

Step 7Locate the point where the vertical line drawn in step 6 crossesthe horizontal line drawn in step 5. Locate the first curve to theright of this intersection.

Step 8Follow the curve selected in step 7 up to the top X-axis (Vo)and read off the required accumulator size, in this case 30 litres.Always round up to the next largest size available; for thisexample, therefore, a 38 litres accumulator should be selected.

SummaryPre-charge 90% of 100 bar = 90 barAdiabatic / Isothermal Adiabatic

Accumulator selected A6ES2310L2K

9P

arker Han

nifin

plc

Cylinder D

ivisionW

atford, Herts.

Catalogue H

Y07-1240/U

KP

iston Accum

ulatorsA

Series

Sizing an A

ccumulator

Accumulator Sizing Chart ∆∆∆∆∆V = 0.1 to 50 LitresChart A

Accumulator Sizing Chart ∆∆∆∆∆V = 10 to 200 LitresChart C

Chart B

Chart D

100 30010∆ V Litres

300

200

250

100

150

8040 50 6020 25 30

50

Vo Litres

P2/P1

1.5 2 2.5 3.5 4 4.5 531

Isothermal

Adiabatic

P2/P1

1.5 1.7 2.5 3.5 4 4.5 531

Isothermal

Adiabatic

300

200

250

100

150

80

605020 25 30 401586 10421

101.000.10 50∆ V Litres

Vo Litres

6∆

∆



Charging and GaugingThe charging and gauging assemblies listed in the table aresuitable for use with both the standard cored-type gas valve andthe optional poppet type. Each kit contains a UCA assemblyincorporating a gas valve, bleed valve and gas chuck, and a 3mlong charging hose with standard nitrogen bottle fittings. The kitincludes 25 bar and 250 bar pressure gauges, to permit easymonitoring of the gas precharge. Full details for use of thecharging and gauging kit are given in Bulletin HY07-1244-T.

Accessories

‘U’ Bolts for Piston Accumulators


Inflation valve

Bleed valve

Adapters

Pressure gauge

Hose

yrotirreT gnittiFelttoBsaG .oNtraP

KU )elam(PSB8/5 20ACU

ecnarF )elamef("41/1x7.12W 40ACU

ynamreG )elamef("41/1x23.42W 10ACU

ylatI )elam("41/1x7.12W 50ACU

SU )elam("41/1x069.0 30ACU

Note: ‘U’ bolts should be mountedwithin the distances shown from theend of the accumulator, to avoiddeformation of the shell.

ledoM

2A

3A

4A

5A

6A

8A

.oNtraP

4-3901EP

1-3901EP

2-3901EP

21-3901EP

3-3901EP

31-3901EP

A B C D EF

niM xaM

1x6M 26 86 07 54 01 52

52.1x8M 69 401 29 06 01 52

57.1x21M 821 041 411 67 01 03

57.1x21M 851 071 041 67 51 04

2x61M 081 691 551 59 02 54

2x61M 432 052 002 59 02 05

Welded lug

F

Mounting surface

F

Piston accumulator‘U’ bolt

A B

C

DE



Hydraulic and Gas Port ModificationsFor accumulators with non-standard ports, specify special gasand/or hydraulic ports and use the appropriate port code frompage 6. A typical model number for an accumulator with ISO 6149hydraulic and gas ports would be:

How to Order

1 Other approvals are available to order – please consult the factory.2 Where a gas port is specified, no gas valve will be supplied.3 For other pressure ratings, please consult the factory.

Model

Approvaltype

Options Designpressure

Designnumber

Hydraulicport

Sealcompound

A

Producttype

Capacity(litres)

Gasport

Code Model Page2 51.4mm bore A Series 53 76.2mm bore A Series 54 102.4mm bore A Series 55 127mm bore A Series 56 146.9mm bore A Series 58 200mm bore A Series 5

Code Design Number Page2 Metric mounting + BSPP

ports (standard) 61 Inch mounting + SAE ports 63 Special ports 6

### Specials(Parker assigned number) –

Code Design Pressure 3 PageL 250 bar 3H 350 bar 3

Hydraulic Port PageSpecification 6(leave blank if standard)

Code Approval type PageE CE approved 1 2

Gas Port PageSpecification 6(where no valve supplied)

Code Capacity Page0005 0.1 – A2 only 50010 0.15 – A2 only 50015 0.25 – A2 only 50029 0.5 – A2 & A3 50058 1.0 – A2, A3, A4, A5 50090 1.5 – A3 only 50116 2.0 – A3, A4, A5 50183 3.0 – A3 only 50231 3.8 – A4, A5, A6 50347 5.7 – A4, A5, A6 50578 9.5 – A4, A5, A6, A8 50924 15 – A6 only 51155 19 – A6, A8 51733 28.5 – A6, A8 52310 38 – A6, A8 52772 45 – A8 only 52888 47 – A8 only 53465 57 – A8 only 54620 76 – A8 only 5

Code Options PageS Cored-type gas valve (standard) 2 7W Cored-type gas valve +

water service 7F Cored-type gas valve +

safety fuse 7G Cored-type gas valve +

water service + safety fuse 7M Poppet-type gas valve 7L Poppet-type gas valve +

water service 7P Poppet-type gas valve +

safety fuse 7R Poppet-type gas valve +

water service + safety fuse 7

Code Seal Compound PageK Nitrile (NBR) 6E Fluorocarbon Elastomer (FPM) 6H Hydrogenated nitrile (HNBR) 6D Ethylene Propylene (EPR) 6J Carboxilated nitrile (XNBR) 6Q Low temperature nitrile 6S Special – please specify 6

A 3 T M 0900 D 2 K EY/EY

Parker Hannifin is the world’s premier supplier of motion and control systemsand solutions, with sales and manufacturing facilities throughout the world.For product information and details of your nearest Parker sales office, visit usat www.parker.com or call free on 00800 2727 5374.


AustriaWiener NeustadtTel: +43 (0)2622 23501Fax: +43 (0)2622 66212

BelgiumNivellesTel: +32 (0)67 280 900Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999

Czech RepublicPragueTel: +420 2 830 85 221Fax: +420 2 830 85 360

DenmarkBallerupTel: +45 4356 0400Fax: +45 4373 8431

FinlandVantaaTel: +358 (0)9 4767 31Fax: +358 (0)9 4767 3200

FranceContamine-sur-ArveTel: +33 (0)450 25 80 25Fax: +33 (0)450 03 67 37


HungaryBudapestTel: +36 (06)1 220 4155Fax: +36 (06)1 422 1525

IrelandDublinTel: +353 (0)1 293 9999Fax: +353 (0)1 293 9900

ItalyCorsico (MI)Tel: +39 02 45 19 21Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40

The NetherlandsOldenzaalTel: +31 (0)541 585000Fax: +31 (0)541 585459

NorwaySkiTel: +47 64 91 10 00Fax: +47 64 91 10 90

PolandWarsawTel: +48 (0)22 863 49 42Fax: +48 (0)22 863 49 44

PortugalLeca da PalmeiraTel: +351 22 9997 360Fax: +351 22 9961 527

SlovakiaRef. Czech Republic

SpainMadridTel: +34 91 675 73 00Fax: +34 91 675 77 11

SwedenSpångaTel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10

United KingdomWarwickTel: +44 (0)1926 317 878Fax: +44 (0)1926 317 855

InternationalEurope

Catalogue HY07-1240/5-UK2M 10/04


AustraliaCastle HillTel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777Fax: +61 (0)2-9899 6184

CanadaMilton, OntarioTel: +1 905-693-3000Fax: +1 905-876-0788

ChinaBeijingTel: +86 10 6561 0520Fax: +86 10 6561 0526

Asia Pacific GroupHong Kong, KowloonTel: +852 2428 8008Fax: +852 2425 6896

IndiaMumbaiTel: +91 22 7907081Fax: +91 22 7907080


Latin America GroupBrazilTel: +55 12 3954-5100Fax: +55 12 3954-5266

South AfricaKempton ParkTel: +27 (0)11-961 0700Fax: +27 (0)11-392 7213


Catalogue HY07-1235/UKFebruary 2004

BAE BladderAccumulatorsFor working pressures up to 330 bar

2 Parker Hannifin PlcCylinder DivisionWatford, Herts.

Catalogue HY07-1235/UK Bladder AccumulatorsSeries BAEIntroduction

Parker Hannifin Corporation . . .is a world leader in the manufacture of components andsystems for motion control. Parker has more than 800 productlines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanicalapplications in some 1200 industrial and aerospace markets.With over 45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturingplants and administrative offices around the world, Parkerprovides its customers with technical excellence and firstclass customer service. Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is

the world's largest supplier of hydraulic actuators andaccumulators for industrial applications.

Catalogues describing our standard products are availablefrom your nearest Parker sales office – please see the rearcover of this catalogue for addresses. Where an applicationdemands a non-standard approach, special products can bedesigned to order – our engineers will be pleased to advise.

Contents PageTechnical Data 2Design Features and Benefits 3Models, Capacities and Dimensions 3Repair Kits and Parts List 4Bladder Compounds 5Charging and Gauging Assemblies 5Fluid Port Adapters 5Mounting Accessories 6How to Order 7

Index PageApprovals 3Bladder Compounds 5Charging and Gauging Assemblies 5Dimensions 3Features and Benefits 3Flow Rates 3Fluid Port Adapters 5Model Numbers 7Mounting Accessories 6Ordering 7Parts List 4Repair Kits 4Technical Data 2

Bladder AccumulatorsLiquids are practically incompressible and therefore cannot beused directly for storing energy. Hydro-pneumatic accumulatorsuse the differing compressibility of liquid and gaseous mediato enable energy to be stored in liquids under pressure.

Parker's hydro-pneumatic bladder accumulators provide ameans of regulating the performance of a hydraulic system.Their simple, compact, design ensures dependableperformance, maximum efficiency and long service life.

Why use a Bladder Accumulator? stores energy under pressure

damps out pump pulsation and flow fluctuations

improves system efficiency

supplements pump delivery

supplies power in emergency

absorbs hydraulic shocks

compensates for pressure changes in cases ofthermal stress

very contaminant tolerant

suitable for use with low-lubricity fluids

fast response times

Safety – cannot disassemble under pressure

Technical DataStandard volumes 1 – 50 litres

Operating pressure Up to 330 bar, with p2 < 4 x p1

where p1 = minimum working pressureand p2 = maximum working pressure

Precharge pressure– energy storage 90% of minimum working pressure– pulsation dampening 60% of maximum working pressure– shock suppression 60% of maximum pump pressure

Std. temperature range Shell and ports: -40°C to +80°CBladder and seals: -15°C to +80°CFor use at other temperatures, pleaseconsult factory.

Fluid type Mineral oil (standard compounds)

Flow Rate The maximum values listed in the selection tableonly apply in the case of vertical installation (fluid port facingdownwards).

Positioning From vertical (fluid port downwards) to horizontal.Note that a minimum clearance of 200mm must be left abovethe gas valve for mounting the charging and gauging assembly– see page 5.


Catalogue HY07-1235/UK Bladder AccumulatorsSeries BAEFeatures and Dimensions

Models, Capacities and Dimensions

Design Features and Benefits

1 ApprovalsParker's BAE bladder accumulators are built to meet therequirements of the European Pressure Directive (PED)97/23/EC. Bladder accumulators are marked with the CE logoand supplied with a declaration of conformity. Hydraulicaccumulators fulfil the safety requirements for all memberstates of the European Union, as well as Iceland, Liechtenstein,Norway and Switzerland.

2 ShellParker's bladder accumulator shells are made from seamlesschrome-molybdenum alloy steel with forged ends, formaximum strength. The standard shell is suitable for use atoperating temperatures down to -40°C.

3 BladderThe absence of dynamic sealing surfaces makes bladderaccumulators tolerant of contamination and particularlysuitable for low-lubricity fluids. Specially formulated for lowpermeability, Parker's bladders retain their high performanceunder a wide range of operating conditions including closedloop operation. Optional bladder compounds are available tosuit all common fluids and operating temperatures.

4 Gas ValveAccurate precharging of a bladder accumulator is the key tolong and reliable service life. All Parker's bladderaccumulators feature a robust gas valve, which is readilyaccessible for maintenance purposes. A charging andgauging assembly, described on page 5, allows prechargingand monitoring to be carried out quickly and easily.

5 Fluids and Fluid PortsParker's bladder accumulators are supplied as standard foruse with hydraulic mineral oil. They are also available for usewith other media, such as bio-degradable hydraulic fluids,non-inflammable liquids, emulsions, etc. Fluid ports are madefrom high-strength alloy steel, for maximum durability. BSPPports are fitted as standard. Other port styles are available.

Notes1 A minimum liquid volume (10% of Vo) must be maintained inside

the accumulator.

In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalogue are subject to change without notice.

All dimensions are subject to manufacturing tolerances.All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.

A

J

H

F

K

B

D

C

d

Adapter shown isan optionalaccessory

SW

G

ledoM emuloVsertiL

ssaMgK

wolfxaMnim/l 1

10EAB 1 5 04220EAB 4.2 01 05440EAB 7.3 5.31 05460EAB 0.6 8.71 05401EAB 2.9 5.92 00902EAB 8.71 64 00942EAB 5.22 35 00923EAB 6.43 37 00905EAB 05 101 009

Axam

Bxam

Cxam DØ dØ F ØG ØH WS

503 05 55 511 63 G3/4 53 15 23535 76 55 511 63 1G 1/4 35 57 05714 76 55 071 63 1G 1/4 35 57 05045 76 55 071 63 1G 1/4 35 57 05955 39 15 322 63 2G 67 101 37478 39 15 322 63 2G 67 101 379001 39 15 322 63 2G 67 101 374931 39 15 322 63 2G 67 101 378391 39 58 322 57 2G 67 101 37

J K

G3/8 8G3/4 01G3/4 01G3/4 01

1G 311G 311G 311G 311G 31


Catalogue HY07-1235/UK Bladder AccumulatorsSeries BAERepair Kits

Repair KitsRepair kits are available for all accumulator models. Whenordering repair kits, please supply the complete model numberfrom the identification plate and specify the fluid type and thetemperature at which the accumulator is to be used. Therepair kit comprises those parts marked with an asterisk in theparts list. For a full description of the compound abbreviations,see 'Bladder Compounds' on page 5.

Parts List (All Models)1* Protective cap2* O-ring – protective cap3* Gas valve4* Gas valve lock nut5* Bladder6 Shell7 Identification plate8 Hydraulic port assembly9* Anti-extrusion ring moulding10 Port spacer11* O-ring – hydraulic port12* O-ring back-up washer13 Fluid port lock nut14* Bleed plug15* Sealing washer for bleed plug* – included in repair kit

Gas Valve Assembly Fluid Port Assembly – All Models

Spare Parts and Repair Kits

5

7

12

3

4

6

9

11

14 & 15

1213

8

10

6

dnuopmoC

RBN RII MPF MDPE OCE

RBN10KB-EAB

yrotcaFtlusnoC

RBN20KB-EABRBN40KB-EABRBN60KB-EABRBN01KB-EABRBN02KB-EABRBN42KB-EABRBN23KB-EABRBN05KB-EAB

ledoM

10EAB20EAB40EAB60EAB01EAB02EAB42EAB23EAB05EAB


Catalogue HY07-1235/UK Bladder AccumulatorsSeries BAEBladder Compounds, Ports and Accessories

Bladder CompoundsParker offers bladders moulded from a variety of compounds,to suit a wide range of fluids and operating temperatures.Unless ordered specially, a Group 1 (nitrile) bladder will besupplied. The table lists the compounds in which bladders areavailable, their recommended operating temperature ranges,

Port SizesFluid ports are made from high-strength alloy steel, for maximumdurability. BSPP ports are fitted as standard. ISO 6149 and SAEports are available on request.

and the types of fluids with which the different materials aregenerally compatible. Note that temperature ranges may varydepending on the fluid used in the hydraulic system. If indoubt, contact the factory with details of the application.

1 Check with fluid supplier that fluid is compatible with nitrile compounds2 For operating temperatures above 80°C, please consult the factory3 For operating temperatures below -20°C, please consult the factory

Charging and Gauging AssemblyThe charging and gauging assembly enables the user tocharge Parker's bladder accumulators with nitrogen, and totest and alter the precharge pressure. It attaches to theaccumulator's gas valve, and can be connected by hose to astandard commercial nitrogen bottle. Each kit contains:

Test and filling apparatus incorporating gas valve key andbleed valve

Filling hose, length 2.5m

Protective case

Gas valve adapters to fit all standard bladder accumulators

25 bar and 250 bar pressure gauges

Parker strongly recommends that the nitrogen bottle usedshould be fitted with a high pressure regulator.

Fluid Port AdaptersA range of adapters is available for use with Parker's bladderaccumulators, to reduce the size of the fluid port. Adapters aresupplied complete with a nitrile O-ring.

sledoMllA–retpadAhtiwylbmessAgniguaGdnagnigrahC

yrotirreT gnittiFelttoBsaG .oNtraP

KU )elam(PSB8/5 20ACU

ecnarF )elamef("41/1x7.12W 40ACU

ynamreG )elamef("41/1x23.42W 10ACU

ylatI )elam("41/1x7.12W 50ACU

SU )elam("41/1x069,0 30ACU

puorG dnuopmoCreddalB muideMdiulF egnaRerutarepmeT

1 )RBN(elirtiNsdiulfdesab-liolarenim,esopruplareneG Cº08+otCº51-

sdiulfBFHdnaAFH 1 Cº55+otCº5+sdiulfCFH 1 Cº06+otCº51-

2 )RBNTL(elirtiNerutarepmeTwoL sdiulfdesab-liolareniM C°57+otC°53-

3 )RII(lytuB sdiulfcitehtnysemosdnaretseetahpsohptsoM Cº08+otCº51-

5 )MPF(remotsalEnobracoroulF sdiulfcitehtnysro/dnaerutarepmethgiH Cº001+otCº02- 2

7 )MDPE(eneiDenelyporPenelyhtE retawdnasdiulfdesab-retseetahpsohP Cº08+otCº04- 3

9 )OCE(enirdyhorolhcipE woldecnahnehtiwsdiulfesopruplareneGecnamrofreperutarepmet Cº08+otCº23- 3

ledoM PPSB 1-9416OSI daerhT-EASEAS

egnalF)2616OSI(

10EAB G3/4 2x72M 21# 11/ 61 21-" a/n

60EAB-20EAB 1G 1/4 2x24M 02# 15/8 21-" isp0006"126edoC

05EAB-01EAB 2G 2x06M 42# 17/8 21-" 11/2 isp0006"26edoC

ledoM troPdiulFdaerhT

retpadAdaerhT .oNtraP

10EAB G3/4 G3/8 1APB

60EAB-20EAB 1G 1/4 G3/4 2APB

05EAB-01EAB 2G 1G 3APB


Catalogue HY07-1235/UK Bladder AccumulatorsSeries BAEAccessories

MountingAccessoriesParker clamp and base bracketsprovide a simple and securemethod of mounting theaccumulator. The clamps andbrackets are galvanised toresist damage from corrosion.Rubber inserts absorb vibrationand resist deformation in hightemperature environments.

1 litre 2.5 - 6 litres 10 - 24 litres 32 - 50 litresClamp Bracket Assembly

Base Bracket Assembly

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

All dimensions are in mm unless otherwise stated

E

B

H

CD

MB

H

CD

M

E

L

M

K

AB

H

CD

M

L

M

KL

M

K

A A

A B C D E F G H K L

321 532 001 071 002 03 062 52 511 71

ledoM lanimoN)l(emuloV .oNtraP

05EAB-01EAB 05-01 1BB

A B C ØD E H K ØL M

831 001 951 411 - 37 03 9 41

881 841 181 861 032 29 04 9 41

072 612 142 622 092 321 04 51 12

ledoM lanimoN)l(emuloV .oNtraP ytitnauQ erugiFeeS

10EAB 11BC

11

20EAB 5.2240EAB 4

2BC 260EAB 601EAB 01

3BC1

302EAB 0242EAB 4223EAB 23

205EAB 05

B

A

C

L

EG

D

K

F

H


Catalogue HY07-1235/UK Bladder AccumulatorsSeries BAE

HydraulicPort

How to Order Bladder Accumulators

Capacity Workingpressure

BladderCompound

ApprovalType

B

Type ofConstruction

(Bottomrepairable– standard

on all sizes)DesignNumber

BAE

ProductType

Code Design Number1 Standard* Design number 1

1 Parker allocated design number.

Code Port Style PageR BSPP – standard 3, 5Y ISO 6149-1 3, 5T SAE Thread 3, 5F SAE Flange 3, 5S Special 3, 5

Code Capacity Page01 1 litre 302 2.5 litres 304 4 litres 306 6 litres 310 10 litres 320 20 litres 324 24.5 litres 332 32 litres 350 50 litres 3

Code Working Pressure Page3 330 bar nominal 2S Special 2

Code Bladder Compound Page1 Nitrile (NBR) – Standard 52 Low temperature nitrile (LT NBR) 53 Butyl (IIR) 55 Fluorocarbon elastomer (FPM) 57 Ethylene propylene diene (EPDM) 59 Epichlorohydrine (ECO) 5

Code Approval Type PageC CE (European Union) 3S Special 3

BAE Series bladder accumulators are supplied with a Declarationof Confirmity in accordance with European Pressure EquipmentDirective 97/23/EC, and with an operating manual and adrawing showing the main dimensions and materials.

Parker Hannifin is the world’s premier supplier of motion and control systems andsolutions, with sales and manufacturing facilities throughout the world. For productinformation and details of your nearest Parker sales office, visit us atwww.parker.com or call free on 00800 2727 5374.


AustriaWiener NeustadtTel: +43 (0)2622 23501 970Fax: +43 (0)2622 23501 977

BelgiumNivellesParc Industriel Sud-Zone IITel: +32 (0)67 280 900Fax: +32 (0)67 280 999

Czech RepublicPragueTel: +420 2 830 85 221Fax: +420 2 830 85 360

DenmarkIshøjTel: +45 4356 0400Fax: +45 4373 8431

FinlandVantaaTel: +358 (0)9 4767 31Fax: +358 (0)9 4767 3200

FranceContamine-sur-ArveTel: +33 (0)450 25 80 25Fax: +33 (0)450 03 67 37


HungaryBudapestTel: +36 (06)1 220 4155Fax: +36 (06)1 422 1525

IrelandCloneeTel: +353 (0)1 801 4010Fax: +353 (0)1 801 4132

ItalyCorsico (MI)Tel: +39 02 45 19 21Fax: +39 02 4 47 93 40

The NetherlandsOldenzaalTel: +31 (0)541 585000Fax: +31 (0)541 585459

NorwaySkiTel: +47 64 91 10 00Fax: +47 64 91 10 90

PolandWarsawTel: +48 (0)22 863 49 42Fax: +48 (0)22 863 49 44

PortugalLeca da PalmeiraTel: +351 22 9997 360Fax: +351 22 9961 527

SlovakiaRef. Czech Republic

SpainMadridTel: +34 91 675 73 00Fax: +34 91 675 77 11

SwedenSpångaTel: +46 (0)8 597 950 00Fax: +46 (0)8 597 951 10

United KingdomWatford (industrial)Tel: +44 (0)1923 492 000Fax: +44 (0)1923 256 059Ossett (mobile)Tel: +44 (0)1924 282 200Fax: +44 (0)1924 282 299

InternationalEurope

Catalogue HY07-1235/3-UK2M 02/04 PD


AustraliaCastle HillTel: +61 (0)2-9634 7777Fax: +61 (0)2-9899 6184

CanadaMilton, OntarioTel: +1 905-693-3000Fax: +1 905-876-0788

ChinaBeijingTel: +86 10 6561 0520Fax: +86 10 6561 0526

Asia Pacific GroupHong Kong, KowloonTel: +852 2428 8008Fax: +852 2425 6896

IndiaMumbaiTel: +91 22 7907081Fax: +91 22 7907080


Latin America GroupBrazilTel: +55 12 3954-5100Fax: +55 12 3954-5266

South AfricaKempton ParkTel: +27 (0)11-392 7280Fax: +27 (0)11-392 7213



Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRHTR Hydraulic

Rotary ActuatorsFor working pressures up to 210 bar

Catalogue HY07-1220/UKNovember 2002

H d li


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRIntroduction

Note: In line with our policy of continuing product improvement, specifications in this catalogue are subject to change without notice.

support high external and thrust loads. All HTR Series rotaryactuators feature a high strength, ductile iron housing, forease of mounting and good shock resistance.

In addition to the standard HTR Series rotary actuatorsdescribed in this catalogue, special designs can beproduced to suit customer requirements. Our engineerswill be pleased to advise on unique designs to meetspecific applications.

HTR Rotary ActuatorsThe HTR Series of heavy duty hydraulic rack and pinion rotaryactuators converts fluid power into rotary motion. They aresuitable for a wide variety of applications, including materialhandling and valve actuation, in industries as diverse asmachine tools, primary metals, mining and oil field equipment.

HTR Series rotary actuators employ conventional tie rodcylinder construction and are rated for use at workingpressures up to 210 bar. The pinion and output shaft aresupported in large tapered roller bearings, allowing the unit to

Contents PageApplications 3Design Features and Benefits 4General Specifications 5Dimensions 6Mounting Styles 8Port Sizes and Positions 8Air Bleeds 8Shaft Options 9Cushioning 10Piston Seals 12Seal Kits 12Filtration 12Stroke Adjusters 12Bearing Load Capacities 13Position Switches 14Feedback Devices 15Ordering Information 16Maintenance and Spare Parts 16Applications Data Check List 17

Index PageAir Bleeds 8Applications

– Data Check List 17– General 3

Bearing Load Capacities 13Construction 4Cushioning 4, 10Design Features and Benefits 4Dimensions 6, 7Feedback Devices 15Filtration 12Maintenance 16Model Numbers 16Mounting Styles 8Ordering Information 16Pistons and Seals 4, 12Port Positions 8Port Sizes 8Position Switches 14Rack and Pinion 4Seals and Seal Kits 4, 12Selection – Check List 17Shaft Options 4, 9Spare Parts 16Specifications 3, 5Stroke Adjusters 12Torque Outputs 5Weights 5

In addition to the HTR Series of rotary actuators featured inthis catalogue, Parker also manufactures a wide range ofother hydraulic and electro-hydraulic actuator products.Linear actuators are available in a wide range of sizes,mounting styles and operating pressures.

Catalogues describing our standard products are availableon request from your nearest Parker sales office – see rearcover for addresses. Where an application demands anon-standard approach, special products can be designedto order – our engineers will be pleased to advise.

Parker Hannifin Corporation . . .is a world leader in the manufacture of components andsystems for motion control. Parker has more than 800product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial andaerospace markets. With over 45,000 employees and some210 manufacturing plants and administrative offices aroundthe world, Parker provides its customers with technicalexcellence and first class customer service.

Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largestsupplier of hydraulic actuators and accumulators forindustrial applications.


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRApplications

Why use a Rotary Actuator?provides uniform torque in both directionssimple, compact designwide range of sizeshigh torque output from a small envelopeno external linkage needed for rotary motionexcellent holding capabilityrotation can be specified to suit applicationwill support radial and thrust loads

SpecificationsMax. non-shockoperating pressure 210 bar

Design pressure 315 bar

Rotational range Standard – 90°, 180°, 360°Special order – any rotationto a maximum of 1800°

Rotational tolerance -0°, +2°

Output torque at 210 bar 100 – 68000Nm

Min. operating pressure 5 bar

Max. angular backlash –HTR.9 – HTR10 30 minutesHTR15 – HTR150 15 minutesHTR300 – HTR600 10 minutes

Self-energizing, wear-compensating polyurethanepiston seals

Typical Rotary Actuator Applications

Power GenerationGas Turbines

– Diverter flap valvesNuclear

– Fail-safe valve operation, typically using different sizesof rack and piston with one side 'pushing' against anaccumulator

Steel and Aluminium Mills– coil boxes in rolling mills, using a back-and-forth rolling

action to reduce ingots to slabs, then strips– walking beam, for moving material– pickling process in tube mill, for immersion/agitation of

tubes in sulphuric acid tank– ladle turrets on continuous-casting process, with

slotted mounts to allow for thermal expansion– crust breaking

Safety Systems– fire door closure, using a spring-return actuator

cylinder and fitted with high temperature seals

Petro-Chemical Industries– process control valves

Satellite/Aeronautical– pre-launch disconnection of monitoring and loading

equipment

Tyre Industry– drop valves for rubber mixing/processing, using high

temperature seals

Marine Engineering– trim and drain valves– missile tube closure systems

Handling Systems– self-unloading mechanisms for bulk carriers

General Engineering– dumping, indexing, bending, screwing, clamping &

toggle clamping

Optional FeaturesHTR Series rotary actuators are available with a wide range ofoptions including port positions, cushioning, different sealtypes and mounting styles. Feedback devices and proximitysensors can be fitted to provide fine control of position andvelocity.

Rotary Actuator Application GuideFull guidance for the selection and application of rotaryactuators is available in the Rotary Actuator Application Guide– please ask for catalogue no. 1230.


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRDesign Features and Benefits

5

6

3

8

9

1 Rack and PinionMaximum strength and shock resistance result from the use ofthrough-hardened chrome alloy steel for the rack and for theone-piece pinion and output shaft. Gears are packed withmolybdenum disulphide grease on assembly, to reduce wearand prolong gear life under conditions of extreme pressure.

2 Bronze Rack BearingsGenerous support for the rack is provided by a bronze rackbearing, reducing wear and extending pinion life. The bronzerack bearing, a standard feature on HTR15 models and above,is available as an option on smaller units.

3 Gear HousingHigh strength ductile iron provides resistance to shock loadsunder the most arduous operating conditions. Four mountingholes in both the front and rear faces permit flexibility inmachine design, with base and pilot mounting styles availableas options.

4 Tapered Roller BearingsHigh capacity tapered roller bearings providerigid support for the pinion and output shaft.Generous size and capacity allow the bearings towithstand external radial and thrust loads, even under highcycling applications. Correct bearing preload duringmaintenance is easily achieved by torque adjustment of thethreaded retainer ring on the rear face of the rotary actuator,eliminating the inconvenience of shims and reducing the riskof damage to the bearing through incorrect adjustment.

5 Shaft OptionsA plain male shaft with two keyways, the most widely usedstyle of shaft, is supplied as standard with all HTR Series rotaryactuators. The keyways are set at the 12- and 6-o'clockpositions at mid-stroke for ease of positioning and assembly,and are as large as possible to ensure maximum strength.Shaft options include a female shaft with keyway, and maleand female splined types. Both single and double shaftoptions are available, providing the greatest possible flexibilityfor the machine designer.

9 Floating Cushion BushesCloser tolerances – and therefore more effective cushioning –are permitted by the use of floating cushion bushes. Lifting ofthe bronze cushion bush minimises fluid restriction to the startof the return stroke, allowing full pressure to be applied overthe whole area of the piston, to provide full power and rapidcycle times.

6 Tie Rod CylindersProven tie rod construction, using standard cylinder boresizes, guarantees reliability and ease of maintenance for thehydraulic cylinders which drive the rack and pinion. Heavy-walled alloy steel tubing is micro-finished for long piston andseal life, while tie rods are drawn from alloy steel, withprecision rolled threads for high strength and resistance tofatigue.

7 Pistons and SealsRugged one-piece steel pistons (not HTR.9 or HTR1.8) arefitted as standard with polyurethane seals and PTFE wearrings, preventing metal-to-metal contact. The piston seals areself-compensating for long life and reduced maintenance and,subject to access, seals and wear rings can be inspected orreplaced without removing the actuator from the machine.

8 CushioningProgressive deceleration is available by specifying cushionsfor either or both directions of rotation. The self-centringcushions are adjustable, permitting exact matching to loadand speed conditions, and offer extended machine life withreduced noise and shock.

2

1

4

7


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRBenefits and General Specifications

Advantages of Parker'sRack and Pinion Rotary Actuators

Cost-effectiveness – especially above 90°, where linearactuators need increasingly intricate linkages to generaterotary motion.

Simplicity – a rotary actuator with a hollow, or female,shaft can replace support bearings and pillow blocks, dueto the high load capacity of the bearings.

Resistance to Hostile Environments – no extending/retracting sealing surfaces exposed to abrasive orcorrosive substances. Special materials and coatingsensure long life in arduous usage.

Ease of Maintenance – servicing of pistons and seals canbe carried out with the actuator in place on the machine,subject to access.

Leakage Resistance – pressurized fluid is remote fromthe output side of the mechanism; piston seals are the onlydynamic seals subject to system pressure.

Long Life – the rack/pinion/bearing assembly is packedwith molybdenum grease on assembly and does not comeinto contact with hydraulic fluid.

Premium Quality – every Parker rotary actuator is prooftested before shipping.

General Specification – Volumes

General Specification Torque Outputs, Pressure Ratings and Weights

1 Continuous duty – >107 cycles 2 Intermittent duty – <104 cycles 3 Static duty – maximum rating (no dynamic loads)

ledoM

elgniSkcaR

elbuoDkcaR

9.RTH

8.1RTH

7.3RTH

5.7RTH

5RTH

01RTH

51RTH

03RTH

22RTH

54RTH

57RTH

051RTH

003RTH

006RTH

mc 3

repeerged

mc 3

repnaidar

mc-tnemecalpsiD 3

º09noitatoR

º081noitatoR

º063noitatoR

1.0 6 9 91 73

2.0 21 91 73 47

4.0 52 04 08 951

9.0 15 97 951 813

6.0 33 15 201 502

1.1 56 201 502 014

6.1 39 541 192 285

2.3 581 192 285 4611

5.2 541 722 554 019

1.5 092 554 019 9181

4.8 084 457 8051 6103

71 069 8051 6103 2306

23 5581 3192 7285 35611

56 7073 3285 54611 09232

ledoM

elgniSkcaR

elbuoDkcaR

9.RTH

8.1RTH

7.3RTH

5.7RTH

5RTH

01RTH

51RTH

03RTH

22RTH

54RTH

57RTH

051RTH

003RTH

006RTH

ytuDsuounitnoC 1 ytuDtnettimretnI 2 ytuDcitatS 3

euqroTmN

erusserPrab

euqroTmN

erusserPrab

euqroTmN

erusserPrab

08 061 001 012 001 012

061 061 002 012 002 012

062 521 093 091 024 012

045 031 008 002 058 012

033 021 594 081 565 012

007 031 0001 091 0311 012

069 511 0441 571 0071 012

0002 021 0003 091 0043 012

069 08 0441 511 0071 041

0002 08 0003 021 0043 041

0054 011 0576 561 0058 012

0059 511 00241 071 00071 012

00031 08 00591 021 00043 012

00082 58 00024 031 00086 012

gk–sthgieW

º09noitatoR

º081noitatoR

º063noitatoR

5 6 9

7 9 11

31 41 71

61 91 42

71 81 22

02 52 03

52 72 23

04 44 35

72 03 63

54 94 16

09 001 021

641 761 602

543 283 414

505 375 907


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRDimensions HTR.9 to HTR10


HTR.9 to HTR5Single Rack Models

HTR1.8 to HTR10Double Rack Models

Dimensions – with Face Mount and Male Keyed Shaft

ledoM eroB

9.RTH2.22

8.1RTH

7.3RTH

1.835.7RTH

5RTH

01RTH

51RTH8.05

03RTH

22RTH5.36

54RTH

57RTH6.101

051RTH

003RTH4.251

006RTH

noitatoRA

.xam

º09 091º081 732º063 333º09 752º081 333º063 464º09 982º081 273º063 265º09 604º081 345º063 618º09 614º081 355º063 228º09 415º081 207º063 3701º09 497º081 1111º063 9471

B C dC sC D E31.0±

F31.0±

dF31.0±

sF31.0±

G

67 5.29 - 98 07 06 - 03

001 5.331 - 201 57 09 - 54

001 5.251 - 201 57 521 - 5.26

721 -- 571

871 051 -- 05

585.602 - 071 -

721 -- 671

871 051 -- 05

58312 - 071 -

191 -- 452

612 561 -- 511

541723 - 092 -

503 -- 783

304 033 -- 521 591

5.674 - 053 - 571

M

AA/2

S

T

V

Relief Valve

PØ

ED

E/2

J (Both Sides)U

G

F

0.4mmRadius

KØ N

O

LR

Square

C

B/2

B

M

AA/2

ST

V

Relief Valve

PØ

ED

E/2

J (Both Sides)U

G

F0.4mm Radius

KØ N

O

LR

Square

C

B/2

B

2V


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRDimensions HTR15 to HTR600


Dimensions – with Face Mount and Male Keyed Shaft

HTR30 to HTR600Double Rack Models

HTR15 to HTR300Single Rack Models

ledoM eroB

9.RTH2.22

8.1RTH

7.3RTH

1.835.7RTH

5RTH

01RTH

51RTH8.05

03RTH

22RTH5.36

54RTH

57RTH6.101

051RTH

003RTH4.251

006RTH

JK

00.0+20.0-

L M9P

N O P R S TU

)PPSB(V

52.1x8M31x

22 33 6 5.81 0.0+1.0- 52 52 54 01 31 G1/4 42

5.1x01M61x

82 84 8 42 0.0+2.0- 83 83 46 31 81 G1/4 53

5.1x01M61x

44 66 21 93 0.0+2.0- 05 54 46 31 81 G1/4 14

57.1x21M91x

45 68 61 84 0.0+2.0- 06 37 67 61 81 G1/2 26

57.1x21M91x

45 68 61 84 0.0+2.0- 06 37 98 61 81 G1/2 26

5.2x02M03x

67 511 22 76 0.0+2.0- 58 59 721 62 12 G3/4 98

5.3x03M84x

521 091 23 411 0.0+2.0- 251 561 191 23 23 1G 031

M

AA/2

S

T

V

Relief Valve

PØ

ED

E/2

J (Both Sides)U

G

Fs

0.4mmRadius

KØ N

O

LR

Square

Cs

B/2

B

M

AA/2

ST

Relief Valve

PØ

ED

E/2

J (Both Sides)U

G

Fd0.4mm Radius

KØ N

O

LR

Square

Cd

B/2

B

2V


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTR

Base and Pilot MountingsHTR Series rotary actuators are available with the options offace, base or pilot mounting styles, to suit the requirements ofdifferent applications. Mounting dimensions for the face


mounting styles are shown with other major dimensions onpages 6 and 7. The equivalent dimensions for base and pilotmounting styles are shown in the table.

Base Mounting

Port Sizes and PositionsThe standard port style for HTR Series rotary actuators is aBSP (parallel) port, but NPTF, SAE, and metric port styles toDIN 3852/1 and ISO 6149/1 are also available. The relevantsizes of port for each model of rotary actuator are shown in thetable.

Ports will be supplied in position 1, as shown in the diagram,unless a different position is specified on the order. Ports areavailable in positions 2, 3 and 4 at no extra cost; position 5 isavailable as an extra cost option.

Air BleedsThese may be fitted in positions unoccupied by ports.

+0-0.05mm

Mountings, Ports and Air Bleeds

Pilot Mounting

3

2

1

4

3 1

2

5

5

2

1 3

4

3

2

1

5

5

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

22&51RTH

54&03RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

gnitnuoMesaB gnitnuoMtoliP

A B C D E F

06 07 31x52.1x8M 1.64 526.74 5.6

57 57 61x5.1x01M 7.66 576.66 5.6

57 57 61x5.1x01M 2.67 520.37 5.6

001 051 91x57.1x21M 2.301 059.701 01

001 051 91x57.1x21M 4.601 059.701 01

541 561 03x5.2x02M 5.361 007.931 01

042 033 84x5.3x03M 2.832 052.222 21

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

22&51RTH

54&03RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

PPSBcirteM

OSI&NIDEAS FTPN

G1/4 5.1x41M 9/ 61 )6EAS(81- 1/4

G1/4 5.1x41M 9/ 61 )6EAS(81- 1/4

G1/4 5.1x41M 9/ 61 )6EAS(81- 1/4

G1/2 5.1x22M 3/4 )8EAS(61- 1/2

G1/2 5.1x22M 3/4 )8EAS(61- 1/2

G3/4 2x72M 11/ 61 )21EAS(21- 3/4

1G 2x33M 15/ 61 )61EAS(21- 1

F

0.4mm Radius

E

0.4mm x 45°Chamfer

D

AA/2

B

B/2

C




Shaft OptionsKeyed and splined shaft designs are available for the HTRSeries rotary actuators, in both male and female forms. Thestandard male, twin key shaft style is illustrated with othermajor dimensions on pages 6 and 7, while other shaft optionsare shown below. All the shaft options illustrated are shown inthe mid-stroke position.

Male Splined Shaft to DIN/ISO 14Male Splined Shaft

Female Keyed Shaft to DIN 6885Female Keyed Shaft

Female Splined Shaft to DIN/ISO 14Female Splined Shaft

+0.4

Shaft Options

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

03&51RTH

54&22RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

L M N11a

P Rfo.oNsenilps

33 22 22 81 5 6

84 23 82 32 6 6

66 44 24 63 7 8

68 85 45 64 9 8

68 85 45 64 9 8

511 67 27 26 21 8

091 521 521 211 81 01

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

03&51RTH

54&22RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

A7H

B9P

C D E

61 5 6.02 6.47 4.52

22 6 6.72 4.89 1.83

23 01 6.83 4.89 5.44

84 41 6.55 4.521 0.37

84 41 6.55 4.521 0.37

27 02 8.18 9.881 2.59

521 23 8.931 2.303 1.561

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

03&51RTH

54&22RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

D F G H01H

J7H

Kfo.oNsenilps

6.47 71 61 61 31 5.3 6

4.89 32 22 22 81 5 6

4.89 92 92 82 32 6 6

4.521 94 05 84 24 8 8

4.521 94 05 84 24 8 8

9.881 37 67 27 26 21 8

2.303 621 721 521 211 81 01

L

DPinion &

Keyway Length

A – Bore

C

M

N

R

PMounting Faceof Unit

E – Dia. Pinion Journal(All shaft styles)

B – Keyway

0.4mm Radius

F

K

J

H

D

G



Cushions andCushion Adjustment LocationCushioning is recommended as a means of controlling thedeceleration of masses. Machine life is extended as a result ofthe reduced shock, permitting faster cycle times with lowerlevels of noise. Cushions are recommended for high kineticenergy applications and/or where the full rotation of theactuator is being used. They are available as an option on allHTR Series rotary actuators, for one or both rotations, and donot affect the actuator's envelope or mounting dimensions. Forthe HTR Series rotary actuator, the standard angle ofcushioning is 20° (0.349 rads).

Each cushion is adjustable individually,allowing cushion performance to bematched to the application. Thepositions of cushion adjusters, relativeto port positions, are shown in the table– numbers relate to the diagram of portpositions on page 8.

* Single rack models only

Note: Where cushioning is required on double rack units,the High Performance Cushion option described on page11 should be specified.

FormulaeFor a load that moves in the horizontal plane, only the kineticenergy need be considered. If the load is to move vertically,then the potential energy change of the load during cushioningmust also be taken into account. Both conditions are describedby the following equations. The resulting figure for energy tobe absorbed can then be applied to the graph of CushionEnergy Absorption Capacity, to identify a rotary actuator withadequate cushion capacity. Note: the graph of CushionEnergy Absorption Capacity should only be used for initialsizing. For accurate sizing, please contact the factory.

For masses moving horizontally:

E = Jm ω2

For masses moving downwards:

E = Jm ω2 + mgRθ

For masses moving upwards:

E = Jm ω2 - mgRθ

Where:E = energy to be absorbed, JoulesJm = rotational mass moment of inertia, kgm2

ω = rotational velocity of load, rads/secm = mass of load, kgg = acceleration due to gravity, 9.81m/s2

R = radius of rotation, mθ = angle of cushioning, radians (0.349 rads = 20°)

ExampleP = 100 barm = 200 kgR = 0.2 mω = 6 rpmStandard cushions = 20° = 0.349 rads.

E = Jm ω2 + mgRθ

Note that cushion performance will be affected by the use ofhigh water content fluids. Please consult the factory for details.

The energy absorption capacity of the cushion decreases withdrive pressure, which in normal circuits is the relief valvepressure.

E = 1.6 + 136.9

E = 138.5 Joules

From the graph of Cushion Energy Absorption Capacity, it canbe seen that an HTR7.5 (double rack unit) is capable ofabsorbing this energy where the High Performance Cushionoption is specified. An HTR15 (single rack unit) is also capableof absorbing this energy.

E= x 200x0.22 x 6x

]12 ] 2π 2

60 )]]

Cushioning

12

12

12

12

(+ (200 x 9.81 x 0.2 x 0.349)

troPnoitisoP

noihsuCnoitisoP

1 2

2 3

3 2

*4 3

5 2

Floating Cushion Bush

Cushion SpearCushion Adjustment Needle



Cushion Energy Absorption Capacity All Cushion Options

High Performance CushionsThe High Performance Cushion option can only be specifiedon double rack rotary actuators. Double rack rotary actuatorscan achieve very high torques, which need to be deceleratedat the end of the movement. This cushion energy is absorbedefficiently by the use of High Performance Cushions. Externalpiping ensures that during cushioning the maximumdeceleration torque is available. External interconnectingpipework for the High Performance Cushion is not suppliedwith the rotary actuator.

OperationThe work ports of a standard directional valve are connecteddirectly to ports C-1 and C-2 of the rotary actuator, as shown.Port A-1 is connected directly to A-2, and B-1 is connecteddirectly to B-2. When pressure is applied directly to port C-1(clockwise shaft rotation), fluid is also directed through line Ato the other rack. Exhaust flow from B-1 and B-2 is directedthrough the cushion bush and cushion adjustment screw untilthe cushion spear closes off the main passage. The total flowfrom both end caps is then directed across one cushionadjustment screw, equalizing back pressure and improvingcushion performance. Pressurizing C-2 and exhausting C-1reverses the operation.

Notes1. Pipework between A-1 and A-2, and B-1 and B-2 should

be kept to a minimum to reduce the inertia of the fluid.Fluid flow should be less than 5m/s.

2. Connection ports will have the same specification as theworking ports.

Cushioning

C-2

B-1

A-1B-2

C-1

A-2

2-C&1-CstroPkroWnoitisoPtroP

retsujdAnoihsuCnoitisoP

stroPnoitcennoC2-B,1-B,2-A,1-A

noitisoPtroP

1 2 3

2 3 1

3 2 1

5 2 3

Port PositionsRotary actuators with High Performance Cushions differ fromstandard double rack units only in their port positions – allexternal dimensions of the units remain unaltered.

Note: Cushion performance may be affected by the addition of astroke limiter. Please consult the factory in critical applications.

0 50 100 150

20

200

1000

40

400

3000

30

100

2000

50

300

5000

700

En

erg

y C

apac

ity

(Jo

ule

s)

HTR600 High Performance Cushion

HTR150 High Performance Cushion

HTR300

HTR75

HTR30 High Performance CushionHTR45 High Performance Cushion

HTR15, HTR22

HTR7.5 High Performance CushionHTR10 High Performance Cushion

HTR3.7, HTR5HTR1.8 High Performance Cushion

HTR.9

Drive Pressure (bar)




Piston Seals and Seal KitsThe Wear-Pak piston fitted as standard to all HTR Series rotaryactuators employs a polyurethane seal to contain hydraulicpressure, and a PTFE wear ring (not for HTR.9 or HTR1.8) toprevent metal-to-metal contact. For higher temperatures or usewith synthetic fluids, FPM seals should be specified for thepiston; for water glycol or high water content fluids, nitrile sealsare available.

FiltrationEffective filtration is vital to the long life and satisfactoryperformance of a rotary actuator. If the piston seals of a rackand pinion rotary actuator are worn or damaged, fluid whichleaks past the piston will enter the gear housing.

In the event of internal leakage into the gear housing, thepressure relief valve will ensure that the housing does not

length. On double rack units with cushions, the cushion isfitted to the upper rack and the stroke limiter to the lower. Theincrease in build length, for both single and double rack units,is shown as dimension A in the table. Cushion performancemay be affected by the addition of a stroke limiter. Pleaseconsult the factory in critical applications.

Stroke LimitersFine control of the end of travel points of the rotary actuatorcan be obtained by specifying stroke limiters. These operate byreducing the maximum travel of the actuator within presetlimits of either 5° or 30° in each direction. Adjustment withinthis range is infinitely variable and may be carried out by theuser. Several types of stroke limiter are available – the designillustrated is suitable for applications requiring infrequentadjustment.

Stroke Limiters and Cushions5° stroke limiters may be combined with the cushioningdevices shown on page 10. 30° stroke limiters cannot becombined with cushions.

The addition of stroke limiters requires an increase in build

become over-pressurized. Any external leakage from thegear housing, therefore, is indicative of worn or damagedpiston seals and these should be examined and, if necessary,replaced, at the earliest opportunity.

Note: it is essential that all hydraulic lines are thoroughlyflushed before connection to the rotary actuator.

Piston Seals, Seal Kits and Stroke Limiters

1 FPM seals also include a back-up washer.2 The part numbers shown are for HTR.9 seals. For other seals,

replace '.9' with the appropriate size. For example, a FPM seal kit fora HTR15 will be PSKHTR15V.

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

03&51RTH

54&22RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

laeSssalC

slairetaMmuideMdiulF egnaRerutarepmeT edoCtiKlaeS noitartliF

laeS gniRraeW

dradnatS enahteruyloP EFTPdelliF,esopruplareneG

sdiulfdesab-muelortepC°08+otC°03- 9.RTHKSP 2

OSI41/71ssalCssenilnaelC

leveL

V MPF EFTPdelliFro/dnaerutarepmeThgiH

sdiulFcitehtnySC°051+otC°02- V9.RTHKSP 2

W elirtiNdetalixobraC EFTPdelliF,locylGretaW

sdiulFtnetnoCretaWhgiHC°08+otC°0 W9.RTHKSP 2

tnemtsujdAnruTlluFrep

htgneLdliuBdesaercnI-xamA BwercStekcoSxeH

.ninoihsuCtuohtiWretimiL°5 noihsuChtiWretimiL°5 noihsuCtuohtiWretimiL°03

°0.4 31 22 91 5/ 23

°3.3 61 92 92 1/4

°5.2 61 92 92 1/4

°0.2 22 64 14 3/8

°0.2 22 64 14 3/8

°0.2 56 59 09 erauqSretimiL°2.1 09 451 A/N

B hex

A

Lock Nut

Thread Seal

PTFE Wear Band

Steel Piston

Polyurethane seal 1



Dynamic Bearing Load Capacities vs. Operating Pressure

Bearing Load CapacitiesThe radial and thrust loads and overhung moments which canbe supported by each model of HTR rotary actuator atdifferent operating pressures are shown in the table. Thesefigures should be read in conjunction with the notes below.

Notes1 Static bearing load capacities = dynamic values x 1.5

2 Standard male shafts provide a 4:1 design factor. At theoperating conditions marked *, a smaller design factor isachieved and the values listed are 'bearing' momentcapacities. For higher capacities, larger shaft sizes areavailable – please consult the factory for details.

Bearing Load Capacity

ledoM

9.RTH

8.1RTH

7.3RTH

5.7RTH

5RTH

01RTH

51RTH

03RTH

22RTH

54RTH

57RTH

051RTH

003RTH

006RTH

RNkdaoLlaidaR L @gniraeBrep RNkdaoLtsurhT T @ Rm.NktnemoMgnuhrevO L @Ax

rab07 rab041 rab012 rab07 rab041 rab012 rab07 rab041 rab012

6.61 2.51 9.31 0.21 5.11 1.11 82.0 52.0 32.0

9.71 9.71 9.71 4.21 4.21 4.21 03.0 03.0 *03.0

3.62 2.22 3.81 1.61 0.51 9.31 17.0 95.0 94.0

0.03 0.03 0.03 0.71 0.71 0.71 08.0 08.0 *08.0

1.43 2.03 3.62 9.81 9.71 0.71 78.0 77.0 76.0

1.83 1.83 1.83 9.91 9.91 9.91 79.0 79.0 79.0

4.16 4.45 4.74 7.45 6.25 4.05 58.2 35.2 02.2

4.86 4.86 4.86 9.65 9.65 9.65 81.3 81.3 81.3

9.75 4.74 - 7.35 4.05 - 96.2 02.2 -

4.86 4.86 - 9.65 9.65 - 81.3 81.3 -

7.27 8.44 8.61 6.37 6.26 5.15 73.7 45.4 07.1

7.001 7.001 7.001 6.48 6.48 6.48 02.01 *02.01 *02.01

3.921 4.66 4.3 2.701 7.78 3.86 35.91 20.01 25.0

2.291 2.291 2.291 7.621 7.621 7.621 40.92 40.92 *40.92

Radial Load RLA

Axial Load RT



Position SwitchesAccurate end of rotation indication can be obtained byspecifying position switches. These solid state, inductive-typeswitches are fitted to the caps of the hydraulic cylinders, wherea non-contacting probe senses the presence of a ferrousspear attached to the piston. Position switches are notavailable on rotary actuators fitted with stroke limiters.

Both flange mounted (EPS-6 and EPS-7) and threaded type(PS201) position switches are available. Both types of switchcan be used to operate relay coils, or as direct input to a PLC.All switches incorporate short-circuit protection. The faultcondition must be corrected and the power disconnected inorder to reset the switch, preventing automatic restarts.

Two LEDs (in the switch or in the connector) indicate powerand switch status.

CE MarkingThe position switches fitted by Parker are CE marked to certifythat they meet the requirements of the EC Directive 89/336/EECfor electromagnetic compatibility.

DC 3-wire Sensor (PS201, 202 and 203)Wiring Diagram

Position Switches

DC 4-wire Sensor (EPS-6)Wiring Diagram

AC/DC 2-wire Sensor (EPS-7)Wiring Diagram

Dimensions

Dimensions

Note: Connectors not supplied. Please order as an accessory.

DCACL2

L1 or (-/+)

or (+/-)Load

N.O.

1

2

Green

White

Black3L1

DCor (+/-)

L2 or (-/+)LoadUS 3 White

1 Green

2 Black AC

Black

White

Red

N.O.

N.O.

2

3

15

Load Source

Load Sink

Load Source

Load Sink4

Orange

E02

5 Black

2 Red

4 Orange

1 White

(+)

(-)(+)

(-)

1

34

+

Load4

3

1 Brown

Black

Blue

)

)

) -

2

Output, A–

+

-

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

03&51RTH

54&22RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

302dna202,102SP

A B

yrotcaftlusnoC

23

36

36

68

97

76

88

epyTrosneS 6-SPE 302dna202,102SP 7-SPE

rotcennoC 060F10A000501 110SP 060F10A000301

noitcnuFtuptuO nepoyllamron,NPN/PNP nepoyllamron,PNP nepoyllamroN

egatloVgnitarepO CDV03–01 CDV03–01zH06–04@CAV052–02

CDV003–02

tnerruCgnitarepO Am002< Am002 Am003<

erutarepmeTgnitarepO Cº07+otCº52- Cº08+otCº52- C°07+otC°52-

ssalCnoitcetorP 76PI 92506CEIot76PI 76PI

noitatneirOrotcennoC gnihctiws,tcerid tnemtsujdahctiwsnotnedneped gnihctiws,tcerid

langiS rosnesni rotcennocni rosnesni

ledoM

8.1&9.RTH

5.7&7.3RTH

01&5RTH

03&51RTH

54&22RTH

051&57RTH

006&003RTH

7-SPEdna6-SPE

C D

501

25

56

56

26

65

34

38

D

C

B

A


Catalogue HY07-1220/UK Rotary ActuatorsSeries HTRFeedback Devices

Feedback DevicesA linear feedback device or a position sensor can be suppliedfor continual monitoring of the rotational range.

The linear feedback device is built into the cap of the cylinderand registers the position of the rack, and thus indirectly thepinion. This type of position feedback is offered when therotational range is greater than 355°.

The position sensor is mounted at the back of the housing anddirectly registers the position of the pinion.

Linear Feedback DevicesLinear feedback devices are supplied with an optionalultrasonic feedback system. Other types of feedback deviceswith alternative analogue or digital output signals are availableon request. Please consult the factory for further information.

1 Available as an accessory – please specify in order

NoteWhen considering rotary actuator applications using a sensor,it should be borne in mind that rack and pinion actuatorshave a small amount of backlash. This can be overcome byuse of a special hydraulic circuit. Please consult the factory fordetails.

Support Bearing

Waveguide Tube

Sensing Coil andElectronics

Permanent Magnet

Base Plate

PotentiometerWatertight

Cover

Coupling

Angular Position TransducerAngular Position Transducers are supplied with a rotarypotentiometer, which requires user input. Integral signalconditioning is also available as an option.

Technical DataPotentiometerType: single turn precision servo-mount

with conductive plastic elementPort: Connector LXES-0033 1

Effective mechanical angle: 360°Effective electrical angle: 355° ±2°Resistance: 5 kΩResistance tolerance: ±20%Linearity: ±0.075%Maximum voltage: 42V DCMaximum current: 10 mARecommended operatingcurrent: < 1 µATemperature rating: -40°C to +100°CProtection class: IP65

Potentiometer with Integral Signal ConditioningType: single turn precision servo-mount

with conductive plastic elementPort: Connector LXES-0033 1

Effective mechanical angle: 360°Effective electrical angle: 90° or 345°Output signal: 0 or 4 to 20 mACurrent: 30 mALoad resistance: 0-500 ΩLinearity: ±0.1% (345°)

±3% (90°)Repeatability: 0.007°Operating voltage: 24V DCTemperature rating: -25°C to +70°CProtection class: IP65



ModelCode

Cushions PortType

PortLocation

Rotation

xxxx

Options

HTR

ProductType

Code Seal Page- Polyurethane –

standard 12V FPM 12W Carboxilated nitrile 12

Code Cushioning1 PageNone – standard 10

1 Clockwise rotation 5 102 Anti-clockwise rotation 5 103 Both directions 5 108 High Performance Cushion 109 Special – add to 'Options' 10

Code Location Page1-4 Side – specify positions 1-4 85 End 89 Special – add to 'Options' 8

StrokeLimiters

Ordering and Maintenance Information

Notes:1 Viewed from shaft end2 Double rack models only3 Not available with end ports4 Not available with end ports and cushions5 Only available on single rack units

Maintenance and Spare PartsFull instructions for the maintenance of HTR Series rotaryactuators, together with a complete list of the spares available,is contained in the HTR Series Rotary Actuator MaintenanceBulletin. Please ask for bulletin no. 1220/M1-GB.

Code Stroke limiter1 PageNone – standard 12

A 0-5° Clockwise rotation 3 12B 0-5° Anti-clockwise rotation 3 12C 0-5° Both rotations 3 12D 0-30° Clockwise rotation 4 12E 0-30° Anti-clockwise rotation 3 12F 0-30° Both rotations 4 12X Special – add to 'Options' 12

MountingStyle

ShaftStyle

Seals

D

DesignSeries

Code Type Page4 BSPP – standard 85 Metric – to DIN 3852/1 86 Metric – to ISO 6149/1 81 SAE straight thread 82 NPTF 89 Special – add to 'Options' 8

Code Style PageH Male, single ended, double key –

standard 6G Female, double key 9K Male, double ended, double key 9L Female spline 9M Male spline, single ended 9N Male spline, double ended 12X Special – add to 'Options' 12

Code Mounting PageC Face – standard 6D Base 8T Pilot 8

Code Rotation Page090 90° 3180 180° 3360 360° 3Other – please specify

Code Bore Page.9 22.2 mm 51.8 22.2 mm 53.7 38.1 mm 57.5 38.1 mm 55 38.1 mm 510 38.1 mm 515 50.8 mm 530 50.8 mm 522 63.5 mm 545 63.5 mm 575 101.6mm 5150 101.6 mm 5300 152.4 mm 5600 152.4 mm 5

Code Option Page1000 Actuator model code defined above

– Standard1111 Actuator model code with special options:

eg: Air Bleeds – specify positions 1-4 8Position switches 14Feedback device 15Bronze rack bearing (HTR.9-10) 4

Please attach full details of Special Options required



(To be completed when requesting further information)

Contact InformationName ................................................................................................. Job Title ...........................................................................

Company .........................................................................................................................................................................................

Address ............................................................................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................... Post Code ........................................................................

Telephone .............................. Fax .................................................... E-mail ...............................................................................

Application Details (see page)

1 Rotation – ° (3) .........................................................................

2 Operating Pressure – bar .........................................................

3 Operating Temperature – °C (12) .............................................

4 Design Torque – Nm (5) ...........................................................

5 External Bearing Load – kN (13) ..............................................

6 Rotation Time – sec. ................................................................

7 Rotational Acceleration – rad/s2 ...............................................

8 Number of rotations per day – ..................................................

9 Mass – kg .................................................................................

10 Lever length – mm ...................................................................

11 Moment of Inertia – kgm2 .........................................................

12 Plane of movement – horizontal/vertical ...................................

13 Brief Description of Application(Please supply a sketch if necessary)..................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................

Please photocopy, complete and forward/fax to:Parker Hannifin plc.Greycaine Road, Watford, Herts. WD24 7QA, UKTel. 01923 492000 Fax: 01923 210562e-mail: [email protected]

Actuator Details (see page)

14 Mounting Style (8) .....................................................................

..................................................................................................

15 Type of Shaft (9) .......................................................................

..................................................................................................

16 Port Type and Location (8) .......................................................

17 Seals (12) .................................................................................

18 Cushioning (10) ........................................................................

Parker Ref.

Sketch

19 Stroke Limiters (12 ) ...............................................

20 Position/Feedback Devices (14, 15 ) ......................

...........................................................................................

21 Special Requirements .............................................

...........................................................................................

..........................................................................................

...........................................................................................

Applications Data Check List




1220/6-UK, 1.5M, 04/03, PD

Austria MarchtrenkParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (7242) 56921Fax: (7242) 5692120

Belgium NivellesParker Hannifin S.A. N.V.Tel: 67 280 900Fax: 67 280 999

Czech Republic PrahaParker Hannifin CorporationTel: 283 085 224Fax: 283 085 360

Denmark IshøjParker Hannifin Danmark A/STel: 43 56 04 00Fax: 43 73 31 07

Finland VantaaParker Hannifin OyTel: 9 476 731Fax: 9 476 73200

France Contamine-sur-ArveParker Hannifin S.A.Tel: 4 50 25 80 25Fax: 4 50 03 67 37

Germany CologneParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (0221) 71720Fax: (0221) 7172219

Hungary BudapestParker Hannifin Corp.Tel: 1 25 28 137Fax: 1 25 28 129

Ireland CloneeParker Sales (Ireland) Ltd.Tel: (353) 1 801 4010Fax: (353) 1 801 4132

Italy Arsago-SeprioParker Hannifin S.p.A.Tel: (0331) 765611Fax: (0331) 765612

Netherlands OldenzaalParker Hannifin B.V.Tel: (0541) 585000Fax: (0541) 585459

Norway SkiParker Hannifin A/STel: 64 91 10 00Fax: 64 91 10 90

Poland WarsawParker Hannifin Corp.Tel: (22) 863 49 42Fax: (22) 863 49 44

Portugal Leca da PalmeiraParker Hannifin Portugal Lda.Tel: (22) 999 7360Fax: (22) 996 1527

Slovakia ref. Czech Republic

Spain MadridParker Hannifin España S.A.Tel: (91) 675 73 00Fax: (91) 675 77 11

Sweden SpångaParker Hannifin AB.Tel: 08-5979 50 00Fax: 08-5979 51 20

Switzerland RomanshornHydrel A.G. RomanshornTel: (714) 66 66 66Fax: (714) 66 66 80

Turkey IstanbulHidroser Hidrolik - PnömatikTel: (212) 886 72 70Fax: (212) 886 69 35

United Kingdom WatfordParker Hannifin PlcTel: (01923) 492000Fax: (01923) 248557


Need a Parker Part?Call Parker's European Product Information Centreon 00800 27 27 5374

H d li

IndustrialRoundline Cylinders

Meeting the ChallengeToday’s industry places the highest demands on hydraulic cylinders. Faster

cycle times and higher pressures must be balanced against lower costs of

ownership and longer service life. The search for higher productivity means

that cushions have to work harder, seals have to withstand higher speeds

and pressures, and bearing surfaces have to withstand continuous loading

with negligible wear. And as the demands on productivity grow, greater

environmental awareness brings new challenges of its own.

At Parker, we’ve been making cylinders for a long time – over 40 years, in

fact. Our wide range of welded, threaded and flange-bolted industrial

roundline cylinders reflects this long experience, and has been developed to

meet the toughest challenges of industry. In steel mills and foundries, plastic

injection moulding plants and paper mills, Parker cylinders meet these

challenges every day.

A major force in industryOn the world stage, Parker is a major player. No other motion and control

company can rival Parker’s breadth of operations, range of products and

technical leadership. From a single cylinder to a sophisticated electro-

hydraulic system, Parker’s proven engineering expertise is ready to help.

For you, working in partnership with Parker means peace of mind – the

peace of mind that comes from knowing that, wherever in the world your

equipment is in use, it’s never far from the expertise and premier customer

service that have made us Number One in motion and control technology.

The Parker Partnership enables you to source a huge range of products,

services and systems from a single supplier, reducing your supplier base

and simplifying administration. Whether your need is for hydraulic,

pneumatic or electro-mechanical solutions, the Parker Partnership places

an unequalled resource at your disposal. From design and manufacture to

training and maintenance, our aim is to support your business. Your

reputation depends on it – and so does ours.

When a standard product cannot be tailored to your application, Parker’s vast

experience of designing custom solutions is available. Working with our partners

on thousands of cylinder applications – often over many years – has given us a

unique insight into their business requirements. Working in partnership with you,

our design engineers will review the operating conditions, load requirements and

physical factors to create the best solution for the most challenging of

applications. From a one-off actuator to a complete system, Parker has the

expertise and resources to deliver cost-effective solutions to your timescale.

Special cylinders present special challenges. In the offshore industry, a cylinder

on the sea bed may have to operate just once a year – but millions of dollars of

oil production could depend on it. Lost production in an assembly operation

through press failure can impact disastrously on manufacturers and their supply

chains. In your business, the reliability of your hydraulic cylinders is paramount

and your choice of cylinder supplier will be critical. With Parker as your partner,

you can be confident that you’ve made the right choice.

Standard Cylinders

From a 40mm bore cylinder that you can hold in your hand to a 5 metre stroke monster, industry

demands hydraulic cylinders in a vast range of sizes, pressures and styles of construction. Parker’s

bolted-flange industrial roundline cylinders feature detachable glands for easy seal replacement,

generous bearing surfaces and hardened, ‘dent resistant’ rod material to resist leakage. Cushions are

adjustable and self-centring to maintain performance under the most demanding working conditions,

and all cylinders are available with a range of durable sealing options to cover different applications.

In service, these premium-quality ISO/DIN cylinders offer exceptional service life with low cost of

ownership. Ease of maintenance is designed in – so unnecessary machine downtime is designed out.

Other styles of cylinder available in our standard ranges include screwed and welded designs, giving

you an unequalled choice of high quality cylinders to suit all applications and environments.

Special Cylinders

Parker Roundline Cylinders in Plastic Injection Moulding

Primary metals processing presents a tough challenge for motion and control

systems. The environment is aggressive, temperatures are extreme and reliability

is critical – a continuous casting line cannot be shut down just because a

hydraulic seal is leaking. Failure between programmed maintenance periods is

not acceptable.

In applications like this, total reliability is vital – and total reliability starts with the

choice of product and supplier. The product must be highly engineered, rugged

and dependable under all operating conditions – and the supplier must be as

dependable as the product.

In these conditions, Parker is the only choice. The power of Parker means that

our partners enjoy premier customer service on a world-wide scale, with

technical knowledge and applications expertise second to none. With over 40

years of experience in making cylinders for the steel and aluminium industries,

we have the coatings, seal compounds and protective features to ensure that

production will continue to meet your targets for years to come.

Parker Roundline Cylinders in Primary Metals

The range of products available from plastic injection moulding is growing rapidly. From the simple stamped

parts of only a few years ago, today’s moulding machines achieve elaborate decorative and textured effects

to create complex, deep-moulded structures. In the automotive industry, components ranging from simple

thermoplastic handles and ducting to luxuriously textured headlining panels are produced in high volumes

to exacting quality standards.

Hydraulic cylinders provide the moving force that powers the moulding process. From positioning,

clamping, locking and injection to final ejection, the continuous high force and controllable delivery of

hydraulics ensures that quality standards and delivery schedules are met. The high cycle times achieved by

Parker’s cushioned roundline cylinders can be combined with closed-loop electro-hydraulic control to

create a system which delivers cost-effective production with short set-up times – every time.

From making cars and minting coins to filtering waste, modern presswork technology plays a major

role in the high volume/low cost manufacturing processes that have shaped the world around us.

In the automotive industry, hydraulic power is used to stamp sheet metal into intricate shapes, to form

the bodyshells of almost every car on the road. New techniques in hydroforming, where metal tubes

are inflated to form highly complex hollow bodies, are becoming increasingly widespread. Greater

environmental pressures will continue to drive down the weight of automotive structures, creating

vehicles that use less fuel without loss of strength.

The hydraulic cylinders used in presswork have to meet exacting performance standards. With

nominal press forces of up to 100,000kN, large bore cylinders, frequently with long strokes, have to

achieve rapid cycle times. Parker’s sophisticated control systems provide the variable press forces

required to prevent material deformation during the stamping process, while electro-hydraulic control

contributes to reduced set-up times and permits fine control of slide speeds as forming occurs.

Parker Roundline Cylinders in Low Pressure Casting

High definition cast aluminium parts rely on a multi-phase injection system for

precise regulation of the casting process. The fine tolerances required for the

finished product demand high precision from the hydraulic cylinders used to

position dies and eject the finished parts. Working at high temperatures – furnaces

can reach 900°C – there's no substitute for experience when selecting seal material

and fluid type. With a travel of 1600mm or more and high cycling speeds, Parker's

proven sealing systems comfortably withstand the temperatures and piston speeds

involved, to provide highly accurate, repeatable performance over millions of

production units.

The reliability of hydraulics is central to the low pressure die-casting process.

Hydraulic cylinders working in sequence control the positioning and closure of the

die, locking and core pulling, as well as die stripping and ejection of the finished

article. When the failure of just one cylinder means a break in production, it's

reassuring to know that, with Parker as your partner, you've specified the best

cylinders available.

Parker Roundline Cylinders in Presswork

With six industrial cylinder manufacturing plants in Europe and an extensive network of

sales offices, we aim to be close to our customers. Our reputation is founded on the

strong relationships we’ve built with customers like Battenfeld, Bloehm & Voss and

Krupp, working with them to meet the challenges of modern engineering with solutions

that are timely, cost-effective and soundly engineered.

A relationship with Parker, though, doesn’t end with delivery.

TrainingWe offer full training support, from classroom-based courses with purpose-built training

equipment for hands-on teaching, to on-site training on your new Parker hydraulic

system. Regular in-house training courses are held at centres throughout Europe,

covering all levels from beginner’s hydraulics up to the design of sophisticated electro-

hydraulic systems.

Design supportinPHorm, our interactive development software for standard cylinders, guides you

through the design process quickly and accurately – and even draws the finished

cylinder, ready to import into your CAD system! inPHorm constantly analyses your input

to build up precisely the right cylinder for your application, based on load, working

pressure, fatigue life, cycle time, fluid type and many other factors. And when even

intelligent software isn’t intelligent enough – our engineers are only a phone call away.

Installation and commissioningOn complex engineering projects, a seemingly unique problem may be one that we’ve

encountered before. It’s at times like this that our experience can make a world of

difference. Working together with you, our engineers will assist with installation, trials and

start up, to ensure a successful conclusion to your project.

Round the clock assistanceNo-one likes to think about failure – but if it happens, it’s good to know that you’ve got

the power of Parker behind you. Our European Product Information Centre is available 24

hours a day, with direct access to specialist help – hydraulic, pneumatic and electro-

mechanical. Call us free on 00800 27 27 5374. And if it takes a new cylinder to get you

up and running again, you can rely on our Fastrack service to cut cylinder production

time to the bare minimum.

Around the world, around the clock... Parker makes it possible.

Committed to our Customers

United KingdomParker Hannifin plc.Tel: 01923 492000Fax: 01923 248557

France Parker Hannifin S.A.Tel: 4 50 25 80 25Fax: 4 50 03 67 37

GermanyParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (37382) 820Fax: (37382) 82 211

Italy Parker Hannifin S.p.A.Tel: (331) 768 056Fax: (331) 769 059

Parker Cylinder Salesand Service in EuropeIn addition to industrial roundline cylinders...

Parker manufactures a vast range of hydraulic, pneumatic andelectro-mechanical motion and control products, which aredistributed worldwide. For more information about Parkerproducts, please contact your nearest sales office or call ourEuropean Product Information Centre on 00800 27 27 5374.

www.parker.com/ukCatalogue 1201/1-UK

2.0M 0900 GT

For Servo and Proportional Control

Catalogue 1175/LDT/1-GB

LDT

Parker Hannifin plcCylinder DivisionWatford, Herts.Hydraulics

(To be completed when requesting further information)

Applications Data Check List

Electro-Hydraulic Actuators

Contact Information

Application and System DataApplication Details

!" #

Hydraulic Data $%& #

#

' ( )%#

* +

, + $ (#

- . ()!#

/ ()!#

Cylinder and Transducer DataCylinder Specification 0 #

1

' 2 3 1 #

* &

, &

- 3 45)45#

/

6 ( &

7 3

8 9

9

9

' 1 3 1 #

* :%&% #

-

6 ()(#

7 %&#

8 :%& #

3% +(( &#

Control System

%(

' ;<%(( &(& (=2

* 3&

, .

System Requirements 3 >?

<(

/

6 @

Transducer Performance >

9 >

' & !#

* 3" ( #

, . 8A8B)*A8)& #

Electro-Hydraulic Data

' %

* &

) $(<&)C A4 Parker Hannifin plc.@9):)4:2*D)EF 87'*7888 87'8,-

'

LDT


Introduction and Specification

The Linear Displacement Transducer =2&A++$+ && &$& =2 %+)+ . )=2) &+

Applications%% $+ ) &< 9 & :$%& B + ;G &H 9&H & : &H = &

Operating Principles$& $ =2&&)& &$$+&$$ )$+ $$+& +& & $ & + ; +& &

Introduction& $ & + )$ A&0& $$ )& +A

%+ ) +$) %$ $) $ H

Feedback Transducers from Parker &&+++ %+=2)" ) + ++ .+ 1%3 .$ H + )I+

%I&" $&3 @

Transducer Selection GuidePLT LDT LVDT

Type &+ &+ ;+

Mounting Position ; ; ;

Max stroke ', ', 86

Max speed ,( ,( 884"#

Resolution &(18B(8J &(1 ;2& (188B 2& (1,J

Repeatability -J >888? % >8? %

Linearity >88,? % >88,? % >8,? %

Operating temperature A8!K68! A*8!K-,! A'8!K,8!

Temperature coefficient 888*?! 8887?! 88'?!

Max working pressure 8 ',8 8

Outputs && && &

Fluid suitability

Environment + % + % 4& + %)+ + +

*

LDT


Availability and Dimensions

Actuator Designation:%$%+)I5I31I I&/)$$%+)34 45)34;4245)

Mounting Styles and Dimensions=2 =2% + &$+$& $+$ $4;(424 $=2 &)

$ $G$+ &C$ $)$=2 $)A%;$+ + &) % &

Working Pressure Restrictions$%& $ $ ) &$%&+ (4545 $ $$%& )

Note:% &,8) + +&& )&H% ) 1

CE Marking%C%)$)HC2+67(''-(CC &

Protective Covers+++

Dimensions – Series 2HX Cylinder with LDT

%RUH5RG

1R

5RG

φ φ

&; /' /< 69 61 ;( ;) ;-0D[:RUNLQJ3UHVVXUH

%DU

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

1$

,

LDT


Dimensions – Series HMX Cylinder with LDT

Dimensions

BaseMountingStyle C

BaseMountingStyle F

Rear PivotMountingsStyles B, BB,SB & SBd

%RUH5RG

1R

5RG

φ φ

&; /; 69 ;( ;) ;-0D[:RUNLQJ3UHVVXUH

%DU

All Mountings –Commondimensions !"#$

# "#$

#

#%& "#'!"#$

TrunnionMountingsStyles D, DB & DD

() !"#$

# "#$* !"#$

Front FlangeMountingStyle JJ

#+ ( ,-'--."#'!"#$#/ ( ,(-."#0'(-.!"#$

(1 "#'!"#$

Rear Flange Mountings2&&)%+ $ &A $

-

LDT


FrictionFactor (F)

StandardPiston (FN)

Lipseal Piston (FL)

PTFEseals (Fp)

50 100 150 200 2500

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Bore Sizes and Mounting Styles34545"& &*A,$=2 :"& H) $1

Rod Diameters+& & ) & &

Piston and Seal Options%+$& $ &3 + +&)$

: )+ H)I3+I 1I I&/3+ $& $

Cushions. $& %)& + &H &1 $

Gland Drains & $ &% ) $%) +&& &

Analogue and Digital Outputs%+=2)H : $ & A)& + ;)8A8B)*A88A82& + =2)G$ &

Manifold Options +) + + ++ +

Proportional and Servo Valves0 + +& + + $ )+ H)%++ +

Seal Friction $& $&&) ) &

Options and Specifications

Calculation of Running Friction + & & $& 4545 )$8( )

Series Seal Type Friction (Newtons): K 93 K 3

45 = K K *24= K K 2=$ K , K 2

45 3 K K 2= K K 2=$ K , K 2

:< L #2 L # L

= L 3 L C

$+ $+1I3 .I+

Calculation of Break-Out Friction0%A & $& <

,M M 1

Example3< 45 0< ,89< '- 3 < =$.&< 88

LK,K2L '-#K ,''-#K ',8#L'/

/

LDT


!

"# $ % #

& ' ()

* ( + + ,-. !* ,-.'/* ,-.0 * ,-.

( "*1" , "*

/

/2( ( ) "* % 3 4* ) "* % 5

4+)"* % /+"-4)1" % 64)1" % 44+)1" % +

( ( 3 % (+ / % (

(

/' 7' ,-. 1

/'7

' 0

## () % #

(8 9, :;

+ *

//

!

*<= $ >% ?#703/9@ % !

> ; ?#703/.@ % #( ?*A%;$ @ % &> % ?#703/A@ % 7>1. ?#703/:@ % +3 ) % 5

* 3/ ' ?(@ % '

+?@ % +3 ) % 5

0 8 $ 0 /40 9 !

4&0 9 04=&0 9 43 ) 9 5

# $ 37 = ;- ;= .

# ;-1; . !# ,-1; . #&) . &3 ) . 5

Ordering Information

Model Numbers and OrderingC%% & &% $)% + &$ )$+$%+)

ExampleFeatures Description Page Symbol

&1&' $%) % &$HH$

.; # 6 "* ' ( B * # :; * ,, ! ' 0

F<

; 1 &

3 & 1 &

6

LDT


697

Austria – ViennaParker Hannifin GmbHTel: 1332/36050Fax: 1332/360577

Belgium – BrusselsS.A. Parker Hannifin N.V.Tel: (02) 762 18 00Fax: (02) 762 33 30

Czech Republic – PragueParker Hannifin CorporationTel: 2 6134 1704Fax: 2 6134 1703

Denmark – IshøjParker Hannifin Danmark A/STel: 43 54 11 33Fax: 43 73 31 07

Finland – VantaaParker Hannifin OyTel: 0 476 731Fax: 0 476 73200

France – Contamine-sur-ArveParker Hannifin RAK S.A.Tel: 4 50 25.80.25Fax: 4 50 03.67.37

Germany – CologneParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (221) 71720Fax: (221) 7172219

Hungary – BudapestParker Hannifin Corp.Tel + Fax: 1 252 2539

Italy – Arsago-SeprioParker Hannifin S.p.A.Tel: (331) 768 056Fax: (331) 769 059

Netherlands – OldenzaalParker Hannifin N.V.Tel: (5410) 85000Fax: (5410) 85459

Norway – LanghusParker Hannifin A/STel: (64) 86 77 60Fax: (64) 86 68 88

Poland – WarsawParker Hannifin Corp.Tel: (22) 36 50 78Fax: (22) 36 50 81

Spain – MadridParker Hannifin Espana S.A.Tel: (1) 675 73 00Fax: (1) 675 77 11

Sweden – SpångaParker Hannifin Sweden AB.Tel: 08-760 29 60Fax: 08-760 81 70

Switzerland – RomanshornHydrel A.G. RomanshornTel: (714) 61 11 11Fax: (714) 66 63 33

Turkey – IstanbulHidroser Hidrolik - PnömatikTel: (212) 243 26 29Fax: (212) 251 19 09

United Kingdom – WatfordParker Hannifin PlcTel: (01923) 492000Fax: (01923) 248557


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders

MMA RoundlineCylinders






Introduction 3inPHorm 3Design Features and Benefits 4Gland and Piston Seal Options 5Optional Features 6Special Designs 6Mounting Information 7Cylinder Masses 7Servicing Features 7Cylinder Selection Checklist 8Mounting Styles 9Round Flange Mountings 10Clevis Mountings 11Trunnion and Foot Mountings 12Rod End Accessories 13Push and Pull Forces 14Piston Rod Size Selection 15Long Stroke Cylinders 15Stop Tubes 15, 16Stroke Factors 16Cushioning 17, 18Seals and Fluids 19Ports 20Ports, Locations and Piston Speeds 21Replacement Parts and Service 22Piston Rod End Data 24How to Order Cylinders 25

Accessories 13Air Bleeds 6Cushioning 4, 17, 18, 21Design Features 4Filtration 19Forces – Push and Pull 14Gland Drains 6inPHorm 3Long Stroke Cylinders 15Masses 7Model Numbers 25Mounting Styles and Information 9, 10-13Optional Features 6Ordering Instructions 25Piston Rod End Data 24Piston Rod Size Selection 15Piston Speeds 21Piston and Seal Types 5, 19Ports – Standard and Oversize 20, 21Port Size and Piston Speed 21Repairs 7Replacement Parts and Service 22-23Seals and Fluids 19Special Designs 6Standard Specifications 3Stop Tubes 15, 16Stroke Factors 16

Parker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in themanufacture of components and systems for motion control.Parker has more than 800 product lines for hydraulic,pneumatic and electromechanical applications in some 1200industrial, mobile and aerospace markets. With more than45,000 employees and some 210 manufacturing plants andadministration offices around the world, Parker providescustomers with technical excellence and first class customerservice.

Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largestsupplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications.Parker cylinders are used in applications as diverse asmachine tools, flight simulation and tidal barrier control.

The heavy duty Series MMA cylinder has been designed forservice in steel mills and in other arduous applications wherea rugged, dependable cylinder is required. In addition to the

standard cylinders featured in this catalogue, MMA cylinderscan be designed and manufactured to suit individualcustomer requirements. Our engineers will be pleased todiscuss and advise on unique designs to suit specificapplications.

inPHorm is Parker Hannifin’s product selection program thathelps to select the correct part for an application. Theprogram prompts for the details of the application, makes thenecessary design calculations, and selects a suitableproduct. inPHorm can also generate CAD drawings of theselected part, which can be viewed in other softwareapplications, and customised and imported into other CADpackages. Please contact your local Sales Office for furtherinformation.

Heavy Duty construction

Styles and dimensions to: CETOP RP73H, ISO 6022*,

DIN 24 333, BS 6331 Pt. III, AFNOR NF E48-025,

VW 39D 921

Rated pressure: 250 bar

Fatigue-free at the rated pressure

Hydraulic mineral oil – other fluids on request

Temperature range of standard seals: -20oC to +80oC

Construction: head & cap bolted to heavy steel flanges

Bore sizes: 50mm to 320mm

Piston rod diameters: 32mm to 220mm

Cushioning – optional both ends

Air bleeds – optional both ends

Tested in accordance with ISO 10100:2001



Manufactured from precision ground, high tensile carbonalloy steel, hard chrome plated and polished to 0.2m max.Piston rods up to 110mm in diameter are induction casehardened to Rockwell C54 minimum before chrome plating.This provides a 'dent resistant' surface, resulting in improvedseal life. Piston rods of 125mm diameter and above can becase hardened on request. All rod and piston assembliesare designed to be fatigue free at full rated pressure.

The head and cap are bolted to heavy steel flanges, whichare retained by threads at each end of the cylinder body.

! The heavy wall steel tubing is honed to a high surface finish,to minimise internal friction and prolong seal life.

"#$ #% These are machined from steel and located into the cylinderbody's internal diameter for added strength and precisealignment. Both the head and cap are sealed by O-ringswhich, in turn, are protected by anti-extrusion rings.

&#'(Optional cushions at the head and cap are progressive inaction, providing controlled deceleration which reducesnoise and shock loading, and prolongs machine life. Thehead end cushion is a self-centring sleeve, while the polishedcap end spear is an integral part of the piston rod. Needlevalves are provided at both ends of the cylinder for precisecushion adjustment, and are retained so that they cannot beinadvertently removed.

Check valves at the head and cap ends of the cylinderminimize restriction to the start of a stroke, permitting fullpower and fast cycle times. The head end check valve isincorporated into the fully floating cushion sleeve, while thecap end employs a floating bronze cushion bush.

) * Seals are housed in a corrosion-resistant steel gland,featuring heavy duty polymer bearing rings to resist sideloadings. Wide separation of these rings reduces bearingstresses, maximising the service life of the bearing. The rodgland may be screwed or bolted. On bore sizes up to 100mmthe rod gland is screwed (illustrated above). On larger boresizes the rod gland is bolted.

The polymer bearing rings, with the rod seals, are easilyreplaced on removal of the rod gland, and all componentsmay be serviced without further disassembly of the cylinder.

+#,* A variety of gland and piston seal options is available, to suitdifferent applications, as shown opposite. In addition, MMAcylinders can be designed and manufactured to suitindividual customer requirements. Please contact the factoryfor details.

The gland seals listed opposite are located in a screwed orbolted gland housing, and provide efficient retention ofpressurized fluid while preventing the ingress ofcontaminants.

1

98

7

5210

63

4

2



General purpose seals suitable for awide range of applications.

For use with Group 1 fluids (see page19).

The standard option may be used forpiston speeds up to 0.5m/s.

Ordering code 'N'

consist of acombination of a polyurethane lipsealand a PTFE stepped seal, providingefficient sealing under normaloperating conditions.

consist of a heavyduty filled polymer seal, which isleaktight under normal operatingconditions. Heavy duty wear ringsprevent metal contact with thecylinder bore and help to protect thepiston seal from contaminants.

Suitable for applications where verylow friction and an absence of stick-slip are important. Not suitable forholding loads in a fixed position.

For use with all fluid groups (see page19).

The Low Friction option may be usedfor piston speeds up to 1m/s.

Ordering code 'F'

comprisetwo low friction PTFE stepped sealsand a heavy duty wiperseal.

employ a PTFEseal and PTFE wear rings.

Suitable for arduous applications,such as steel mills. May be used tohold a load in position.

For use with all fluid groups (see page19).

The chevron option may be used forpiston speeds up to 0.5m/s.

Ordering code 'LL'

have acorrosion-resistant steel retainer, anda separate removable steel housingwhich retains the inner bearing rings.A heavy duty wiper seal prevents theingress of contaminants.

feature a two-piecepiston with a wide bearing ringmounted between chevron seals.

Suitable for applications where loadsare required to be held in position.Standard gland seals have a lowerfriction than the chevron equivalent.

For use with Group 1 fluids (seepage 19).

The load holding option may be usedfor piston speeds up to 0.5m/s.

Ordering code 'A'

feature a two-piecepiston with a wide bearing ringmounted between chevron seals.

consist of acombination of a polyurethane lipsealand a PTFE stepped seal, providingefficient sealing under normaloperating conditions.

* -


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders-

Available as an option at both ends, air bleeds are recessedinto the head and cap and retained so they cannot beinadvertently removed.

* The tendency of hydraulic fluid to adhere to the piston rod canresult in an accumulation of fluid in the cavity between theseals under certain operating conditions. This may occur withlong stroke cylinders, where there is a constant back pressureas in differential circuitry, or where the ratio of the extendspeed to the retract speed is greater than 2 to 1.

Gland drains should be piped back to the fluid reservoir,which should be located below the level of the cylinder.

Standard and Low Friction glands can be fitted with glanddrains. Please consult the factory for further information.

./Linear position transducers of various types may be fitted toMMA series cylinders. Please contact the factory for furtherdetails.

0(Non-contacting position switches are available for MMAseries cylinders. Please contact the factory for further details.

. MMA series cylinders are available with the option of adouble-ended piston rod. Please contact the factory for furtherdetails.

% 0Exposed rod surfaces that are subjected to air hardeningcontaminants should be protected by rod end bellows.Longer rod extensions are required to accommodate theircollapsed length – please consult the factory for details.

1For applications where contaminants may adhere to theextended piston rod and thereby cause premature failure ofgland seals, the use of a metallic rod wiper in place of thestandard wiper seal is recommended.

Parker's design and engineering staff are available toproduce special designs to incorporate customer's specificrequirements. Alternative sealing arrangements, specialmounting styles, higher or lower rated pressure designs,welded cap ends to reduce overall length (non-cushionedonly), larger cylinder bores and alternative rod sizes are justa few of the special requirements which can beaccommodated.

Mounting styles other than those specified in this cataloguecan be supplied on request. Please consult the factory.

As an alternative to the normal piston rod material, stainlesssteel and other special materials and finishes can besupplied.

MMA cylinders can be supplied with modifications to materialand paint specifications which make them suitable foroperation in a marine environment. Please consult the factory.


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders 2

It is recommended that mounting bolts with a strength toISO 898/1 grade 12.9 should be used for fixing cylinders to themachine or base. Mounting bolts should be torque loaded totheir manufacturer's recommended figures.

All spherical bearings should be re-packed with greaseperiodically. In unusual or severe working conditions, consultthe factory regarding the suitability of the bearing chosen.

On the 320mm bore cylinder the trunnion is welded to thecylinder body. On all other bore sizes the trunnion assembly isthreaded to the cylinder body and secured with a locking ring.In both cases, the trunnion pins are machined from solid. If adifferent requirement is needed to suit a particular application,please consult the factory.

Trunnions require lubricated pillow blocks with minimumbearing clearances. Blocks should be mounted and alignedto eliminate bending moments on the trunnion pins.

The following table shows the masses of MMA cylinders foreach mounting style at zero stroke; a stroke adder for each10mm of stroke can then be calculated. Where applicable,accessory masses can be added to give a gross mass for thecomplete assembly – see page 13.

The head and cap retentionbolts on MMA Seriescylinders are torque loadedon assembly in the factory. Ifdamage or corrosion is foundon removal, the old bolts mustbe discarded andreplacement bolts with aminimum strength toISO 898/1 grade 12.9 must befitted. Head and cap boltsshould always be tightenedprogressively in a diagonalsequence and torque loadedto the figures shown in thetable.

2All cylinders will, at some time, need maintenance or repairs.The MMA series has been designed to make these tasks aseasy as possible, by incorporating the following designfeatures:

– Rod bearing and rod seals can bereplaced without completely dismantling the cylinder. Forchevron glands, a thread is machined on the outsidediameter of the seal housing to assist extraction.

at both ends of the cylinder body ease assembly ofthe head and cap and insertion of the piston seals.

are removable, allowing separatereplacement of the cylinder body.

High tensile bolts are used for ease of maintenance andreplacement.

Flanges are spaced from the head and cap to allow the boltsto be sawn through in the event of severe damage orcorrosion.

Although MMA cylinders are designed to make on sitemaintenance or repairs as easy as possible, some operationsshould only be carried out in our factory. It is standard policy tofit a cylinder returned to the factory for repair with thosereplacement parts which are necessary to return it to 'as goodas new' condition. Should the condition of the returnedcylinder be such that the expense would exceed the cost of anew one, you will be notified.

eroBØ

doR.oN

0512

3612

0812

00112

52112

04112

06112

08112

00212

05212

02312

gkni,ekortSoreZtaselytSgnitnuoM mm01repekortS

gk&3FM

4FM&3PM

5PM4TM 2SM

8.41 2.61 6.61 6.61 2.08.71 2.61 7.61 6.61 2.0

72 62 62 42 3.072 62 62 42 3.093 73 73 53 5.093 73 73 53 5.016 95 95 65 6.016 95 95 65 7.0301 301 501 59 9.0401 401 501 69 0.1461 861 171 851 1.1461 861 171 851 2.1891 502 402 881 6.1991 502 502 881 7.1982 092 292 472 0.2982 192 392 572 2.2653 773 363 533 2.2753 873 463 633 4.2646 896 586 416 2.3746 007 786 616 6.30811 4921 9321 6111 1.50321 5431 0921 8111 6.5

eroBØmm

053608001521041061081002052023

stloBegnalF

euqroT)mN(daoL

tloBeziS

82-62 8M45-15 01M

811-211 21M561-751 41M

062-742 61M

084-654 02M

296-866 22M0711-2111 72M0051-5241 33M



(/3This check list indicates the major factors which should beconsidered when selecting a hydraulic cylinder for aparticular application. Further information is available on thepages shown. If additional information is required about anyaspect of a cylinder's specification, please contact our designengineers.

– Mass to be moved and force required– Nominal operating pressure and range– Distance to be travelled– Time available to travel this distance– Fluid medium

! "Select the appropriate style for the specific application

# $ % &Determine the bore and system pressure required to provide the necessary force

& 'Determine the minimum rod diameter required to withstand buckling forcesIs a stop tube required?Select a suitable rod end and rod end thread

' 'Does seal type suit application?

( $ )Select cushioning requirements if applicable

) !*Select suitable portsAre they capable of the speed required?Are the standard positions acceptable?

+ "Select seals to suit the chosen fluid medium

" #Are rod end accessories required?

* , (Mountings, materials, environments and fluids

The European cylinder inPHorm program (1260-Eur) canassist with the selection and specification of an hydrauliccylinder for a particular application.



1( 4(Parker manufactures six standard mounting styles for the MMArange of hydraulic cylinders, to suit the majority ofapplications. General guidance for selection is given below,with detailed information about each mounting style shownon the pages indicated.

Where a non-standard mounting style is required to satisfy aparticular application, our design engineers will be happy toassist. Please contact the factory for details.

,$ This type of cylinder is suitable for use on straight line forcetransfer applications. Two mounting styles are available, withflanges at the head or cap. Selection of a particular flangemounting style depends on whether the major force applied tothe load will result in compression (push) or tension (pull)stresses on the piston rod. For compression-typeapplications, cap mounting style MF4 is most appropriate;where the major load places the piston rod in tension, headmounting style MF3 should be specified.

$$ Cylinders with pivot mountings, which absorb forces on theircentreline, should be used for applications where themachine member to be moved travels in a curved path. Theymay be used for tension (pull) or compression (push)applications. Fixed clevis mounting cylinders MP3 may beused if the curved path of the piston rod travel is in a singleplane; for applications where the piston rod will travel in apath either side of the true plane of motion, the sphericalbearing mounting MP5 is recommended.

$ These cylinders are designed to absorb force on theircentre-lines. They are suitable for tension (pull) orcompression (push) applications, and may be used where themachine member to be moved travels in a curved path, in asingle plane. Trunnion pins are designed for shear loads onlyand should be subjected to minimum bending stresses.

,$ MS2 cylinders do not absorb forces on their centreline – seederating note on page 12. As a result, the application of forceby the cylinder produces a turning moment whichattempts to rotate the cylinder about its mounting bolts. It isimportant, therefore, that the cylinder should be firmly securedto the machine member on which it is mounted andthat the load should be effectively guided, to avoid side loadsbeing applied to the rod gland and piston bearings.

The MS2 foot mounted cylinder is not an ISO standardmounting.

!"#"$$

!%!&"$&

% !'"$(

% !)"$(

!"'"$$

*+%!+)"$&



Accurate location of 'B' provided as standard on model MF3 only.


5! " See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7

,&Cap Circular Flange

1 140mm and 180mm bore cylinders do not conform to ISO 6022

1

,#Head Circular Flange

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

Ø

051 232 63

361 042 54

081 052 65

0011 362 07

5211 082 09

041 11 092 001

0611 0012 011

081 11 0112 521

0021 5212 041

0521 0612 081

0231 0022 022

B 8f

&AB 8H

.xamD EE)PPSB(

F BF CF CUDV

.nimCW Y

niMekortS

ekortS+

JPBZ

.xamPZ

36 801 G1/2 52 5.31 231 551 4 22 89 02 021 442 562

57 421 G3/4 82 5.31 051 571 4 52 211 03 331 472 892

09 841 G3/4 23 5.71 081 012 4 82 021 02 551 503 233

011 571 1G 63 22 212 052 5 23 431 52 171 043 173

231 802 1G 04 22 052 092 5 63 351 05 502 693 034

541 552 1G 1/4 04 62 003 043 5 63 181 05 802 034 564

061 072 1G 1/4 54 62 513 063 5 04 581 05 532 764 505

581 513 1G 1/4 05 33 563 024 5 54 502 02 052 505 055

002 033 1G 1/4 65 33 583 044 5 54 022 02 872 055 695

052 214 1G 1/2 36 93 574 045 8 05 062 02 523 256 307

023 015 2G 08 54 006 576 8 65 013 02 053 467 038

EE

ØFB3

2

ZP + stroke

PJ + stroke

BA

1

Dmax.

4

UC

221/2°

FC p.c.d.

Y

F

EE Y

FØFB 3

2

ZB + strokePJ + stroke

B

VD

Dmax.4

UC

221/2°

WC

FC p.c

.d.


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders2


5! $ See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7


'Cap Fixed Eyewith Spherical Bearing

#Cap Fixed Eye

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

Ø

051 232 63

361 042 54

081 052 65

0011 362 07

5211 082 09

041 11 092 001

0611 0012 011

081 11 0112 521

0021 5212 041

0521 0612 081

0231 0022 022

WB&XB

DC 9H

&XC 7H

D.xam

EE)PPSB(

WE 21h

&XE 21h

L&TL

XLRM

&SM

YniMekortS

ekortS+

JP OX&CX

72 23 801 G1/2 23 16 83 53 89 02 021 503

53 04 421 G3/4 04 47 05 05 211 03 331 843

04 05 841 G3/4 05 09 5.16 5.16 021 02 551 593

25 36 571 1G 36 201 17 66 431 52 171 244

06 08 802 1G 08 421 09 09 351 05 502 025

56 09 552 1G 1/4 09 051 311 311 181 05 802 085

48 001 072 1G 1/4 001 051 211 5.711 581 05 532 716

88 011 513 1G 1/4 011 581 921 811 502 02 052 096

201 521 033 1G 1/4 521 602 541 131 022 02 872 657

031 061 214 1G 1/2 061 152 871 361 062 02 523 309

261 002 015 2G 002 613 032 902 013 02 053 0801

EE

BW3

2

XC + stroke

PJ + strokeCD

1 D max.

4

EW

Y

LLX

MR

EE

BX3

XO + stroke

PJ + strokeCX

1 D max.

4

EX

Y

LTLX

MS

2

4°

4°



XV Dimension to be specified by customer. Where minimum dimension isunacceptable, please consult factory.


The MS2 mounting should only be used where the stroke is at least half of the borediameter or where the cylinder operates below 160 bar.

54" See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7


&Intermediate Trunnion

!Foot Mounting(Not to ISO 6022)

DBD

.xamEE

)PPSB(DT 8f LT MT 31h VU

.xamVX

.nimY

niMekortS

ekortS+

JPVX

.xamBZ

.xam

83 801 G1/2 23 52 211 801 781 89 55 021 231 442

84 421 G3/4 04 23 521 421 212 211 57 331 731 472

85 841 G3/4 05 04 051 841 542 021 09 551 551 503

37 571 1G 36 05 081 571 082 431 021 171 061 043

88 802 1G 08 36 422 812 043 351 061 502 081 693

89 552 1G 1/4 09 07 562 062 083 181 081 802 002 034

801 072 1G 1/4 001 08 082 082 004 581 081 532 022 764

811 513 1G 1/4 011 09 023 513 014 502 071 052 042 505

331 033 1G 1/4 521 001 533 033 054 022 091 872 062 055

081 214 1G 1/2 061 521 524 214 045 062 042 523 003 256

022 015 2G 002 061 035 015 526 013 003 053 523 467

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

Ø

051 232 63

361 042 54

081 052 65

0011 362 07

5211 082 09

041 11 092 001

0611 0012 011

081 11 0112 521

0021 5212 041

0521 0612 081

0231 0022 022

EE

3

2

ZB + stroke

PJ + stroke

XV

1

Dmax.

4

UVmax.

TD

TL TM TL

R3

Y

BD

EE

ØSB3

2

ZB + stroke

PJ + stroke1

Dmax.

4

US

2mm

Y

SESE

SCSC

SS + strokeXS

TS

SD

ST

LH



See also Dimensions, page 24 & Mounting Information, page 7


1 140mm and 180mm bore cylinders do not conform to ISO 6022 2 Mounting holes offset from centre line

See also Mounting Information, page 7

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

Ø

051 232 63

361 042 54

081 052 65

0011 362 07

5211 082 09

041 1 1 092 001

0611 0012 011

081 1 1 0112 521

0021 5212 041

0521 0612 081

0231 0022 022

D.xam

EE)PPSB(

HL 01h BS 31H CS DS ES TS ST SU SX YniMekortS

ekortS+

JP SS .xamBZ

801 G1/2 06 11 5.02 2 81 5.51 23 531 061 0.031 89 0 021 55 442

421 G3/4 86 5.31 5.42 2 02 5.71 73 551 581 5.741 211 02 331 55 472

841 G3/4 08 5.71 5.22 62 5.22 24 581 522 5.071 021 53 551 55 503

571 1G 59 22 5.72 33 5.72 25 022 562 5.291 431 55 171 55 043

802 1G 511 62 0.03 04 0.03 26 072 523 0.032 351 56 502 06 693

552 1G 1/4 531 03 5.53 84 5.53 77 523 093 5.452 181 08 802 16 034

072 1G 1/4 541 33 5.73 84 5.73 77 043 504 5.562 581 08 532 97 764

513 1G 1/4 561 04 5.24 06 5.24 78 093 564 5.782 502 07 052 58 505

033 1G 1/4 071 04 0.74 2 06 0.54 78 504 084 0.513 022 06 872 09 055

214 1G 1/2 512 25 0.25 2 67 0.05 211 025 026 0.063 062 06 523 021 256

015 2G 062 26 0.26 2 011 0.06 251 026 047 0.524 013 08 053 021 467

eroBØ

KK

05 2x72M

36 2x33M

08 2x24M

001 2x84M

521 3x46M

041 3x27M

061 3x08M

081 3x09M

002 3x001M

052 4x521M

023 4x061M

lacirehpSgniraeB.oNtraP

nialPgniraeB.oNtraP

142541 137841

242541 237841

342541 337841

442541 437841

542541 537841

327841 637841

427841 737841

527841 837841

627841 937841

727841 047841

827841 147841

.nimXA&

.nimWA

NC 7H

&KC 9H

NE 21h

&ME 21h

HC&AC

FL&EL

C.xam

FE&RE

XB beuqroT

daoLmN

ssaMgk

73 23 23 08 23 67 04 72 83 23 2.1

64 04 04 79 14 79 05 23 74 23 1.2

75 05 05 021 05 811 36 04 85 46 4.4

46 36 36 041 26 241 17 25 07 08 6.7

68 08 08 081 87 081 09 66 09 591 5.41

19 09 09 591 58 581 101 27 001 591 71

69 001 001 012 89 422 211 48 011 583 82

601 011 011 532 501 532 921 88 521 583 23

311 521 521 062 021 092 061 301 531 583 34

621 061 061 013 051 643 002 031 561 066 08

161 002 002 093 591 064 052 261 512 0531 561

AX min.

C max.

LF

EN

CH

CN

b

KK

EF

4°

AW min.

C max.

LE

CA

CK

BX

b

KK

ER

EM


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders4((

Given that the load and operating pressure of the system areknown, and that a piston rod size has been estimated takingaccount of whether the rod is in tension (pull) or compression(push), then the cylinder bore can be selected.

If the piston rod is in compression, use the 'Push Force' tablebelow.


2. In the same column, identify the force required to movethe load (always rounding up).


If the cylinder envelope dimensions are too large for yourapplication increase the operating pressure, if possible, andrepeat the exercise.

If the piston rod is in tension, use the 'Deduction for PullForce' table. The procedure is the same but, due to thereduced piston surface area resulting from the piston rod, theforce available on the 'pull' stroke will be smaller.

To determine the pull force:

1. Follow the procedure for 'Push' applications, as describedabove.

2. Using the 'Deduction for Pull Force' table below, establishthe force indicated according to the rod diameter andpressure selected.

3. Deduct this from the original 'Push' force. The resultingfigure is the net force available to move the load.

If this force is not large enough, go through the process againbut increase the system operating pressure or cylinderdiameter if possible. If in doubt, our design engineers will bepleased to assist.

(

For more comprehensive information on the calculation ofcylinder bore size required, please refer to the Europeancylinder inPHorm selection program (1260-Eur).

eroBØ

rednilyCeroBaerA

mm mm 2

05 4691

36 7113

08 6205

001 4587

521 27221

041 68351

061 60102

081 43452

002 61413

052 78094

023 52408

NkniecroFhsuPrednilyCserusserPsuoiraVta

raB05 raB001 raB051 raB002 raB052

01 02 03 04 05

51 13 64 36 97

52 15 67 201 821

04 08 021 061 002

26 521 781 052 213

77 451 132 803 583

201 502 703 014 215

721 452 183 805 536

061 023 084 046 108

052 005 057 0001 0521

014 028 0321 0461 0502

notsiPdoR

Ø

notsiPdoRaerA

mm mm 2

23 408

63 8101

04 7521

54 0951

05 4691

65 3642

36 6833

07 8483

08 7205

09 2636

001 5587

011 3059

521 47221

041 49351

061 90102

081 74452

002 02413

022 31083

oteudNkniecroFninoitcudeRserusserPsuoiraVtadoRnotsiPfoaerA

raB05 raB001 raB051 raB002 raB052

4 8 21 61 02

5 01 51 02 52

6 21 91 42 13

8 61 42 23 04

01 91 92 83 94

21 52 73 05 26

71 43 15 86 58

91 93 85 87 89

52 05 67 001 621

23 46 79 921 261

93 97 811 851 691

84 69 541 391 242

16 321 481 642 703

87 651 532 313 293

001 102 103 204 305

921 952 983 815 846

751 413 174 826 587

891 783 185 577 969



6The selection of a piston rod for thrust (push) conditionsrequires the following steps to be carried out.

1. Determine the type of cylinder mounting style and rod endconnection to be used. Consult the Stroke Factor Selectiontable on page 16 and determine which factor correspondsto the application.

2. Using the stroke factor, determine the 'basic length'from the equation:

Basic Length = Actual (net) Stroke x Stroke Factor

(The Piston Rod Selection Chart, below, applies to pistonrods with standard rod extensions beyond the face of thegland retainer. For rod extensions greater than standard,add the increase to the stroke to arrive at the 'basiclength'.)

3. Find the load imposed for the thrust application bymultiplying the full bore area of the cylinder by the systempressure, or by referring to the Push and Pull Force chartson page 14.

4. Using the Piston Rod Selection Chart, below, look alongthe values for 'basic length' and 'thrust' as found in 2. and3. above, and note the point of intersection.

The correct piston rod size is read from the diagonally curvedline labelled 'Rod Diameter' above the point of intersection.

(

3/ 4.When considering the use of long stroke cylinders, the pistonrod should be of sufficient diameter to provide the necessarycolumn strength.

For tension (pull) loads, the rod size is selected by specifyingstandard cylinders with standard rod diameters, and usingthem at or below the rated pressure.

For long stroke cylinders under compressive loads, the use ofstop tubes should be considered, to reduce bearing stress.Selection of a stop tube is described on page 16.

Stop TubeCushion Sleeve

For accurate sizing, please refer to the European cylinderinPHorm selection program (1260-Eur).


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders/

4.The Piston Rod Selection Chart on page 15 indicates wherethe use of a stop tube should be considered. The requiredlength of stop tube, where necessary, is read from the verticalcolumns on the right of the chart, by following the horizontalband within which the point of intersection lies. Note that stoptube requirements differ for fixed and pivot mounted cylinders.

If the required length of stop tube is in the shaded regionmarked 'consult factory', please submit the followinginformation:

1. Cylinder mounting style.

2. Rod end connection and method of guiding load.

3. Bore and stroke required, and length of rod extension(Dimension 'W') if greater than standard.

4. Mounting position of cylinder. If at an angle or vertical,specify the direction of the piston rod.

5. Operating pressure of the cylinder if limited to less thanthe standard pressure for the cylinder selected.

When specifying a cylinder with a stop tube, please insert an'S' (Special) and the stroke of the cylinder in the ordercode and state the length of the stop tube. Note that net strokeis equal to the gross stroke of the cylinder less the length of thestop tube. The gross stroke determines the envelopedimensions of the cylinder.


/

dnEdoRnoitcennoC

elytS gnitnuoMfoepyTekortSrotcaF

dnadexiFdediuGyldigiR

3FM2SM

5.0

dnadetoviPdediuGyldigiR

3FM2SM

7.0

dnadexiFdediuGyldigiR

4FM 0.1


4FM4TM

5.1

toNtubdetroppuSdediuGyldigiR

2SM 0.2


3PM5PM

0.2


4FM 0.4


3PM5PM

0.4


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders(

(Cushioning is recommended as a means of controlling thedeceleration of masses, or for applications where pistonspeeds are in excess of 0.1m/s and the piston will make a fullstroke. Cushioning extends cylinder life and reducesundesirable noise and hydraulic shock.

Built-in deceleration devices or 'cushions' are optional andcan be supplied at the head and cap ends of the cylinderwithout affecting its envelope or mounting dimensions.Cushions are adjustable via recessed needle valves.

(Ideal cushion performance shows an almost uniformabsorption of energy along the cushion's length. Many formsof cushioning exist and each has its own specific merits andadvantages. Where specified, the standard form of cushioningfor MMA cylinders uses profiled cushions, giving aperformance which comes close to the ideal in the majority ofapplications. The head and cap cushion performance foreach bore size is illustrated graphically on the charts onpage 18.

2(As an alternative to profiled cushions, special designs can beproduced to suit applications where the energy to beabsorbed exceeds the standard cushion performance. Pleaseconsult the factory with details of the application.

(3(All MMA cylinder cushions incorporate the longest cushionsleeve and spear that can be provided in the standardenvelope without decreasing the rod bearing and pistonbearing lengths – see table of cushion lengths on page 18.

(The charts on page 18 show the energy absorption capacityfor each bore and rod combination at the head (annulus) andthe cap (full bore) ends of the cylinder. The charts are valid forpiston velocities in the range of 0.1–0.3m/s. For velocitiesbetween 0.3m/s–0.5m/s, the energy values from the chartsshould be reduced by 25%. For velocities of less than 0.1m/swhere large masses are involved, and for velocities greaterthan 0.5m/s, a special cushion profile may be required. Pleaseconsult the factory.

The cushion capacity of the head end is less than that of thecap, owing to the pressure intensification effect across thepiston.

The energy absorption capacity of the cushion decreaseswith drive pressure, which in normal circuits is the relief valvesetting.

Cushioning requirements can be calculated automatically forindividual cylinder/load combinations using the Europeancylinder inPHorm selection program (1260-Eur).

,-as velocity is greater than 0.3m/s, the energy absorptionfigures obtained from the charts on page 18 should bereduced by 25% – see Cushion Calculations, opposite.Comparison with the cushioning chart curve for this cylindershows an energy capacity for the cap end cushion of 5100 J.Reducing this by 25% gives a capacity of 3825 J, so thestandard cushion can safely decelerate the 3000 J in thisexample. Where cushion performance figures are critical, ourengineers can run a computer simulation to determineaccurate cushion performance – please contact the factoryfor details.

, Cushioning calculations are based on the formula: E = ½mv2

for horizontal applications. For inclined or vertically downwardor upward applications, this is modified to:

E = ½mv2 + mgl x 10-3 x sin– for inclined or vertically downward direction of mass;

E = ½mv2 – mgl x 10-3 x sin– for inclined or vertically upward direction of mass.

Where:E = energy absorbed in Joulesg = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81m/s2

v = velocity in metres/secondl = length of cushion in millimetres (see page 18)m = mass of load in kilogrammes (including piston and rod,

see page 18) = angle to horizontal in degreesp = pressure in bar

/The following example shows how to calculate the energydeveloped by masses moving in a straight line. For non-linearmotion, other calculations are required; please consultthe factory. Theexample assumesthat the bore androd diameters arealready appropriatefor the application.The effects of frictionon the cylinderand load havebeen ignored.

Selected bore/rod = 80/50mm (No.1 rod)Cushioning at the cap end

Pressure = 150 barMass = 7710 kgVelocity = 0.4m/s = 45o

Sin = 0.7Cushion length = 45mm

E = ½mv2 + mgl x 10-3 x sin

E = 7710 x 0.42 + 7710 x 9.81 x 45 x 0.7 2 103

E = 617 + 2383 = 3000 Joules

v


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders(

(%.The cushion energy absorption capacity data shown beloware based on the maximum fatigue-free pressures developedin the cylinder tube. If working life cycle applications of lessthan 106 cycles are envisaged, then greater energyabsorption figures can be applied. Please consult the factory iffurther information is required.

Where cushion performance figures are critical, ourengineers can run a computer simulation to determineaccurate cushion performance – please contact the factoryfor details.

0123 0123!

(3(7# $12323!

eroBØmm

doR.oN

doRØmm

051 232 63

361 042 54

081 052 65

0011 362 07

5211 082 09

0411 092 001

0611 0012 011

0811 0112 521

0021 5212 041

0521 0612 081

0231 0022 022

noihsuChtgneL

mm

03

04

54

55

06

06

56

56

56

09

001

doR&notsiPekortSoreZ

gk

repdoRekortSmm01

gk

0.2 60.03.2 80.04.3 01.00.4 21.08.5 51.07.6 91.07.01 42.01.21 03.07.02 93.08.32 05.00.82 05.00.13 26.01.04 26.06.44 57.00.45 57.00.26 69.02.67 69.00.68 32.18.131 85.12.051 00.22.052 64.27.972 89.2

320

0 40 80 120 160 200 240


1000000

100000

10

Ene

rgy

Cap

acity

(Jo

ules

)

10000

1000

100

250

200180160

140125

100

80

63

50

320/220

0 40 80 120 160 200 240


1000000

100000

10

Ene

rgy

Cap

acity

(Jo

ules

)

10000

1000

100

250/180

200/140180/125160/110

140/100125/90

100/70

80/56

63/45

50/36

320/200

0 40 80 120 160 200 240


1000000

100000

10

Ene

rgy

Cap

acity

(Jo

ules

)

10000

1000

100

250/160

200/125180/110160/100

140/90125/80

100/63

80/50

63/40

50/32



% The Group 1 seal materials supplied with standard cylindersare suitable for use with any petroleum-based hydraulic fluid.Special seals are available for use with fluids such as fireresistant synthetic phosphate ester, and phosphateester-based fluids. If there is any doubt regarding sealcompatibility with the operating medium, please consult thefactory.

The table above is a guide to commonly used sealingcompounds and their operating parameters.

Standard seals are suitable for use at temperatures between-20oC and +80oC. Where operating temperatures exceedthese limits, special seal compounds may be required toensure satisfactory service life – please consult the factory.

A range of seal options is available for the fluid groups listedabove – see cylinder model numbers on page 25. Whererequired, special seals, in addition to those shown above, canalso be supplied. Please insert an S (Special) in the modelnumber and specify fluid medium when ordering.

(4Seals used with High Water Content Fluids (HFA) are prone towear due to the poor lubricity of the operating medium. Thisproblem increases with pressure. These seals are best usedwhere high pressure is applied only to clamp the load. Ifpressures above 120 bar are applied when the cylinder isactuating, seal life will be significantly reduced. Seal wear canalso be affected by the particular HFA fluid specified.

5 Special modifications to cylinders are available for high watercontent fluids. Modifications include a stainless steel pistonrod, and plating of internal surfaces. When ordering, pleasespecify the maximum operating pressure or load/speedconditions, as the stainless steel rod is of lower tensilestrength than the standard material.

5 Parker Hannifin can also supply cylinders for use with purewater as the fluid medium. Please consult the factory.

5 Parker Hannifin warrants cylinders modified forwater or high water content fluid service to be free of defectsin materials or workmanship, but cannot accept responsibilityfor premature failure caused by excessive wear resulting fromlack of lubricity, or where failure is caused by corrosion,electrolysis or mineral deposits within the cylinder.

, For maximum component life, the system should be protectedfrom contamination by effective filtration. Fluid cleanlinessshould be in accordance with ISO 4406. The quality of filtersshould be in accordance with the appropriate ISO standards.

The rating of the filter media depends on the systemcomponents and the application. The minimum required forhydraulic systems should be class 19/15 to ISO 4406, whichequates to 25 (ß1075) to ISO 4572.

puorG :fonoitanibmoca–slairetaMlaeS 2891-4/3476OSIotmuideMdiulFdnalG&notsiP

epyTegnaRerutarepmeT

1decnahne,EFTP,)RBN(elirtiN

)UA(enahteruylop,VH,MH,DPLH,PLH,LH,HHliOlareniM

negortin,ria,lio6065H-LIMllA

C°08+otC°02-

2 EFTP,)RBN(elirtiN )CFH(locylgretaWdnanorvehCnoitcirFwoL

C°06+otC°02-

5 ,)MPF(remotsalenobracoroulFEFTP

)R-DFH(sretseetahpsohpnodesabsdiulftnatsisereriFniroserutarepmethgihtaliociluardyhrofelbatiusoslA

.stnemnorivnetoh .lordykShtiwesurofelbatiustoNsnoitadnemmocers'rerutcafunamdiulfeeS

dnanorvehCnoitcirFwoL

C°051+otC°51-

6 ,elirtingnidulcnisdnuopmocsuoiraV,enahteruylopdecnahne

EFTPdnasremotsalenobracoroulf

retaW)AFH(5/59noislumeretawniliO

dnanorvehCnoitcirFwoL

C°05+otC°5+

7 )BFH(04/06noislumelioniretaWdnanorvehCnoitcirFwoL

C°05+otC°5+



, 6

%(&" The ISO 6149 port incorporates a raised ring in the spot facefor identification, as shown below.

Raised ring withinspot face

1 25 bar to 350 bar series2 M10 x 1.5 to ISO 6162 (1994) optional3 400 bar series

4 % 6 Parker MMA cylinders are supplied as standard with BSP(parallel thread) ports to ISO 228/1, spot faced for sealingwashers.

Where required, oversize or additional ports can be suppliedon the sides of heads or caps that are not occupied bycushion valves. Refer to the tables of port sizes on page 20.

% In addition to the standard and oversize BSPP ports, metricthreaded ports to DIN 3852 Pt.1 and ISO 6149, and flangeports to ISO 6162 (1994) can also be supplied – see tableopposite. Other flange port styles are available on request.

* Consult factory** An M50 thread to DIN 24 333 can be supplied if required.

FF

ED

EA

EB

A

eroBØmm

05

36

08

001

521

041

061

081

002

052

023

troPdradnatS troPezisrevO

PPSB cirteMND

egnalFPPSB cirteM

NDegnalF

G1/2 5.1x22M 31 G3/4 2x72M *

G3/4 2x72M 31 1G 2x33M *

G3/4 2x72M 31 1G 2x33M 91

1G 2x33M 91 1G 1/4 2x24M 52

1G 2x33M 91 1G 1/4 2x24M 52

1G 1/4 2x24M 52 1G 1/2 2x84M 23

1G 1/4 2x24M 52 1G 1/2 2x84M 23

1G 1/4 2x24M 52 1G 1/2 2x84M 23

1G 1/4 2x24M 52 1G 1/2 2x84M 23

1G 1/2 **2x84M 23 2G 2x06M 83

2G 2x06M 23 - - 83

eroBØmm

05

36

08

001

521

041

061

081

002

052

023

troPegnalFdradnatS

NDegnalF 1 A AE BE DE

FFØ

31 74

5.71 1.83 52.1x8M 3131 55

31 86

91 082.22 6.74 5.1x01M 91

91 79

52 121

2.62 4.25 5.1x01M 5252 921

52 251

52 061

23 1022.03 7.85 57.1x21M 2 23

23 052

eroBØmm

05

36

08

001

521

041

061

081

002

052

023

troPegnalFezisrevO

NDegnalF 1 A AE BE DE

FFØ

- - - - - -

- - - - - -

91 66 2.22 6.74 5.1x01M 91

52 972.62 4.25 5.1x01M 52

52 79

23 021

2.03 7.85 57.1x21M 2 2323 821

23 151

23 951

83 3 791 3

3 5.6 3 3.97 3 2x61M 3 83 3

83 3 842 3



7 ( 83Standard port location is position 1, as shown on pages 10 to12. Cushion adjustment needle valves are at position 2.

The port location can be repositioned at 90° or 180° fromstandard. To order non-standard port locations, specify usingposition numbers from the drawing above. In these cases, thecushion adjustment needle valves rotateaccordingly, unless otherwise specified.

Captive bleed screws are available in the head and cap asan option. The air bleed location, in relation to the supply portlocation, must be specified on the order. Air bleeds areavailable at all positions.


1 This refers to fluid velocity in connecting lines, not piston velocity

6 One of the factors involved in determining the speed of ahydraulic cylinder is fluid flow in connecting lines, particularlyat the cap end port, due to the absence of a piston rod. Fluidvelocity in connecting lines should be limited to 5m/s tominimise fluid turbulence, pressure loss and water hammereffects. The tables below are a guide for use whendetermining whether cylinder ports are adequate for theapplication. Data shown gives piston speeds for standard andoversize ports and connecting lines where the velocity of thefluid is 5m/s. If the desired piston speed results in a fluid flow inexcess of 5m/s in connecting lines, larger lines with two portsper cap should be considered. Parker recommends that aflow rate of 12m/s in connecting lines should not beexceeded.

Head Head End3

2

1

4

Cap End3

2

1

Cap

4

eroBØmm

05

36

08

001

521

041

061

081

002

052

023

troPrednilyCdradnatS

troPeziS

)PPSB(

foeroBseniLgnitcennoC

mm

dnEpaCnim/lniwolF

s/m5ta 1

notsiPdeepS

s/m

G1/2 31 04 43.0

G3/4 51 35 82.0

G3/4 51 35 81.0

1G 91 58 81.0

1G 91 58 21.0

1G 1/4 22 411 21.0

1G 1/4 22 411 01.0

1G 1/4 22 411 80.0

1G 1/4 22 411 60.0

1G 1/2 82 581 60.0

2G 83 043 70.0

eroBØmm

05

36

08

001

521

041

061

081

002

052

023

troPrednilyCezisrevO

troPeziS

foeroBseniLgnitcennoC

mm

dnEpaCnim/lniwolF

s/m5ta 1

notsiPdeepS

s/m

G3/4 41 35 54.0

1G 91 58 64.0

1G 91 58 82.0

1G 1/4 22 411 42.0

1G 1/4 22 411 61.0

1G 1/2 82 581 02.0

1G 1/2 82 581 51.0

1G 1/2 82 581 21.0

1G 1/2 82 581 01.0

2G 83 043 21.0

- - - -


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders 2

2. 9Service Assembly Kits and Seal Kits for MMA cylinderssimplify the ordering and maintenance processes. Theycontain sub-assemblies which are ready for installation, andare supplied with full instructions. When ordering ServiceAssemblies and Seal Kits, please refer to the identificationplate on the cylinder body, and supply the followinginformation:

,%. ./.! ,%. %+

27 Gland retainer (secured by screws or threaded)34 Piston rod – single rod, no cushion35 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at head end36 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at cap end37 Piston rod – single rod, cushion at both ends40 Gland wiperseal41 Lipseal45 O-ring (gland/head)46 O-ring, piston/rod (2 off – chevron piston)47 O-ring (cylinder body)55 Piston locking pin69a Cushion needle valve cartridge sealing washer70a Cushion needle valve cartridge73 Floating cushion bush74 Cushion bush retaining ring123 Stepseal

9:.1 Head7 Cap14a Standard and Low Friction gland14b Chevron gland15 Cylinder tube17 Piston17a Chevron piston – head end17b Chevron piston – cap end18 Cushion sleeve19 Front/rear flange23 Head/cap securing screw26 O-ring (cylinder body)

124 Pre-load ring for stepseal 123125 Standard piston seal126 Energising ring for standard seal 125127 Wear ring for standard piston131 Low Friction piston seal132 Energising ring for Low Friction piston seal 131133 Wear ring for Low Friction piston134 O-ring back up washer (gland/head)136 Gland securing screw137 Chevron rod seal assembly138 Back up washer – Chevron rod seal assembly139a Wear ring for chevron gland139b Wear rings for chevron gland140a Wear ring for standard gland140b Wear rings for standard gland141a Wear ring for Low Friction gland141b Wear rings for Low Friction gland142 Chevron piston bearing ring143 Chevron piston seal assembly

"

"

"

131133 132

127126

46

142

17a

55

143

125

17

46

46

0

0

0

134

136

14b

40

45

27

139a138

137

34/35/36/37

18

26

1

2740

15

70a

69a

19

23

7

26

73

1755

55

139b40

17b

69a

70a

47

41124

134 45

140a 140b123

14a

123141a

141b

12440

134 45

14a

4774

19

13414b

45

17



All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise stated.* Only available with the use of Group 1 Seals

! (see key to part numbers opposite)

Contains RKN Kit plus 14a.

Contains RKL Kit plus 14b.

Contains RKF Kit plus 14a.

Contains items 40, 41, 45, 123, 124, 134, 140a and two of 140b.

Contains items 40, 45, 134, 137, 138, 139a, and two of 139b.

Contains items 40, 45, 134, 141a, and two each of 123, 124,141b.

! Contains two each of items 26 and 47.

" # Contains CB Kit plus 125, 126, and two of 127.

"!

" #$

" # "Contains CB Kit plus 55, 142, and two each of 46 and 143.

" # "Contains CB Kit plus 131, 132, and two of 133.

!" All part numbers listed contain standard, Group 1 seals. Toorder kits with other classes of seals, replace the last digit ofthe part number shown with the number of the seal grouprequired. Eg: RGF210MMA0701, containing a Group 1 seal,becomes RGF210MMA0705 when it contains a Group 5 seal.

eroBØ

05

36

08

001

521

041

061

081

002

052

023

tiKBCdnEydoB

slaeS

tiKNPdradnatS

*slaeSnotsiP

tiKLLPnorvehC

slaeSnotsiP

tiKFPnoitcirFwoLslaeSnotsiP

10AMM0502BC 10AMM050NP 10AMM050LLP 10AMM0502FP











eroBØ

doR.oN

doRØ

051 23

2 63

361 04

2 54

081 05

2 65

0011 36

2 07

5211 08

2 09

0411 09

2 001

0611 001

2 011

0811 011

2 521

0021 521

2 041

0521 061

2 081

0231 002

2 022

tiKNGRdnalGdradnatS

*slaeSdnaegdirtraC

tiKLLGRdnalGnorvehC

slaeSdnaegdirtraC

tiKFGRdnalGnoitcirFwoLslaeSdnaegdirtraC

tiKNKRdnalGdradnatS*slaeSegdirtraC

tiKLLKRdnalGnorvehCslaeSegdirtraC

tiKFKRdnalGnoitcirFwoL

slaeSegdirtraC

1230AMM50NGR 1230AMM50LLGR 1230AMM502FGR 1230AMM50NKR 1230AMM50LLKR 1230AMM502FKR























Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders %


% MMA cylinders are available with standard metric male andfemale rod ends to ISO 4395. They can also be supplied withother rod end threads, eg: ISO metric coarse, Unified, BritishStandard etc., or to the customer's special requirements.

Style 4 denotes a standard male thread. Style 9 denotes afemale thread, and is available only with the No.2 rod. Ordersfor non-standard rod ends, designated Style 3, should includedimensioned sketches and descriptions, showingdimensions KK or KF, A or AF, and the thread form required.

%

& "

5 ,Piston rods up to and including 90mm in diameter are suppliedwith the wrench flats D shown in the table below. Rods above90mm in diameter feature four drilled holes to accept a pinwrench.

eroBØ

doR.oN

MMdoR

Ø

051 23

2 63

361 04

2 54

081 05

2 65

0011 36

2 07

5211 08

2 09

0411 09

2 001

0611 001

2 011

0811 011

2 521

0021 521

2 041

0521 061

2 081

0231 002

2 022

FA&A C D ANKK

4elytSFK

9elytSW

6351 82 13 2x72M -

2251 23 53 2x72M 2x72M

5481 43 83 2x33M -

5281 63 34 2x33M 2x33M

6502 34 84 2x24M -

8202 64 45 2x24M 2x24M

3632 35 06 2x84M -

2332 06 76 2x84M 2x84M

5872 56 77 3x46M -

5.6372 57 78 3x46M 3x46M

0972 57 78 3x27M -

5.6372 - 69 3x27M 3x27M

5913 - 69 3x08M -

5.0413 - 601 3x08M 3x08M

50163 - 601 3x09M -

5.5463 - 121 3x09M 3x09M

21163 - 121 3x001M -

5.5463 - 631 3x001M 3x001M

52183 - 551 4x521M -

5.0583 - 571 4x521M 4x521M

06144 - 591 4x061M -

5.6544 - 412 4x061M 4x061M

MM

DWrench Flats

A C

NA KK

W

MM

DWrench Flats

AF

C

NA KF

W


Catalogue HY07-1210/UK Roundline Cylinders04-

Please state on order whether accessories are to beassembled to cylinder or supplied separately.

MountingStyle

Ports

Glandand

PistonType

S

SpecialFeatures

PistonRod

Number

PistonRodEnd

RodThread

NetStroke

FluidMedium

AirBleeds

MMA

Series PortPositions

C

CushionHead

Page 17-18

Bore

C

CushionCap

Pages17-18

%

,% "1 Rod No.1 10-132 Rod No.2 10-13

!% "MF3 Head Circular Flange 10MF4 Cap Circular Flange 10MP3 Cap Fixed Eye 11MP5 Cap Fixed Eye with

Spherical Bearing 11MT4 Intermediate Trunnion 12MS2 Foot Mounting 12

0"+ "N Standard

(Group 1 fluids only) 5F Low Friction 5LL Chevron 5A Load Holding

(Group 1 fluids only) 5E Special designs 5

% "S Oversized Ports 21S Special Seals 19S Stop Tube 15-16

– or to customer specification

"" "1 Head position 1-4 201 Cap position 1-4 20

% "!%

M Group 1 19C Group 2 19D Group 5 19A1 Group 6 19B Group 7 19

4 ""

4 Head position 1-4 6, 204 Cap position 1-4 6, 2000 No air bleeds –

+ "M Metric (standard) 24

"4 Style 4 249 Style 9 243 Style 3 (Special) – please

supply description or drawing 24

" "R BSP Parallel 21M Metric to DIN 3852 Pt. 1 21Y Metric to ISO 6149

– optional 21P Flange Ports to ISO 6162 21

7Required for basic cylinderIndicate optional features or leave blank

05 C 3FM AMM R N S 1 9 M C 032 M 11 44




1210/5-UK, 3M, 10/02, PD

4%2!/Parker Hannifin GmbHTel: (7242) 56921Fax: (7242) 5692120

%2, Parker Hannifin S.A. N.V.Tel: 67 280 900Fax: 67 280 999

5% 2"%Parker Hannifin CorporationTel: (02) 830 85 221Fax: (02) 830 85 360

6/2*78Parker Hannifin Danmark A/STel: 43 56 04 00Fax: 43 73 31 07

29Parker Hannifin OyTel: 9 476 731Fax: 9 476 73200

2.%.4Parker Hannifin S.A.Tel: 4 50 25 80 25Fax: 4 50 03 67 37

2 Parker Hannifin GmbHTel: (221) 71720Fax: (221) 7172219

%2 %Parker Hannifin Corp.Tel: 1 25 28 137Fax: 1 25 28 129

* 2 Parker Sales (Ireland) Ltd.Tel: (353) 1 801 4010Fax: (353) 1 801 4132

* 24.Parker Hannifin S.p.A.Tel: (0331) 765611Fax: (0331) 765612

, 2 5 Parker Hannifin B.V.Tel: (0541) 585000Fax: (0541) 585459

,2/Parker Hannifin A/STel: 64 91 10 00Fax: 64 91 10 90

" 23Parker Hannifin Corp.Tel: (22) 863 49 42Fax: (22) 863 49 44

"% 2" Parker Hannifin Portugal Lda.Tel: (22) 999 7360Fax: (22) 996 1527

/2Ref. Czech Republic

2!Parker Hannifin España S.A.Tel: (91) 675 73 00Fax: (91) 675 77 11

2:Parker Hannifin ABTel: 08-5979 50 00Fax: 08-5979 51 20

5 2Hydrel A.G. RomanshornTel: (714) 66 66 66Fax: (714) 66 66 80

+%/2*% Hidroser Hidrolik - PnömatikTel: (212) 886 72 70Fax: (212) 886 69 35

;123Parker Hannifin PlcTel: (01923) 492000Fax: (01923) 248557



Making the Choice

Selecting and Applying Piston and Bladder Accumulators

Catalogue 1243/1-GB

2

Introduction 2

Design Features and Construction 3

Operation 3

Accumulator Selection 4

Gas Bottle Installations 7

Large/Multiple Accumulators 8

Precharging 9

Failure Prevention 11

Hydro-pneumaticaccumulators are themost widely used typeof accumulator inindustrial hydraulicsystems. They usecompressed gas toapply force tohydraulic fluid.Identical in theiroperating principle,Parker’s piston andbladder accumulatorsuse differentmechanisms toseparate the gas fromthe fluid. It is thisdifference – and the resultingperformancecharacteristics –which determinestheir suitability fordifferent applications.The correct selectionand application ofpiston and bladderaccumulators isexamined in thefollowing pages.

Adding anaccumulator to ahydraulic system can:

improve systemefficiency

absorb shock

supplement pumpdelivery

provide emergencypower

compensate forleakage

maintain pressure

dispense fluid

act as a fluid barrier

Contents

Introduction

Note: Failure or improper

selection or improper use

of accumulators or related

items can cause death,

personal injury and

property damage. Parker

Hannifin shall not be liable

for any incidental,

consequential or special

damages that result from

use of the information

contained in this

publication.

Parker’s hydro-pneumaticaccumulators regulate theperformance of a hydraulicsystem by providing anadditional volume ofsystem fluid, pressurisedby an external gas supply.A correctly specifiedaccumulator can:

reduce shock effects ina system resulting frominertia or externalmechanical forces

maintain systempressure bycompensating forpressure loss due toleakage

provide a back-upsupply of hydraulicenergy to maintain aconstant flow whensystem demand isgreater than pumpdelivery.

In industrial applications,two types of hydro-pneumatic accumulatorare widely used – thepiston type and thebladder type. Each has

particular advantages andlimitations which shouldbe considered whenselecting an accumulatorfor a specific application.

Bladder accumulators aregenerally preferred forapplications where veryrapid cycling is expected,and high fluid toleranceand very low responsetimes are required. Theyprovide excellent gas/fluidseparation.

Piston accumulators offergreater efficiency andflexibility in mostapplications, due to theirwider range of sizes.Parker’s pistonaccumulators feature apatented five-blade V-O-ring which maintainsfull contact between thepiston and the bore,without rolling. Sealingremains effective evenunder rapid cycling at highoperating pressures.

3

Design Features and Construction

Operation

Bladder AccumulatorsParker’s bladderaccumulators feature aseamless, non-pleated,flexible rubber bladderhoused within a steel shell.The open end of thebladder is attached to theprecharging valve at thegas end of the shell. Apoppet valve, normallyheld open by springpressure, regulates fluidflow through the hydraulicport. Parker’s bladderaccumulators are availableas either top or bottomrepairable units, foroptimum flexibility.

The bladder is chargedwith a dry inert gas, eg: nitrogen, to a set

precharge pressuredetermined by the systemrequirements. As systempressure fluctuates, so thebladder expands andcontracts to dischargefluid from, or allow fluidinto, the accumulatorshell.

Piston AccumulatorsParker’s pistonaccumulators consist of acylindrical body, sealed bya gas cap and chargingvalve at the gas end, andby a hydraulic cap at thehydraulic end. A lightweightpiston separates the gasside of the accumulatorfrom the hydraulic side.

As with the bladderaccumulator, the gas sideis charged to a pre-determined pressure.Changes in systempressure cause the pistonto rise and fall, allowingfluid to enter or forcing itto be discharged from theaccumulator body.

Fig.1 Typical bladder andpiston accumulators

Fig.2 Operating conditionsof bladder and pistonaccumulators

Stage A The accumulatoris empty, and neither gasnor hydraulic sides arepressurised.

Stage B The accumulatoris precharged.

Stage C The hydraulicsystem is pressurised.System pressure exceedsprecharge pressure, andfluid flows into theaccumulator.

Stage D System pressurepeaks. The accumulator isfilled with fluid to its designcapacity. Any furtherincrease in hydraulicpressure would beprevented by a relief valvein the system.

Stage E Systempressure falls. Prechargepressure forces fluid fromthe accumulator into thesystem.

(A) (B) (C) (D) (E) (F)

Gas

Chargingvalve

Bladder

Shell

Poppet

Spring

Hydrauliccap

Chargingvalve

Body

Gas cap

Piston

Hydrauliccap

Bladder PistonGas

Stage F Minimumsystem pressure isreached. The accumulatorhas discharged its designmaximum volume of fluidback into the system.

4

Accumulator Selection

When selecting anaccumulator for aparticular application,both system andperformance criteriashould be considered. Toensure long andsatisfactory service life,the following factorsshould be taken intoaccount.

Failure mode

Output volume

Flow rate

Fluid type

Response time

Shock suppression

High frequency cycling

Mounting position

External forces

Sizing information

Certification

Safety

Failure ModesIn certain applications, asudden failure may bepreferable to a gradualfailure: a high-speedmachine, for example,where product quality is afunction of hydraulicsystem pressure.Because sudden failure isdetected immediately,scrap is minimised,whereas a gradual failuremight mean thatproduction of a largequantity of sub-standardproduct could occurbefore the failure becameapparent. A bladderaccumulator would bemost suitable for thisapplication.

Conversely, where safetyis paramount and suddenfailure could be

catastrophic as, forexample, in a braking orsteering circuit on mobileequipment, a progressivefailure mode is desirable.In this application, apiston accumulator wouldbe appropriate.

Output VolumeThe maximum sizesavailable of each type ofaccumulator determinethe limits of their suitabilitywhere large outputvolumes are required.There are, however,several methods ofachieving higher outputvolumes than standardaccumulator capacitiessuggest – see Large/Multiple Accumulators,page 8.

Table 1 compares typicalfluid outputs for Parker’s40 litres piston andbladder accumulatorsoperating isothermally asauxiliary power sourcesover a range of minimumsystem pressures. Thehigher prechargepressures recommendedfor piston accumulatorsresult in substantiallyhigher outputs than fromcomparable bladderaccumulators. Also,bladder accumulators arenot generally suitable forcompression ratiosgreater than 4:1, as thesecould result in excessivebladder deformation andhigh bladder temperatures.

Piston accumulators havean inherently higheroutput relative to theiroverall dimensions, whichmay be critical in locations

where space is limited.Piston accumulators areavailable in a choice ofdiameters and lengths fora given capacity, whereasbladder accumulators arefrequently offered in onlyone size per capacity, andfewer sizes are available.Piston accumulators canalso be built to customlengths for applicationsin which available spaceis critical.

Flow RateTable 2 shows typicalmaximum flow rates forParker’s piston andbladder accumulators in arange of sizes.

The larger standardbladder designs arelimited to 825 litres/min,although this may beincreased to 2250litres/min using a high-flow port. The poppet

valve controls flow rate,with excessive flowcausing the poppet toclose prematurely. Flowrates greater than 2250litres/min may be achievedby mounting severalaccumulators on acommon manifold – seeLarge/MultipleAccumulators, page 8.

For a given systempressure, flow rates forpiston accumulatorsgenerally exceed those forbladder designs. Flow islimited by piston velocity,which should not exceed3m/s to avoid piston sealdamage. In high-speedapplications, high sealcontact temperatures andrapid decompression ofnitrogen that haspermeated the seal itself,can cause blisters, cracksand pits in the surface ofthe seal.

Table 2: Max. Recommended Accumulator Flow Rates

Piston Bladder

Capacity Bore Flow, lpm Capacity Flow, lpm at 210barlitres mm at 210 bar litres Standard Hi-Flow

1 51 375 1 225 -

4 102 1500 4 560 -

10 146 3000 10 825 2250

57 178 4500 825 2250

75 229 7500Over

825 2250

190 302 1275010 litres

825 2250

Table 1: Relative Outputs of a 40 litre Accumulator

Compression System Pressure Recommended Fluid OutputRatio bar Precharge bar litres

max min Bladder Piston Bladder Piston

1.5 210 140 119 137 11.3 13

2 210 105 105 102 16.9 19.3

3 210 70 59 63 22.6 24

6 210 35 * 28 * 26.7

* Below required minimum operating ratio of 4:1.

5

Fluid TypeBladder accumulators aremore resistant than pistontypes to damage causedby contamination of thehydraulic fluid. While somerisk exists fromcontaminants trappedbetween the bladder andthe shell, a higher risk offailure exists from thesame contaminants actingon the piston seal.

Bladder accumulators arealso preferred to pistontypes for water service,because water systemstend to carry more solidcontaminants, lubricationis poorer, and the pistonand bore require plating toresist corrosion.

Piston accumulators arepreferred for systemsusing exotic fluids orwhere extremes oftemperature areexperienced as,compared to bladders,piston seals are moreeasily moulded in thespecial compoundsrequired, and may be lessexpensive.

Response TimeIn theory, bladderaccumulators shouldrespond more quickly tosystem pressure variationsthan piston types. There isno static friction to beovercome as with a pistonseal, and there is nopiston mass to beaccelerated anddecelerated. In practice,however, the difference inresponse is not great, andis probably insignificant inmost applications.

This applies equally inservo applications, as onlya small percentage ofservos require responsetimes of 25ms or less, theregion where thedifference in responsebetween piston andbladder accumulatorsbecomes significant.Generally, a bladderaccumulator should beused for applicationsrequiring less than 25msresponse time, and eitheraccumulator type for aresponse of 25ms orgreater.

Shock SuppressionShock control does notnecessarily demand abladder accumulator.

Example 1A test circuit (Fig.3)includes a control valvesituated 36m from apump supplying fluid at113 litres/min. The circuituses 30mm tubing andthe relief valve is set toopen at 190 bar. Shuttingthe control valve (Fig.4)produces a pressurespike of 27 bar over reliefvalve setting (blue trace).

Installing a Parker 4 litrepiston accumulator at thevalve reduces the transientto 6.9 bar over relief valvesetting (green trace).Substituting a 4 litrebladder accumulatorfurther reduces thetransient to 5.4 bar overrelief valve setting (redtrace), an improvement ofonly 1.5 bar and of littlepractical significance.

Example 2A second, similar testusing 15mm tubing and arelief valve setting of 180bar (Fig.5) results in apressure spike of 139 barover relief valve settingwithout an accumulator

(blue trace). A Parkerpiston accumulatorreduces the transient to7.4 bar over relief valvesetting (green trace), whilea bladder accumulatorachieves a transient of 6.0bar over relief valvesetting (red trace). Thedifference betweenaccumulator types inshock suppression isagain negligible.

Tubing lengthmakespump-to-servovalvedistance 36m.

Fig.3 Test circuit to generateand measure shock waves ina hydraulic system

280

140

0

Pre

ssur

e –

bar

0 1000 2000Time – ms

No accumulator in circuit

Piston accumulator

Bladder accumulator

280

140

0

Pre

ssur

e –

bar

0 1000 2000Time – ms

No accumulator in circuit

Piston accumulator

Bladder accumulator

Fig.4 Shock wave test results – Example 1

Fig.5 Shock wave test results – Example 2

6

Accumulator Selection (continued)

High FrequencyCyclingHigh-frequency systempressure cycling cancause a pistonaccumulator to ‘dither’,with the piston cyclingrapidly back and forth in adistance less than its sealwidth. Over an extendedperiod, this condition maycause heat build-up underthe seal due to lack oflubrication, resulting in sealand bore wear. For high-frequency dampingapplications, therefore, abladder accumulator isgenerally more suitable.

Mounting PositionThe optimum mountingposition for anyaccumulator is vertical,with the hydraulic portdownwards. Pistonmodels can be mountedhorizontally if the fluid iskept clean but, if solidcontaminants are presentor expected in significantamounts, horizontalmounting can result inuneven or accelerated seal wear.

A bladder accumulatormay also be mountedhorizontally, but unevenwear on the top of thebladder as it rubs againstthe shell while floating onthe fluid can reduce itsservice life and even causepermanent distortion. The

extent of the damage willdepend upon fluidcleanliness, cycle rate, andcompression ratio (i.e.maximum system pressuredivided by minimumsystem pressure). Inextreme cases, fluid canbe trapped away from thehydraulic port (Fig.6),reducing output, or thebladder may becomeelongated, forcing thepoppet valve to closeprematurely.

External ForcesAny application subjectingan accumulator toacceleration, decelerationor centrifugal force mayhave a detrimental effecton its operation, and couldcause damage to abladder accumulator.

Forces along the axis ofthe tube or shell normallyhave little effect on abladder accumulator butmay cause a variation ingas pressure in a pistontype because of the massof the piston.Forces perpendicular to anaccumulator’s axis shouldnot affect a piston model,but fluid in a bladderaccumulator may bethrown to one side of the

shell (Fig.7), displacing thebladder and flattening andlengthening it. In thiscondition, fluid dischargecould cause the poppetvalve to pinch and cut thebladder. Higher prechargepressures increase theresistance of the bladderto the effects ofperpendicular forces.

Sizing InformationAccurate sizing of anaccumulator is critical if itis to deliver a long andreliable service life.Information and workedexamples are shown inParker’s accumulatorcatalogues, oraccumulator size can becalculated automaticallyby entering applicationdetails into Parker’sinPHorm softwareselection programme –please contact yourParker Sales Office fordetails.

CertificationAccumulators arefrequently required toconform to domestic orinternational certification.These requirements rangefrom simple safety factorsto elaborate materialstesting and inspectionprocedures carried out byan external agency. Mostof the accumulators inParker’s piston andbladder ranges areavailable with certificationto the major Europeanstandards.

SafetyHydro-pneumaticaccumulators shouldalways be used inconjunction with a safetyblock, to enable theaccumulator to beisolated from the circuit in an emergency or formaintenance purposes.

Acceleration

Fig.6 A horizontally-mountedbladder accumulator can trapfluid away from the hydraulicvalve

Fig.7 Perpendicular forcecauses the mass of the fluidto displace the bladder

7

Gas Bottle Installations

Remote gas storage offersinstallation flexibility wherethe available space orposition cannotaccommodate anaccumulator of therequired size. A smalleraccumulator may be usedin conjunction with aParker auxiliary gas bottle,which can be locatedelsewhere (Fig.8).

The gas bottle is sized bythe formula:

Fig.8 An accumulator canbe used with a remotegas bottle where space iscritical

For example, anapplication that calls for a115 litre accumulator mayonly actually require 30-40litres of fluid output. Thisapplication could thereforebe satisfied with a 40 litreaccumulator and a 75 litregas bottle.

Gas bottle installationsmay use either bladder orpiston accumulators,subject to the followingconsiderations.

Any accumulator usedwith remote gasstorage shouldgenerally have thesame size port at thegas end as at thehydraulic end, to allowan unimpeded flow ofgas to and from thegas bottle. The gasbottle will have anequivalent port in oneend and a gas chargingvalve at the other.

A piston accumulatorshould be carefullysized to prevent thepiston bottoming at theend of the cycle.Bladder designs shouldbe sized to preventfilling to more than 75%full.

Bladder installationsrequire a specialdevice called atransfer barrier at thegas end, to preventextrusion of thebladder into the gasbottle piping. The flowrate between thebladder transfer barrierand its gas bottle willbe restricted by theneck of the transferbarrier tube.

Because of the abovelimitations, pistonaccumulators aregenerally preferred tobladder types for use ingas bottle installations.

accumulator size – required fluid output = gas bottle size

Multiple accumulator/storage bottle assembly

8

Large/Multiple Accumulators

The requirement for anaccumulator with anoutput of more than 200litres cannot usually bemet by a singleaccumulator, becauselarger piston designs arerelatively rare andexpensive, and bladderdesigns are not generallyavailable in these sizes.The requirement can,however, be met using oneof the multiple-componentinstallations shown in Figs. 9 and 10.

The installation in Fig.9consists of several gasbottles serving a singlepiston accumulatorthrough a gas manifold.The accumulator portionmay be sized outside ofthe limitations of the sizingformula on page 7, butshould not allow the pistonto strike the capsrepeatedly while cycling.The larger gas volumeavailable with thisconfiguration allows arelatively greater pistonmovement – and hencefluid output – than with a

conventionally sized singleaccumulator, withoutcausing an excessiveincrease in gas pressure.A further advantage isthat, because of the largeprecharge ‘reservoir’, gaspressure is relativelyconstant over the fulldischarge cycle of theaccumulator. The majordisadvantage of thisarrangement is that asingle seal failure coulddrain the whole gassystem.

The installation in Fig.10uses severalaccumulators, of piston orbladder design, mountedon a hydraulic manifold.Two advantages ofmultiple accumulatorsover multiple gas bottlesare that higher unit fluidflow rates are permissible,and a single leak will notdrain precharge pressurefrom the entire system.

A potential disadvantageis that, where pistonaccumulators are used,the piston with the leastfriction will move first andcould occasionally bottomon the hydraulic end cap.However, in a slow orinfrequently used system,this would be of littlesignificance.

FluidGas manifold

Fluid manifold

Fig.9 (below) Several gasbottles can supply prechargepressure to a singleaccumulator

Fig.10 (above) Multipleaccumulators manifoldedtogether offer high systemflow rates

9

Precharging

Precharging ProcessCorrect precharginginvolves accurately fillingthe gas side of anaccumulator with a dry,inert gas such as nitrogen,before admitting fluid tothe hydraulic side.

It is important toprecharge an accumulatorto the correct specifiedpressure. Prechargepressure determines thevolume of fluid retained inthe accumulator atminimum systempressure. In an energystorage application, abladder accumulator istypically precharged to80% of minimum systempressure, and a pistonaccumulator to 7 barbelow, or 90% of,minimum system pressure.

The ability to correctlycarry out and maintainprecharging is animportant factor whenchoosing the type ofaccumulator for anapplication.

Bladder accumulators arefar more susceptible todamage duringprecharging than pistontypes. Before prechargingand entering service, the

inside of the shell shouldbe lubricated with systemfluid. This fluid acts as acushion, and lubricatesand protects the bladderas it unwinds and unfurls.When precharging, the first5 bar of nitrogen should beintroduced slowly. Failureto follow this precautioncould result in immediatebladder failure: highpressure nitrogen,expanding rapidly and thuscold, could form a channelin the folded bladder,concentrating at the

bottom. The chilled, brittlerubber, expanding rapidlywould then inevitablyrupture (Fig.11). Thebladder could also beforced under the poppetand torn (Fig.12).

Close attention should be paid to operatingtemperature duringprecharging, as a rise intemperature will cause acorresponding increase inpressure which could thenexceed the precharge limit.

Little damage can occurwhen precharging a pistonaccumulator, but the fluidside should be empty sothat the gas volume ismaximised.

Excessively HighPrechargeExcessive prechargepressure or a reduction inthe minimum systempressure without acorresponding reduction inprecharge pressure maycause operating problemsor damage to accumulators.

With excessive prechargepressure, a pistonaccumulator will cyclebetween stages (e) and (b)of Fig.2, see page 3, andthe piston will travel tooclose to the hydraulic endcap. The piston couldbottom at minimumsystem pressure, reducingoutput and eventuallydamaging the piston andpiston seal. The piston canoften be heard bottoming,warning of impendingproblems.

An excessive precharge ina bladder accumulator candrive the bladder into thepoppet assembly whencycling between stages (e)and (b). This could causefatigue failure of thepoppet spring assembly,or even a pinched and cutbladder, should it becometrapped beneath thepoppet as it is forcedclosed (Fig.12). Excessiveprecharge pressure is themost common cause ofbladder failure.

Excessively LowPrechargeExcessively low prechargepressure or an increase insystem pressure without acorresponding increase inprecharge pressure canalso cause operating

problems and subsequentaccumulator damage.With no precharge in apiston accumulator, thepiston will be driven intothe gas end cap and willoften remain there.Usually, a single contactwill not cause anydamage, but repeatedimpacts will eventuallydamage the piston andseal.

Conversely, for a bladderaccumulator, too low orno precharge can haverapid and severeconsequences. Thebladder will be crushedinto the top of the shelland may extrude into thegas valve and bepunctured (Fig.13). Onesuch cycle is sufficient todestroy a bladder. Overall,piston accumulators aregenerally more tolerant ofcareless precharging.

Fig.12 C-shaped cut showsthat bladder has been trappedunder poppet

Fig.11 Starburst rupturecaused by loss of bladderelasticity

Fig.13 Fluid entering anunprecharged bladderaccumulator has forced thebladder into the gas valve

Cylinder Division Sales Offices

Austria – ViennaParker Hannifin GmbHTel: 1332/36050Fax: 1332/360577

Belgium – BrusselsS.A. Parker Hannifin N.V.Tel: (02) 762 18 00Fax: (02) 762 33 30

Czech Republic – PragueParker Hannifin CorporationTel: 2 6134 1704Fax: 2 6134 1703


Finland – VantaaParker Hannifin OyTel: 0 9 476 731Fax: 0 9 476 73200

France – Contamine-sur-ArveParker Hannifin S.A. Tel: 4 50 25.80.25Fax: 4 50 03.67.37


Hungary – BudapestParker Hannifin Corp. Tel + Fax: 1 252 2539



Norway – LanghusParker Hannifin A/STel: (64) 86 77 60Fax: (64) 86 68 88


Slovak Republic See Czech Republic


Sweden – SpångaParker Hannifin Sweden AB.Tel: 08-761 29 60Fax: 08-761 81 70




Hydraulics 10/98

1


Position SwitchesFor Tie Rod and Roundline Cylinders

Catalogue 0810/3-UK

Hydraulics

2


IntroductionPosition switches provide a versatile and cost-effective meansof monitoring piston position in a hydraulic cylinder. Theswitching signal which they generate can be used to control orsequence actions which correspond to specific points in aproduction cycle or process, as determined by the position ofthe cylinder's piston. Parker's position switches are ruggedunits designed for industrial use, and their performance hasbeen proven over millions of cycles of testing and in the harshoperating environments of manufacturing industry.

Parker offers two types of position switch – an End-of-Strokeswitch which mounts in the head and/or cap of the hydrauliccylinder, and the Read.me switch – a mid-stroke design whichclamps to the body of the cylinder in a position determined bythe user. Both types of switch are 'designed in' to the cylinderand must be specified at the time of order.


Contents PageIntroduction 2Operating Principles 3Application 3Selection Guide 3Read.me Switches

Construction 3Operating Principle 4Performance 4Positioning 5Specification 5Installation 5Model Numbers and Ordering 5

End of Stroke SwitchesIntroduction 6Mounting Data 7Dimensions 8Installation 9Technical Data 10Ordering 10Applications Data 11

Index PageApplication 3Build Length 4Cabling 5, 6CE Marking 3Connectors 6Connection – Series and Parallel 11Cushioning 6Dimensions 4, 8Installation 5, 7, 9Introduction 2, 3,6Model Numbers 5, 10Mounting Configurations 7Mounting Styles 5Operating Principles 3, 4Ordering 5, 10Performance 4Positioning 5Protective Covers 5Selection Guide 3Short Circuit Protection 6Specification 5,10Stroke Adjusters 6

Parker HannifinParker Hannifin Corporation is a world leader in the manufactureof components and systems for motion control. Parker hasmore than 800 product lines for hydraulic, pneumatic andelectro-mechanical applications in some 1200 industrial andaerospace markets. With more than 35,000 employees andsome 200 manufacturing plants and administration officesaround the world, Parker provides customers with technicalexcellence and first class customer service.

Parker Hannifin's Cylinder Division is the world's largestsupplier of hydraulic cylinders for industrial applications.Parker cylinders are used in applications as diverse asmachine tools, flight simulation and tidal barrier control.

inPHormEuropean Cylinder inPHorm is Parker Hannifin’s new productselection program that helps you to select the correct part foran application. The program prompts for the details of theapplication, makes the necessary design calculations, andselects a suitable product. inPHorm can generate CADdrawings of the selected cylinder, which can be viewed in othersoftware applications, and customised and imported into otherCAD packages. Please contact your local Sales Office forfurther information.

The position switches described in this catalogue have beendesigned for service in steel mills, plastic injection mouldingplants and other applications where rugged, dependableequipment is required. In addition to the standard designsfeatured in this catalogue, position switches can be adapted tosuit individual customer requirements. Our engineers will bepleased to discuss and advise on unique designs to suitspecific applications. Position switches are available for thefollowing cylinder ranges:

HMI/HMD – 210 bar metric tie rod cylinders

2H – 210 bar inch series tie rod cylinders

3L – 70 bar inch series tie rod cylinders

2A – 18 bar inch series pneumatic tie rod cylinders

MMA – 250 bar metric roundline cylinders

MMB – 160 bar metric roundline cylinders

Position SwitchesIntroduction

3


Introduction and Application

CE MarkingThe position switches fitted by Parker are CE marked to certifythat they meet the requirements of the EU Directive 89/336/EWGfor electromagnetic compatibility.

ApplicationThe differing designs and performance parameters of the twoswitch types determine their suitability for different applications.While End of Stroke switches register a fixed point at thebeginning and/or end of piston travel, Read.me switches allowmid-stroke positions to be chosen by the user for switching andsequencing operations.

Switching by the Read.me switch sensor occurs as the pistonenters a switching 'zone'. The switching point is highly repeat-able, in either direction, under conditions of constant pistonspeed and operating temperature. The switching zone may beup to 50mm wide depending on cylinder tube wall thicknessand piston speed. Because of the physical size of the sensor,and the magnet carrier's location offset to one side of the piston– see figures 1 & 2 on page 4 – the point at which this switchingzone begins does not allow end-of-stroke switching at the capend of the cylinder. Where switching at or close to the cap endis critical, machine designers should contact our Engineeringdepartment so that a custom solution can be developed.

Parker's versatile clamping mechanism allows the position ofthe Read.me sensor to be adjusted, permitting the samecylinder to be adapted to different processes and operations.The number of Read.me switches which can be fitted isrestricted only by available mounting space on the cylinder tube.

Position Switch Selection Guide

C/F – consult factory1 For larger and smaller bore cylinders, please consult factory

Position Switches

Why Use Position Switches? enhance the versatility of a hydraulic cylinder

provide reliable and accurate position sensing

simpler and less costly than a feedback transducer

mid-stroke switches can be adjusted to suit differentproduction processes

can provide safety interlocks in critical applications

integral LEDs provide continuous visual monitoring

non-contacting designs have no wearing parts

suitable for tough operating conditions

Operating PrinciplesEnd-of-Stroke switches are inductive-type designs, fitted to thecylinder's head and/or cap. On cushioned cylinders, switchesare actuated by the presence of the cushion sleeve and spear ateach end of the cylinder's stroke. On non-cushioned cylinders,the sleeve and spear are also fitted but by-pass orifices areadded at the head and cap to overcome the cushioning effect.

Read.me switches employ a sensor clamped to the cylindertube, and magnets attached to the piston. The flux of thesepermanent magnets, as they pass the sensor, induces atemporary change of polarity in the sensor, and it is this changeof polarity which provides the switching effect.

Parker's End-of-Stroke and Read.me position switches areavailable for both cushioned and non-cushioned cylinders.

Read.me Switch – Construction

SwitchType

End ofStroke

Read.me

Senses Position at CanRegisterMultiplePositions

PositionAdjustable

by User

Bore sizes available (mm)Mounting

StylesAvailable

ProtectiveCovers

AvailableEnd ofStroke

Close toEnd ofStroke

Mid-stroke HMI/HMD 2H, 3L, 2A MMB MMA

32-200 38.1-203.2 All All All C/F

Head Head 32 -125 1 C/F 40 -125 1 50 -125 1 All 2

Cap - C/F Cap - C/F

2 Switch position may be restricted on mountings DD (HMI/HMD) andMS2 and MT4 (MMA and MMB) – see pages 4 and 5.

Read.me Switch

Magnets

StandardPiston

Magnet CarrierAssembly

StandardCushion Spear

StandardCushionSleeve

95mm

4


Read.me Position Switches

Read.me Position Switches– Operating PrincipleParker's Read.me switches detect the change in polarity of amagnetic field which occurs when the magnetic field of onemagnet interacts with the flux of a second, more powerfulmagnet. In the Read.me switch, permanent magnets attachedto the cylinder piston induce a residual magnetism in the tubeas they travel along its length. The sensor detects and adoptsthe polarity of the tube – see figure 1.

Figure 1

Figure 2

Operating RangeRead.me switches provide highly repeatable position switchingat intermediate stroke positions of a cylinder. They clamp to acylinder tie rod and are infinitely adjustable between thecylinder's head and cap ends. Because the switching effectoccurs within a 'zone' rather than at a single point, see'Application' on page 3, Read.me switches are not suitable forposition switching close to the cap end of a standard cylinder.The length of stroke 'A' which cannot be monitored using aRead.me switch is shown in the table and diagram below, andis measured from the fully retracted (cap end of stroke) position.Where switching within this zone is required, please contact ourEngineering department to discuss a custom solution.

On the return stroke, the greater strength of the movingmagnetic field prevails over the residual magnetism of theswitch and causes a change of polarity – see figure 2.

This switching effect enables the position of the piston in acylinder to be monitored, allowing external controls andprocesses to be linked to piston position.

LEDs incorporated into the switch housing allow the user tovisually monitor the switching point.

PerformanceParker's Read.me switches have been designed to operate at amaximum piston speed of 0.5m/s, and a maximum cylindertemperature of 80°C. Exceptions to these figures are as follows:

MMA50mm, 80mm and 100mm bore cylinders:– At max. temp. 80°C, piston speed should not exceed 0.2m/s.– At max. temp. 50°C, piston speed should not exceed 0.5m/s.

MMB100mm bore cylinders:– At max. temp. 80°C, piston speed should not exceed 0.2m/s.– At max. temp. 50°C, piston speed should not exceed 0.5m/s.

Designs for use at higher speeds and/or temperatures areavailable to special order. Our engineers will be pleased todiscuss and advise on unique designs to suit specificapplications.

Additional Build LengthThe addition of the magnet carrier to the piston increases thebuild length 'B' of cylinders equipped for Read.me switches.The additional lengths shown in the table and diagram belowshould be added to all the stroke dependent lengths of thecylinders, as listed in the individual product catalogues – seepage 2.


Performance and Operation

Bore Size

Increase in Build Length - B

HMI/HMD MMA MMB

32 33 N/A N/A

40 33 N/A 33

50 43 43 43

63 43 43 43

80 48 48 48

100 48 48 48

125 48 48 48

Bore Size

Unmonitored Switching Zone - A

HMI/HMD MMA MMB

All styles,cap end

All stylesexcl. MS2

MS2only

All stylesexcl. MSP

MSPonly

32 46 N/A N/A N/A N/A

40 46 N/A N/A 54 68

50 38 80 80 47 67

63 38 75 75 47 61

80 35 76 87 43 64

100 35 76 91 43 69

125 34 75 80 42 68

A

B

Unmonitored SwitchingZone

5


Read.me Position Switches

Cylinder Mounting StylesRead.me switches are suitable for use with all mounting styles.Note, however, that the positioning of the switches can berestricted by the trunnion body on centre trunnion designs DD(HMI/HMD) and MT4 (MMA and MMB), and by the foot mountingflanges on MS2 (MMA) and MSP (MMB) cylinders. Whereswitching is required in these restricted areas, custom solutionsmay be available – please contact our Engineering department.

PositioningRead.me switches can be fitted to either side of a tie rod, allowingswitching zones to be positioned close together if desired. Notethat, where switch orientation is reversed, the action of the statusLEDs will also be reversed. The total number of Read.meswitches which can be fitted to a cylinder is restricted only byavailable mounting space.

InstallationA robust alloy bracket holds the Read.me switch against thecylinder tube, and clamps to the tie rod or mounting rod with aset screw. Releasing the set screw allows the switch to berepositioned at any point on the cylinder tube. Read.meswitches are supplied with a right-angled connector fitted withfive metres of cable, which may be cut to length.

To establish switch position relative to piston or processposition, proceed as follows.

1 Connect the Read.me switch connector to the switch bodyand to the control unit/power supply.

2 Cycle the cylinder to 'format' the residual magnetism of thetube, and advance the cylinder piston to the position atwhich switching is to occur.

3 Position the Read.me switch and clamp on the cylinder tie rodor mounting rod. Do not tighten the set screw at this stage.

4 With power supplied to the switch, move the switch bodyalong the tie rod or mounting rod until the switching positioncan be established using the switch status LED. Dependingon the switch status required, move the switch until thestatus LED has just illuminated or just cut out.

5 Tighten the set screw against the tie rod or mounting rod,and cycle the cylinder at operating speed to confirmswitching position. If adjustment is necessary, slacken theset screw slightly, reposition the switch and re-tighten.

Connector Wiring

Technical Data and Ordering

On a tie rod cylinder, any of the structural tie rods may be usedto mount Read.me switches.

On roundline cylinders MMA and MMB, a switch mounting rod(or rods) is added during manufacture to permit attachment ofthe switches. Unless otherwise specified, this rod will be fittedat 90° to the head port position, ie: in position 2 as illustrated onpage 7. Where an alternative switch mounting rod position isrequired, this should be specified at the time of order.

Protective CoversRead.me switches are available with the option of protectivecovers, for use where the switch or its connector could bevulnerable to damage. The covers attach to the clamp bracketand fit over Parker's standard right-angled connectors.

SpecificationSwitch output antivalent pnpSwitch zone 50mm typicalSwitch hysteresis 5mm typicalRepeatability 0.5mm typicalSupply voltage 10-30V DCLoad current 100mACurrent consumption 30mAVoltage drop 1.5VShort circuit protection TimedReverse polarity protection Polarity protectedProtection per DIN 40050 IP67Connection detachable 4 pin round connectorCable length 5m

CablingPosition switch cabling should be routed separately fromcables carrying high currents or cables wired to inductiveloads, as these could interfere with the signal.


Bore

AWith

Cover(max)

BWithoutCover(max)

C

32-40 30 24 23

50-100 37 31 35

125 33 27 45

Model Numbers and OrderingTo order a cylinder with Read.me switches, the standardcylinder model code should be used. Under 'special features',an 'S' should be inserted and the appropriate information fromthe following table, including quantities, should be added.Note: For MMA/MMB cylinders only, the position of the mountingswitch rod(s) relative to head port position must be stated.

Read.me Switch Kit Numbers

Switch Kit, Bore Sizes 32-40mm PS100

Switch Kit, Bore Sizes 50-100mm PS101

Switch Kit, Bore Size 125mm PS102

Protective Cover (all models) PS103

ExampleAn MMB cylinder with two Read.me position switches andprotective covers mounted at 180° from the port; ports inposition 1 and air bleeds in position 4:

100 C MF3 MMB R E S 1 4 M C 250 M 11 44S = two off PS101 plus two off PS103; switch mounting rodat 180° from port position

AB

C

Tie Rodor SwitchMounting Rod

1 Brown

2 Black (output A)

3 White (output B)

4 Blue

+

–

6


Standard Connector PS011

Optional Connector PS012

Introduction to End of StrokePosition SwitchesParker's End of Stroke position switches are pressure tested to500 bar. They are unaffected by vibration, dust or oil and,because they are built into the cylinder, are partly protectedfrom physical damage. Where required, steel covers can besupplied to protect the exposed connector. End of Strokeposition switches will operate reliably to within 100mm ofresistance welding tips.

End of Stroke position switches are non-contacting, inductive-type switches. They are available for cushioned and non-cushioned cylinders with a stroke length over 15mm, and canbe supplied for the head and cap ends of the cylinder.

The point at which the switches operate varies for differentcylinder configurations, at between 1.0mm and 4.0mm from theend of stroke. The switching point for a particular cylinder isrepeatable within 0.5mm.

Cylinders with CushionsOn cushioned cylinders, End of Stroke switches are actuatedby the presence of the cushion sleeve or the cushion spear atthe end of the cylinder's stroke. On non-cushioned cylinders, thesleeve and spear are also fitted but by-pass orifices are addedat the head and cap to overcome the cushioning effect.

The combination of cushions and End of Stroke positionswitches on a cylinder with one of the following mounting stylesrequires a special design. Where one of these combinations isrequired, please contact the factory.

Style D – with a cushion at the head endStyle DB – with a cushion at the cap end

Cylinders with Stroke AdjustersEnd of Stroke position switches are not available at the capends of cylinders fitted with stroke adjusters.

Short-Circuit ProtectionA bi-stable type of short circuit protection prevents damage tothe End of Stroke position switch through overload or short-circuit.

If a short circuit occurs, the output transistor is turned off. Whenthe short circuit is removed, the switch will operate normallyagain if either the power supply is momentarily interrupted, or ifthe switch is operated by movement of the piston rod from theend of stroke position. The cause of the short circuit must beremoved to prevent recurrence.

Note: End of Stroke position switches are low current, solidstate devices using PNP switching. Care must be taken toprevent overloading on connection. Position switches must notbe connected directly to low resistance loads as these wouldcause the short circuit protection to operate.

End of Stroke Position Switches

Connector TypesThe standard DC End of Stroke position switch is supplied witha screw-type connector, part no. PS011, moulded onto fivemetres of cable which can be cut to length. A screwed collarand keyway ensure correct connector alignment.

An optional connector, part no. PS012, allows the user to fit hisown cabling. The connector may be positioned at 90° intervalsto the switch body, as required.

Both types of connector are equipped with two LEDs, the firstshowing 'power on' and the second illuminating when the switchis activated. On the PS012 connector, the LEDs can beconnected or left unconnected, as preferred.

Introduction

CablingPosition switch cabling should be routed separately fromcables carrying high currents or cables wired to inductiveloads, as these could interfere with the signal.

7


Mounting Data

2H Cylinders – Switch Positions Available

The drawing shows position switch mounting positions for thecylinder head and cap, as viewed from the rod end. The port isshown in position 1, but can be supplied in other positionsdepending on the mounting style chosen – see the appropriateproduct catalogue for details.

Mounting Configurations

Tie Rod CylindersThe tables list the standard mounting positions for End of Strokeposition switches fitted to tie rod cylinders, where thesepositions are not occupied by a port or cushion adjustingscrew. Where the required position is not listed, specialdesigns may be available – please consult the factory.

Roundline CylindersEnd of Stroke position switches may be fitted to the heads andcaps of MMA and MMB cylinders in any position which is notoccupied by a port, or obstructed by the style of mountingchosen. The drawing shows position switch mounting positionsfor the cylinder head and cap, as viewed from the rod end. Theport is shown in position 1, but can be supplied in otherpositions depending on the mounting style chosen – pleaseconsult the factory for details.

3L and 2A Cylinders – Switch Positions Available

HMI/HMD Cylinders – Switch Positions Available

Head Cap Head End

Head Cap Head End


MountingStyle

Bore Size (mm)

32 40 50 63 80 100 125 160 200

CHead

1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 AnyCap

JJ (HMI)Head Any

Cap Any

JJ (HMD)Head 1, 3 Any

Cap Any

HHHead Any

Cap Any 1, 3

DHead 1, 3

Cap Any

DBHead Any

Cap 1, 3

TB, TC, TD,BB, SBd, DD, B

Any

MountingStyle

Bore Size (mm)

38.1 50.8 63.5 82.6 101.6 127.0 152.4 203.2

CHead

1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 AnyCap

JHead 1, 3 1, 3 Any

Cap Any

JBHead N/A Any

Cap Any

HHead Any

Cap 1, 3 1, 3 Any

HBHead Any

Cap N/A N/A Any

DHead 1 or 3, opposite port face

Cap Any

DBHead Any

Cap 1 or 3, opposite port face

T, TB, TC, TD,BB, BC, DD,

Any

F, G 1, 2 or 4, except port face

3

24

1

gnitnuoMelytS

)mm(eziSeroB

1.83 8.05 5.36 6.28 6.101 0.721 4.251 8.771 2.302

CdaeH

3,1 3,1 3,1 ynApaC

JdaeH 3,1 ynA

paC ynA

BJdaeH A/N ynA

paC ynA

HdaeH ynA

paC 3,1 ynA

BHdaeH ynA

paC A/N ynA

DdaeH ecaftropetisoppo,3ro1

paC ynA

BDdaeH ynA

paC ecaftropetisoppo,3ro1

,CT,BT,T,BB,JJ,DT

BS,DDynA

G,F ecaftroptpecxe,4ro2,1

HHdaeH ynA

paC ynA 3,1

8


DimensionsHow to Use These DimensionsWhen specifying a cylinder fitted with End of Stroke positionswitches, this catalogue should be used in conjunction with theappropriate cylinder catalogue. Most cylinder dimensions donot change with the addition of an End of Stroke position switch,and should be taken from the cylinder catalogue.

Tie Rod CylindersWhere tie rod cylinder dimensions differ from the basic cylinder,they should be identified from the drawing and tables below.

End of Stroke position switches can be fitted to 25mm boreHMI/HMD series cylinders and 25.4mm bore 3L and 2A seriescylinders, depending on the mounting style chosen. Wherethese sizes are required, please consult the factory with detailsof the application.

Mounting Dimensions – Series 3L and 2A

Mounting Dimensions – Series 2H

Roundline CylindersFor dimensional changes to roundline cylinders fitted with Endof Stroke position switches, please consult the factory.



Bore RodNo.

Rod

∅ ∅

38.11 15.9

2 25.4

50.81 25.4

2 34.9

63.5

1 25.4

2 44.5

3 34.9

82.6

1 34.9

2 50.8

3 44.5

101.6

1 44.5

2 63.5

3 50.8

127.0

1 50.8

2 88.9

3 63.5

4 76.2

152.4

1 63.5

2 101.6

3 76.2

4 88.9

177.8

1 76.2

2 127.0

3 88.9

4 101.6

203.2

1 88.9

2 139.7

3 101.6

4 127.0

H1 max

A

H2 max

BAll exc.

JJ,Pos'ns2 & 4

JJ,Pos'ns2 & 4

All exc.HH,

Pos'ns2 & 4

HH,Pos'ns2 & 4

68.5 7322.5 62.5 68 14.1

72.5 77

68.5 6822.5 85.5 105 15.6

71.5 71

86.5 106

22.5 78.5 98 15.671.5 71

66.5 66

78.5 92 22.3

69.5 82 17.563.5 102 30.3

83.5 97 22.3

77.5 90 22.3

66.5 79 1965.5 10330.3

82.5 95

63.5 68

30.3 95.5 55 2283.5 89

70.5 76

77.5 83

103.5 57

30.287.5 41 25.2

77.5 76

64.5 63

71.5 70 36.7

96.5 46 30.3

79.5 29 26.878.5 65 33.3

103.5 52 30.3

64.5 59 42.8

90.5 35 30.2

68.5 N/A 31.772.5 61 33.7

96.5 41 49.2

66.5 55 39.7

H1A

H2B

max max

74.522.1 69.5 10.4

79.5

71.5 18.1

63.5 10.477.5 22.1

74.5 18.1

68.5 18.1

81.5 10.477.5 22.1

72.518.1

65.5

86.5 18.5

78.5 10.376.5 26.5

66.518.5

71.5

78.5 18.5

67.5 10.3

71.5 26.5

83.5 18.5

63.5 26.5

74.5 18.5

70.5 18.5

99.5 10.3

71.5

26.575.5

83.5

64.5

61.518.5

66.5

103.5 18.3

88.5 9.5

64.5

26.3

63.5

70.5

77.5

83.5

98.5 18.3

82.5 26.3

63.5 9.5

85.5 29.3

90.5

26.396.5

103.5

64.5

73.518.3

77.5

78.5 29.3

Bore 2ARodNo.

3LRodNo.

Rod

∅ ∅

38.11 1 15.9

2 2 25.4

50.8

1 1 15.9

2 2 34.9

3 3 25.4

63.5

3 1 25.4

2 2 44.5

4 3 34.9

1 7 15.9

82.6

1 1 25.4

2 2 50.8

3 3 34.9

4 4 44.5

101.6

3 1 34.9

2 2 63.5

4 3 44.5

5 4 50.8

1 7 25.4

127.0

4 1 44.5

2 2 88.9

5 3 50.8

6 4 63.5

7 5 76.2

1 7 25.4

3 8 34.9

152.4

3 1 44.5

2 2 101.6

4 3 50.8

5 4 63.5

6 5 76.2

7 6 88.9

1 7 34.9

203.2

4 1 50.8

2 2 139.7

5 3 63.5

6 4 76.2

7 5 88.9

8 6 101.6

1 7 34.9

3 8 44.5

0 0 127.0

9


Dimensions and Installation

Mounting Dimensions – Series HMI/HMD Switch InstallationThere are two alternative methods of installation for End ofStroke position switches, both of which are suitable for use withtie rod or roundline cylinders. Method 1 aligns the connectorwith the cylinder's centreline, while method 2 may be usedwhere connector alignment is not critical.

Note: On series 3L and 2A cylinders with No.2 rods and38.1mm, 50.8mm or 63.5mm bores, an adapter is used tomount the switch, in place of the retaining plate shown. In thesecases, method 2 should be used.

Method 1Hold the End of Stroke switch firmly against its locating shoulder,with the connector aligned with the cylinder's centreline. Screwthe retaining plate down until it meets the mounting surface,and then back off until the screw holes align. This will leave agap of less than 0.5mm under the plate. Torque tighten the twofixing screws evenly to 10Nm.

Method 2Screw the retaining plate onto the End of Stroke switch, and usethe switch for alignment as the plate is fitted to the mountingsurface. Torque tighten the two fixing screws evenly to 10Nm.Screw the switch down until the locating shoulder bottoms, andtighten the lock nut to secure in position.

E



H1 max

A

H2 max

BAll exc.

JJ,Pos'ns2 & 4

JJ,Pos'ns2 & 4

All exc.HH,

Pos'ns2 & 4

HH,Pos'ns2 & 4

80 67 2473 61 8

83 70 21

75 77 2165 67 14.5

77 78 21.5

69 66 21

83 101 14.575 73 21.5

72 69 21

66 107 21

80 97 14.574 70 21.5

69 65 21.5

81 92 21

71 83 19.566 102 29

85 97 21

77 87 21

66 76 19.568 102 30

85 95 28

68 72 36

97 56 21.586 89 37.5

75 79 38

100 52 30

82 35 24.576 73 30

111 62 30

91 33 36

68 N/A 26.573 60 32.5

101 43 33.5

Bore RodNo.

Rod

∅ ∅

321 14

2 22

401 18

2 28

50

1 22

2 36

3 28

63

1 28

2 45

3 36

80

1 36

2 56

3 45

100

1 45

2 70

3 56

125

1 56

2 90

3 70

160

1 70

2 110

3 90

200

1 90

2 140

3 110

Location Shoulder

Retaining Plate

B12 mm clearance to removeconnector from switch

H2

A

H1

10


SpecificationsThe technical data which follows is applicable to the End ofStroke position switches and connectors fitted to both tie rodand roundline cylinders.

The switch is an inductive PNP device, ie: the load is connectedto the negative line. The output function is normally open (N/O).

Nominal voltage Vs, including ripple 10-30V DCRipple on DC supply 15% max.No-load current Io ≤10mAOutput resistance Ra and diode 4.7kΩOutput resistance Ra and diode with standard connector LED 2.2kΩResidual voltage at load resistance of 10kΩ (switch open) 0.8VVoltage drop Vd (switch closed) ≤1.5VResponse time 10µsec. (approx)Hysteresis ≤0.2mmRate of rise and fall of output voltage ≥1V/µ secMax. output load current Im = 5 x Vs mA eg: at Vs = 24, Im max = 5 x 24 = 120mAMin. load resistance RL min. 200ΩMax. load capacitance including cable 150nFMax. duty cycle 100%Ambient temperature -25°C to +70°CProtection class, housing only IP 67 (DIN 40 050)Protection class, with connector IP 67 (DIN 40 050)Housing material Stainless steel to

DIN X12CrMoS 17Peak pressure – switch 500 bar

Technical Data & Ordering

Power SupplyOutput voltage, including ripple 10-30V DC

T1 = output transistorRa = output resistanceD = Zener diode for peak voltage control with

inductive loadsD1 = wire leakage diodeD2 = reverse polarity protection diode

(short circuit protection)

Schematic Drawing of Switch

Connector Wiring and LED

Ripple

Vs = arithmetic average of DC voltageVr = amplitude of AC component voltage

Ripple = x 100%

Ripple is the alternating voltage superimposed on the DCvoltage (peak – peak) in %.

For the operation of DC voltage switches, a filtered DC voltagewith a ripple of 15% maximum is required.

Key to SymbolsMaximum load through switch = ImLoad current = ILSupply voltage = VsNo load current = IoVoltage drop across switch = VdVoltage across load = VLEffective collector load resistance = RaLoad resistance = RLNumber of switches = n

Model Numbers and OrderingTo order a cylinder with End of Stroke position switches, thestandard model code from the appropriate cylinder catalogueshould be used. In the 'special features' section of the code, an'S' should be inserted and the following information includedafter the model code:

End of Stroke position switch(es); end(s) required;position(s); optional connector(s) PS012 if required

Note that, if a position switch is required in position 1, therevised port position must be specified in the model code.

ExampleAn HMI cylinder with End of Stroke position switches andstandard connectors in position 1, ports in position 3 and airbleeds in position 4:

100 C JJ HMI R N S 1 4 M C 250 M 33 44S = End of Stroke position switches at both ends in Pos'n 1

Vs

Vr


Ω

++

-- Ω+

-+

-1

4 3

2

++

--

11


Calculation ExamplesThese show how to determine the number of switches (n)which may be connected in series or parallel for a givenvoltage supply and output loading. The examples use thefollowing values:

Supply voltage Vs 24VMin. voltage across the load VL 18VLoad resistance RL 360ΩOutput resistance Ra using standard connector 2.2kΩ

Therefore:Min. external load current IL = VL/RL 50mAMax. switch load current Im = 5 x Vs (see Specification, page 6) 120mA

Example – for Series Connection

a. Voltage relationship is Vs – n x Vd ≥ VL

Therefore number of switches n ≤

n ≤

Therefore maximum number of switches = 4

b. Current relationship is Im ≥ IL + nIo

n ≤

n ≤

Therefore maximum number of switches = 7

Using the lower of the two results shown above, the maximumnumber of switches which can be connected in series is four.

Example – for Parallel ConnectionIf external diodes are fitted, the number of switches is limitedonly by the power supply. Where external diodes are not fitted,the following current formula applies.

Current relationship is n + ≤ Im

Therefore n ≤ Im –

n ≤ –

n ≤ 4.9

Rounding down, the maximum number of switches which canbe connected in parallel = 4

(Vs – VL)

Vd

(24 – 18)1.5

(Im – IL)

Io

(120 – 50)

10

Applications Data

Series and Parallel ConnectionParker's End of Stroke position switches may be connected inseries, to give an AND function; or in parallel, giving an ORfunction. The maximum number of switches which may beconnected, in series or in parallel, depends on the externalload requirements. Calculation of maximum numbers isdescribed below.

Series Connection (AND Circuit)The number of position switches which may be connected inseries is limited by two factors – voltage drop and availablecurrent.

A voltage drop of approxi-mately 1.5 volts occursacross each switch, thereforethe output voltage availableat the load is reduced by1.5V x the number of switchesin series. In addition, eachswitch must supply the no-load current of all the otherswitches, as well as the loadcurrent, thus the sum of allthe no-load currents, plus theexternal load current, mustnot exceed the current of asingle switch. The maximumnumber of switches permissi-ble is determined by whicheverapproach results in a lowernumber.

Parallel Connection (OR Circuit)There is no limit to the number of switches which may beconnected in parallel, provided that isolating diodes are fittedexternally to the outputof each switch, as indicated.

Where connectors with LEDindicators are used, externalisolating diodes must befitted to prevent all of theLEDs from illuminating whenone switch is actuated.

If external diodes are omitted,the number of switches islimited because each switchwould have to drive theinternal collector load of allother switches, as well as theexternal loads.


Vs Vs

Ra RL

(((((

Vs

RL

Ra

Vs((((( )))))

120 241000 360

)))))24

2.2 x 1000


0300Hydraulics

Austria – MarchtrenkParker Hannifin GmbHTel: (7242) 56921Fax: (7242) 5692120

Belgium – NivellesParker Hannifin S.A. N.V.Tel: (67) 280 900Fax: (67) 280 999

Czech Republic – PragueParker Hannifin s. r. o.Tel: 2 830 85 221Fax: 2 830 85 360


Finland – VantaaParker Hannifin OyTel: 0 9 476 731Fax: 0 9 476 73200

France – Contamine-sur-ArveParker Hannifin S.A.Tel: 4 50 25.80.25Fax: 4 50 03.67.37


Hungary – BudapestParker Hannifin Corp.Tel + Fax: 1 252 2539



Norway – SkiParker Hannifin A/STel: (64) 91 10 00Fax: (64) 91 10 90


Slovakia –Ref. Czech Republic


Sweden – SpångaParker Hannifin AB.Tel: 08-760 29 60Fax: 08-761 81 70






Documents

Catalog Parker